Your SlideShare is downloading. ×
Microsoft windows vista on demand
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5

Thanks for flagging this SlideShare!

Oops! An error has occurred.


Introducing the official SlideShare app

Stunning, full-screen experience for iPhone and Android

Text the download link to your phone

Standard text messaging rates apply

Microsoft windows vista on demand


Published on

1 Like
  • Be the first to comment

No Downloads
Total Views
On Slideshare
From Embeds
Number of Embeds
Embeds 0
No embeds

Report content
Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

No notes for slide


  • 1. Steve JohnsonPerspection, Inc.Que Publishing800 East 96th StreetIndianapolis, IN 46240 USA™
  • 2. Microsoft® Windows Vista On DemandCopyright © 2007 by Perspection, Inc.All rights reserved. No part of this book shall be reproduced, stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from the publish-er. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the informationcontained herein. Although every precaution has been taken in the prepara-tion of this book, the publisher and author assume no responsibility for errorsor omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the useof the information contained herein.Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication DataJohnson, Steve, 1961-Microsoft Windows Vista On Demand / Steve Johnsonp. cm.ISBN 0-7897-3645-41. Microsoft Windows Vista. 2. Operating System. I. TitlePrinted and bound in the United States of AmericaFirst Printing: January 200710 09 08 07 4 3 2 1Que Publishing offers excellent discounts on this book when orderedin quantity for bulk purchases or special sales.For information, please contact: U.S. Corporate and Government Sales1-800-382-3419 or corpsales@pearsontechgroup.comFor sales outside the U.S., please contact: International Sales1-317-428-3341 or International@pearsontechgroup.comTrademarksAll terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or servicemarks have been appropriately capitalized. Que cannot attest to the accuracyof this information. Use of a term in this book should not be regarded asaffecting the validity of any trademark or service mark.Microsoft and the Microsoft Office logo are a registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.Warning and DisclaimerEvery effort has been made to make this book as complete and as accurate aspossible, but no warranty or fitness is implied. The authors and the publishersshall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity withrespect to any loss or damage arising from the information contained in thisbook.PublisherPaul BogerAssociate PublisherGreg WiegandAcquisitions EditorStephanie McCombManaging EditorSteve JohnsonAuthorSteve JohnsonTechnical EditorHolly JohnsonPage LayoutJames TeylerAlex WilliamsJennifer L. WareInterior DesignersSteve JohnsonMarian HartsoughPhotographsTracy TeylerIndexerKatherine StimsonProofreaderHolly JohnsonTeam CoordinatorMichelle Newcomb
  • 3. iiiAcknowledgementsaaPerspection, Inc.Microsoft Windows Vista On Demand has been created by the professional trainersand writers at Perspection, Inc. to the standards you’ve come to expect from Quepublishing.Together, we are pleased to present this training book.Perspection, Inc. is a software training company committed to providing informationand training to help people use software more effectively in order to communicate,make decisions, and solve problems. Perspection writes and produces softwaretraining books, and develops multimedia and Web-based training. Since 1991, wehave written more than 80 computer books, with several bestsellers to our credit,and sold over 5 million books.This book incorporates Perspection’s training expertise to ensure that you’ll receivethe maximum return on your time.You’ll focus on the tasks and skills that increaseproductivity while working at your own pace and convenience.We invite you to visit the Perspection Web site at:www.perspection.comAcknowledgementsThe task of creating any book requires the talents of many hard-working peoplepulling together to meet impossible deadlines and untold stresses. We’d like tothank the outstanding team responsible for making this book possible: the writer,Steve Johnson; the technical editor, Holly Johnson; the production team, JamesTeyler, Alex Williams, and Jennifer L. Ware; and the indexer, Katherine Stimson. We’dalso like to thank Gary and Lisa O’Neal for their support and encouragement.At Que publishing, we’d like to thank Greg Wiegand and Stephanie McComb for theopportunity to undertake this project, Michelle Newcomb for administrative support,and Sandra Schroeder for your production expertise and support.Perspection
  • 4. ivaaAbout The AuthorSteve Johnson has written more than 35 books on a variety of computersoftware, including Microsoft Office 2007 and 2003, Microsoft Windows XP, AppleMac OS X Panther, Macromedia Flash MX 2004 and 8, Macromedia Director MX2004, Macromedia Fireworks, and Adobe Photoshop CS and CS2. In 1991, afterworking for Apple Computer and Microsoft, Steve founded Perspection, Inc., whichwrites and produces software training. When he is not staying up late writing, heenjoys playing golf, gardening, and spending time with his wife, Holly, and threechildren, JP, Brett, and Hannah. When time permits, he likes to travel to such placesas New Hampshire in October, and Hawaii. Steve and his family live in Pleasanton,California, but can also be found visiting family all over the western United States.
  • 5. Acknowledgements vaWe Want To Hear From You!As the reader of this book, you are our most important critic and commentator. Wevalue your opinion and want to know what we’re doing right, what we could do bet-ter, what areas you’d like to see us publish in, and any other words ofwisdom you’re willing to pass our way.As an associate publisher for Que, I welcome your comments.You can email orwrite me directly to let me know what you did or didn’t like about this book—as wellas what we can do to make our books better.Please note that I cannot help you with technical problems related to the topicof this book. We do have a User Services group, however, where I will forward spe-cific technical questions related to the book.When you write, please be sure to include this book’s title and author as well asyour name, email address, and phone number. I will carefully review your com-ments and share them with the author and editors who worked on the book.Email: feedback@quepublishing.comMail: Greg WiegandQue Publishing800 East 96th StreetIndianapolis, IN 46240 USAFor more information about this book or another Que title, visit our Web site the ISBN (excluding hyphens) or the title of a book inthe Search field to find the page you’re looking for.
  • 6. This page intentionally left blank
  • 7. viiContentsccIntroduction xviiGetting Started with Windows Vista 1Introducing Windows Vista 2 New!Starting Windows Vista 4 New!Using Windows Aero 6 New!Exploring the Windows Desktop 8 New!Using the Mouse 10Using the Mouse for Quick Results 11Using the Start Menu 12 New!Using Windows Sidebar 14 New!Managing Windows 16Using Menus,Toolbars, and Panes 18Choosing Dialog Box Options 19Using Windows Help and Support 20 New!Switching Users 22Shutting DownYour Computer 24Working with Windows Programs 25Starting and Exiting a Program 26Changing the Way a Program Starts 28Using Windows Accessories 29 New!Creating a Document 30EditingText 32FormattingText 34Setting ParagraphTabs 35Setting Paragraph Indents 36Previewing and Printing a Document 37Saving and Closing a Document 38Sharing Information Among Programs 39Inserting and Editing Information 40Linking and Updating Information 4221
  • 8. viiicInserting Special Characters 44Calculating Numbers 45Running Commands 46Playing Games 48 New!Playing Internet Games 50Running Older Programs 51Quitting a Program Not Responding 52Managing Files and Folders 53Using the Explorer Window 54 New!Changing the Explorer Window View 55 New!Opening and Viewing the Computer 56Viewing and Opening Documents 58Opening Recently Used Documents 60 New!Working with Personal Folders 61 New!Navigating Between Folders 62 New!Viewing the Folders List 63Changing the Explorer Layout 64 New!Customizing the Navigation Pane 65 New!Organizing Files by Headings 66 New!Searching for Files and Folders 68 New!Saving a Search 70 New!Changing Search Options 71 New!Performing an Instant Search 72 New!Performing an Advanced Search 74 New!Performing Natural Language Searches 75 New!Adding Properties andTags to Files 76 New!Modifing the Index to Improve Searches 78 New!Creating and Renaming Files and Folders 80Copying and Moving Files and Folders 82Deleting and Restoring Files and Folders 84Creating a Shortcut to a File or Folder 86Hiding Files and Folders 87Changing Folder Options 88 New!Changing File and Folder List Views 90Customizing Personal Folders 91Sharing Folders or Files with Others 92 New!Compressing Files and Folders 94Managing Files Using a CD or DVD 96 New!3
  • 9. Contents ixcCustomizing Windows Using the Control Panel 99Viewing the Control Panel 100Changing the Desktop Background 101Customizing the Desktop 102Customizing the Windows Sidebar 103 New!Using a Screen Saver 104Changing the Display 105Using Multiple Monitors 106Changing theText Size on the Screen 107 New!Changing the Desktop Appearance 108Setting the Date andTime 110Changing Language Options 112Changing Regional Options 114Working with Fonts 115Displaying and ArrangingToolbars 116Customizing theTaskbar 118Customizing the Start Menu 120Setting Default Programs 122Changing the Way a CD or DVD Starts 124Using Ease of AccessTools 125Using the Ease of Access Center 126 New!Listening to the Computer 128RecognizingYour Speech 130 New!Exploring the Internet 133Understanding Web Sites and Browsers 134 New!Connecting to the Internet 135Creating an Internet Connection 136Setting Up Windows Firewall 137Starting Internet Explorer 138 New!Viewing the Internet Explorer Window 139Browsing the Web 140Browsing withTabs 142 New!Navigating Basics 144Zooming the View In and Out 145 New!ChangingYour Home Page 146 New!Modifying the Links Bar 147 New!Adding a Web Page to the Favorites List 148 New!Viewing and Maintaining a History List 150Reading and Subscribing to Feeds 152 New!54
  • 10. xcSearching the Web 154 New!Previewing and Printing a Web Page 156 New!Saving Pictures orText from a Web Page 158Downloading Files from the Web 160Downloading Files from an FTP Site 161Saving a Web Page 162Sending a Page or Link by E-mail 163 New!Using Another Web Browser 164Exchanging Messages and Information 165Starting Windows Mail 166Setting Up an Account 168Viewing the Windows Mail Window 170Importing and Exporting Information 171Adding a Contact to Windows Contacts 172 New!Composing and Sending E-mail 174Creating E-mail Stationery 176Reading and Replying to E-mail 178Sending and Retrieving a File 180Managing E-mail 182 New!Deleting E-mail 184Setting Junk E-mail Options 186Marking an E-mail Blocked or Safe 188Diverting Incoming E-mail to Folders 189Selecting a News Server 190Subscribing to a Newsgroup 191Reading the News 192Filtering the News 193Posting a News Message 194Viewing the Windows Calendar 196 New!Scheduling an Appointment 197 New!CreatingTasks 198 New!Creating and Sharing Calendars 199 New!Publishing Calendars Over the Internet 200 New!Starting a Windows Meeting 201 New!Holding a Windows Meeting 202 New!Sharing Information in a Windows Meeting 204 New!6
  • 11. Contents xicHolding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 207Preparing for Windows Live Messenger 208 New!Starting Windows Live Messenger 210Configuring Windows Live Messenger 211Viewing Windows Live Messenger 212Changing My Status 213Personalizing Windows Live Messenger 214 New!Adding Online Contacts 216 New!Managing Contacts and Groups 217Sending and Receiving Instant Messages 218 New!Adding Symbols and Voice to an Instant Message 220 New!Blocking a Contact 222Sending a File During an Instant Message 223Sharing Files Using Shared Folders 224 New!Making a Video Call with the Internet 226 New!Making a Phone Call with the Internet 227Sending a Message to a Mobile Device 228 New!Getting Remote Assistance 230Customizing Windows Live Messenger 232Working with Pictures 233Drawing a Picture 234Editing a Picture 236Viewing Pictures 238Managing Pictures in the Photo Gallery 240 New!Fixing Pictures in the Photo Gallery 242 New!E-mailing a Picture 243Formatting and Printing Photos 244Ordering Photo Prints from the Web 245Installing a Scanner or Digital Camera 246Testing a Scanner or Digital Camera 247Scanning a Picture 248 New!Downloading Digital Camera Pictures 250Using Pictures as a Screen Saver 252Using a Picture as a Desktop Background 253Setting Photo Gallery Options 25487
  • 12. xiicWorking with Windows Media Player 255Starting and Updating Windows Media Player 256Viewing the Media Player Window 257Playing Music from CDs 258Playing a DVD or VCD Movie 259Controlling the Volume 260Browsing the Media Guide and Online Stores 262Listening to Radio Stations 263Playing Media Files 264Playing Media Using a Playlist 266Ripping CD Music 268Copying Media Files to a CD or Portable Device 270Adding Functionality to Media Player 272Enhancing the Media Player Display 273Changing the Media Player Look 274Viewing and Playing Music Files 275Creating a Sound File 276Associating a Sound with an Event 277Starting and Navigating Windows Media Center 278 New!Changing Windows Media Center Settings 279 New!Finding and Viewing Windows Media Center Files 280 New!Creating Movies Using Windows Movie Maker 281Planning a Movie Maker Project 282Starting Movie Maker 283Viewing the Movie Maker Window 284Opening an Existing Project 285Capturing Video and Audio 286 New!Importing Video and Audio 288Adding Slides to a Movie 290Organizing Clips and Collections 292Working with Clips 294Creating a Movie Maker Project File 296Trimming Clips 298AddingTransitions Between Clips 299 New!Adding Video Effects 300 New!AddingTitles and Credits 301 New!Adding a Soundtrack 302Adding a Narration 303Using AutoMovie 304 New!109
  • 13. Contents xiiicSaving a Project 305Publishing a Movie 306Creating a DVD Video 308Setting Up Accounts and Maintaining Security 309Securing a Computer 310Adding and Deleting User Accounts 312Creating a Guest Account 314Changing a User’s Group or AccountType 315Changing the Start Up Screen 316Changing an Account Picture 317Changing and Setting a Password 318Resetting a Password 320Locking the Computer 321Managing Security in One Place 322Defending Against Malicious Software 324 New!Setting Parental Controls 326 New!Sending Secure Information Using Windows CardSpace 327 New!Encrypting Files for Safety 328Encrypting Files Using BitLocker 329 New!Avoiding Viruses and Other Harmful Attacks 330Understanding Security on the Internet 332Creating Security Zones 334Setting Ratings Using the Content Advisor 336Cleaning Up Internet Files and Information 337 New!Protecting Internet Privacy 338 New!Protecting an Internet Identity 339Protecting Against Phishing 340 New!Blocking Pop-Up Ads 342Using the Information Bar 343Managing Add-Ons 344Protecting Against E-mail Attacks 345Sending Secure E-mail 346Managing Files Using a Network 347Understanding Network Services 348Viewing a Network 350Viewing the Network and Sharing Center 352 New!Viewing Network Computer Properties 354Viewing Network Connection Properities 355Joining a Workgroup Network 3561211
  • 14. xivcJoining A Domain Network 358Connecting to a Network Using a Modem 360Connecting to a Network over the Internet 362Connecting to a Wireless Network 364Setting Up a Wireless Network 366Setting Up a Wireless Computer Connection 367Adding a Wireless Device to a Network 368Managing a Wireless Connection 370Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive 372Creating a Shortcut to a Network 373Setting Network Sharing Options 374 New!Controlling a Remote Computer 376Sharing an Internet Connection 378Changing a Dial-Up Connection 380Going Mobile 381Viewing the Windows Mobility Center 382 New!Controlling Power Options 384 New!Keeping Files in Sync 386 New!Working with Offline Files 388Connecting to a Network Projector 390 New!Viewing Windows SideShow 391 New!Changing Pen and Input Device Options 392 New!Working withTablet PCTools 394ChangingTablet PC Options 396 New!Printing and Faxing 397Understanding Printers 398Viewing Printers 399Installing a Printer 400Specifying a Default Printer 402Renaming or Deleting a Printer 403Sharing a Printer 404Printing Documents 405Managing Printers and Print Jobs 406Changing Printer Properties 408Changing Printer Preferences 410Understanding Faxes 411Setting Up a Fax 412 New!Creating a Fax Cover Page 414Sending a Fax 4161413
  • 15. Contents xvcManaging Outgoing Faxes 418Receiving a Fax 420Reviewing a Fax 421Changing Fax Properties 422Changing Fax Options 424Maintaining Your Computer 425Understanding Disk File Systems 426Formatting a Disk 428Displaying Disk and Folder Information 430Transferring Files Using a Disk 431Setting Disk Quotas for Users 432 New!Detecting and Repairing Disk Errors 433Optimizing a Disk 434 New!Cleaning Up a Disk 435 New!SchedulingTasks 436 New!Adding or Removing Windows Components 437 New!Installing and Uninstalling a Program 438 New!Updating Windows 440Improving Computer Performance 442 New!Boosting Speed with Removable Media 443 New!Restoring Computer Settings 444Using Previous Versions 446 New!Starting Windows When Problems Occur 447Setting Startup and Recovery Options 448Managing Hardware 449Understanding Plug and Play Hardware 450Installing Hardware Devices 452Viewing System Hardware 453Viewing Hardware Settings 454Changing Windows Update Driver Settings 455 New!Changing Mouse Settings 456Changing Keyboard Settings 458Changing Phone Dialing Options 459Changing Modem Options 460Managing Color 461 New!Adding a Secondary Monitor 462Changing Game Controller Settings 464Removing Hardware Devices 4651615
  • 16. xvicBacking Up Your Computer 467Developing a Backup Strategy 468Understanding Backup Permissions 470Exploring the Backup and Restore Center 471 New!Performing a Backup Using a Wizard 472Changing Backup Settings 474Scheduling a Backup 476Restoring Files Using a Wizard 478Restoring Files Using Advanced Settings 480Copying Files From the Backup 482RestoringYour Computer 483Deleting a Backup Set 484Administering Your Computer 485Exploring Windows AdministrativeTools 486Monitoring Activity with Event Viewer 487Managing an Event Log 488Changing Log Settings 490Checking Memory for Problems 491Viewing and Creating Performance Charts 492Monitoring Local Security Settings 494Viewing Computer ManagementTools 496Managing Disks 497Managing Local Users and Groups 498Viewing and Saving System Information 499Setting System Configuration Options 500Appendix 501Preparing to Install Windows Vista 502Installing Windows Vista 504Updating to a Windows Vista Service Pack 506Transferring Files and Settings from Another Computer 508Getting Windows Vista Extras 510Learning About Windows Live 511 New!New Features 513 New!Microsoft Certified Applications Specialist 519Index 529A1817
  • 17. xviiIntroductionWelcome to Microsoft Windows Vista On Demand, avisual quick reference book that shows you how to workefficiently with Windows Vista. This book provides completecoverage of basic to advanced Vista skills.How This Book WorksYou don’t have to read this book in any particular order.We’ve designed the book so that you can jump in, get theinformation you need, and jump out. However, the book doesfollow a logical progression from simple tasks to more com-plex ones. Each task is presented on no more than two facingpages, which lets you focus on a single task without havingto turn the page.To find the information that you need, justlook up the task in the table of contents or index, and turn tothe page listed. Read the task introduction, follow the step-by-step instructions in the left column along with screen illus-trations in the right column, and you’re done.What’s NewIf you’re searching for what’s new in Windows Vista, just lookfor the icon: New!.The new icon appears in the table of con-tents and through out this book so you can quickly and easilyidentify a new or improved feature in Windows Vista. A com-plete description of each new feature appears in the New Fea-tures guide in the back of this book.Keyboard ShortcutsMost menu commands have a keyboard equivalent, such asCtrl+P, as a quicker alternative to using the mouse. A com-plete list of keyboard shortcuts is available on the Webat You’ll LearnHow This Book WorksWhat’s NewKeyboard ShortcutsStep-by-Step InstructionsReal World ExamplesWorkshopMicrosoft Certified ApplicationsSpecialistGet More on the Web
  • 18. xviiiStep-by-StepInstructionsThis book provides concise step-by-step instructions that show you“how” to accomplish a task. Eachset of instructions include illustra-tions that directly correspond tothe easy-to-read steps. Alsoincluded in the text are time-savers, tables, and sidebars tohelp you work more efficiently orto teach you more in-depth infor-mation. A “DidYou Know?” pro-vides tips and techniques to helpyou work smarter, while a “SeeAlso” leads you to other parts ofthe book containing related infor-mation about the task.Real World ExamplesThis book uses real world exam-ples files to give you a context inwhich to use the task. By usingthe example files, you won’t wastetime looking for or creating sam-ple files.You get a start file and aresult file, so you can compareyour work. Not every topic needsan example file, such as changingoptions, so we provide a completelist of the example files usedthrough out the book.The exam-ple files that you need for projecttasks along with a complete filelist are available on the Web worldexamples helpyou apply whatyou’ve learnedto other tasks.Illustrationsmatch thenumberedsteps.Numberedsteps guideyou througheach task.Did You Know? alertsyou to tips, techniquesand related information.See Also points you torelated information inthe book.Easy-to-followintroductionsfocus on asingle concept.
  • 19. Introduction xixWorkshopThis book shows you how to puttogether the individual step-by-step tasks into indepth projectswith the Workshop.You start eachproject with a sample file, workthrough the steps, and then com-pare your results with projectresults file at the end.The Work-shop projects and associated filesare available on the Web CertifiedApplications SpecialistThis book prepares you for theMicrosoft Certified ApplicationsSpecialist (MCAS) exam forMicrosoft Windows Vista. EachMCAS certification exam has a setof objectives, which are organizedinto broader skill sets.To preparefor the certification exam, youshould review and perform eachtask identified with a MCAS objec-tive to confirm that you can meetthe requirements for the exam.Throughout this book, contentthat pertains to an objective isidentified with the followingMCAS logo and objective numbernext to it.The Workshopwalks youthrough indepthprojects to helpyou put Accessto work.Logo indicates atask fulfills oneor more MCAScertificationobjectives.
  • 20. xxGet More on the WebIn addition to the information inthis book, you can also get moreinformation on the Web to helpyou get up to speed faster withWindows Vista. Some of theinformation includes:Transition Helpers◆ Only New Features.Download and print the newfeature tasks as a quick andeasy guide.Productivity Tools◆ Keyboard Shortcuts.Download a list of keyboardshortcuts to learn faster waysto get the job done.More Content◆ Photographs. Downloadphotographs and othergraphics to use in your Officedocuments.◆ More Content. Downloadnew content developed afterpublication. For example,you can download acomplete chapter on OfficeSharePoint Server 2007.You can access these additionalresources on the Web contentis available on theWeb. You candownload a chapteron SharePoint.
  • 21. Getting Started withWindows VistaIntroductionMicrosoft Windows Vista introduces a breakthrough userexperience that is designed to help you intuitively view, find,and organize information on your computer. Windows Vistadelivers better personal productivity and digital entertain-ment on your computer. Before you get started withWindows Vista, check out the new features, which includesthe Windows Areo user experience, Instant Searches,Explorers, Sidebars and gadgets, improved Internet Explorer,Windows Media Center, and advanced security and protec-tion. A complete description of each new feature appears inthe New Features guide in the back of this book.Microsoft Windows Vista is an operating system, acomputer program that controls the basic operation of yourcomputer and the programs you run. A program, also knownas an application, is task-oriented software you use to accom-plish a specific task, such as word processing, managing fileson your computer, or performing calculations. Windows Vistadisplays programs in frames on your screen, called windows(thus the name of the operating system). A window can con-tain the contents of a file and the application in which it wascreated, icons (picture representations of a program or a file),or other usable data. A file is a collection of information (suchas a letter or list of addresses) that has a unique name, distin-guishing it from other files.This use of windows and icons iscalled a graphical user interface (GUI, pronounced “gooey”),meaning that you (“user”) interact (“interface”) with thecomputer through the use of graphics: icons and other mean-ingful words, symbols, and windows.11What You’ll DoIntroduce Windows VistaStart Windows VistaUse Windows AeroExplore the Windows DesktopUse the MouseUse the Mouse for Quick ResultsUse the Start MenuUse Windows SidebarManage WindowsUse Menus, Toolbars, and PanesChoose Dialog Box OptionsUse Windows Help and SupportSwitch UsersShut Down Your Computer1
  • 22. 2Windows Vista EditionsWindows Vista comes in four main editions:the Home Basic Edition for consumers; theHome Premium Edition for consumer powerusers; the Business Edition for business andpower users; and the Ultimate Edition for thecomplete package.Two other editions areavailable for specific needs: the StarterEdition and Enterprise Edition.The StarterEdition is for the beginning PC user and pro-vides the most basic entry to Windows Vista,which is targeted to emerging markets.TheEnterprise Edition is for large corporationswith advanced data protection, compatibility,and international support needs.The Home Basic Edition provides a basicsecure entry point for using Windows Vista.The Home Premium Edition adds to the basicexperience by providing the Windows Areoexperience, the Mobility Center andTablet PCsupport for laptops, Windows Meeting Spacefor sharing documents, and Windows MediaCenter for media entertainment.The Business Edition modifies the HomePremium Edition by adding advanced hard-ware protection, business networking andremote desktop access, and by removing theWindows Media Center.The Ultimate Editioncombines every thing from all the editionsinto one complete package.Windows Vista User ExperienceWindows Vista provides two distinct userinterface experiences: a basic experience forentry-level systems, and a more visuallydynamic experience called Windows Aero(New!). Both offer a new and intuitive naviga-tion experience that help you more easily findand organize your applications and files, butAero goes further by delivering a truly next-generation desktop experience.The basic experience has been updated andstreamlined so you can find and work withyour programs and files more easily than inprevious versions of Windows. Some of theimportant new features include Explorer win-dows, Live icons, Search Folders, and InstantSearch.Windows Vista uses Explorer windows(New!) to give you more information andcontrol while simplifying how you work withyour files. Each Explorer window includes aCommand Bar, Live icons, column headers,and a Navigation pane. Command Bars dis-play only the tasks that are most appropriatefor the files being displayed. Live icons arescalable thumbnails that display the first pageof documents, the actual image of a photo, orthe album art for individual songs in yourmusic collection, making it easier to findexactly what you are looking for.TheNavigation pane contains Search Folders andtraditional folders that you have created onyour computer. A Search Folder (New!) is sim-ply a search that you save. Opening a SearchFolder instantly runs that saved search,displaying up-to-date results immediately.With Windows Vista, you no longer haveto remember where you store every file.Instead, to find a file, you need only toremember something about it.The updatedStart menu integrates the Instant Search(New!) box to help you quickly find and startany program or file on your computer. Afteryou add or edit file properties or data associ-ated with a file, such as a keyword on a docu-ment, you can use the Instant Search box toquickly find a file by the file property.Introducing Windows Vista
  • 23. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 3WindowsSidebar andgadgetsExplorer windowInstant SearchSearch foldersStart Menu
  • 24. Windows Vista automatically starts when you turn on your computer.When you first start Windows Vista, you see a Welcome screen thatyou use to log on to Windows. The Welcome screen displays all theuser accounts on the computer. Unlike Windows XP, the Welcomescreen can’t be turned off. After you click a user name, and enter apassword, you see the Windows Vista desktop and the WelcomeCenter window (New!), which displays options to view basic com-puter details, transfer files and setting, add new users, connect tothe Internet, install Windows Ultimate Extras, view new feature inWindows Vista, and view Microsoft offers available on the Web.4Starting WindowsVistaStart Windows Vista Usingthe Welcome ScreenTurn on your computer, and waitwhile Windows Vista loads anddisplays the Welcome screen.If prompted for added security ,press and then release the Ctrl,Alt, and Delete keys at the sametime.Click your user name.Type your password. Be sure touse the correct capitalization.Click the arrow, or press Enter.The Windows Vista desktopappears and the WelcomeCenter window opens.54321Did You Know?The Windows password is case-sensitive. Windows makes a distinc-tion between uppercase and lower-case letters. Your password should beat least seven characters long, theoptimal length for encryption, which isthe process of logically scramblingdata to keep a password secure.Welcome CenterClick here to turn off Welcome Center
  • 25. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 5Find Basic Information AboutYour ComputerClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then point toAccessories.Click Welcome Center.The upper pane display basicinformation about your computer,including:◆ What version of WindowsVista you are running◆ Computer processor name andspeed◆ Computer memory (RAM)◆ Computer nameTo view more details about yourcomputer, click Show moredetails.When you’re done, click theClose button.5421Did You Know?You can turn off the Welcome Centerat startup. In the Welcome Center win-dow, clear the Run at startup checkbox at the bottom, and then click theClose button.You can activate Windows Vista orchange the product key. Click theStart button, click Control Panel, dou-ble-click the System icon in Classicview. Click the activation link orChange product key.45Basic computer informationActivation information
  • 26. 6Introducing Windows AeroWindows Vista provides two distinct userinterface experiences: a "basic" experience forentry-level systems, and a more visuallydynamic experience called Windows Aero(New!).The Windows Aero user experienceallows you to view Windows Vista in a wholenew way. Windows Vista Aero provides spec-tacular visual effects, such as glass-like inter-face elements that you can see through,subtle window animations, window colors,live thumbnails that you can display on thetaskbar, and Windows Flip and WindowsFlip 3D that you can use to graphical openwindows.Live Taskbar ThumbnailsWhen you rest the mouse pointer over ataskbar item, Windows Aero displays a Livethumbnail of the window, showing the con-tent of that window.The Live thumbnail(New!) is displayed whether the window isminimized or not, and whether the content ofthe window is a document, photo, or even arunning video or process.Using Windows AeroLive ThumbnailsWindows FlipWindows Aero
  • 27. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 7Windows Flip and Windows Flip 3DWindows Aero provides two ways to managewindows: Windows Flip and Windows Flip 3D(New!). Flip allows you to flip through openwindows (by using Alt+Tab), providing a Livethumbnail of each window, rather than just ageneric icon and file name. Live thumbnailsmake it easier to quickly identify the windowyou want, particularly when multiple windowsof the same kind are open. With Flip 3D, youcan use the scroll wheel on your mouse to flipthrough open windows in a stack, and locateand select the one you want.Preparing for Windows AeroWindows Vista can display different featuresbased on the hardware capabilities of thecomputer it is running on. Computers runningWindows Vista Home Basic or those withoutthe hardware needed to run Windows Aerouse the basic user interface. If your computermeets the minimal hardware requirements tobe Windows Vista PC Capability Ready, yousee the Windows Vista Basic user experience.If your computer meets the increased hard-ware requirements to be Windows Vista PCPremium Ready, you see the Windows Aerouser experience. Windows Aero is an environ-ment with an additional level of visual sophis-tication, one that is even more responsiveand manageable, providing a further level ofclarity and confidence to Windows users. See“Preparing to Install Windows Vista” inAppendix A for the specific hardwarerequirements to run Windows Aero.Running Windows AeroBefore you can run Windows Aero, you needto make sure Windows Vista contains theproper settings. Make sure the color is set to32 bit, the monitor refresh rate is higher than10 hertz, the theme is set to Window Vista, thecolor scheme is set to Windows Aero, and thewindow frame transparency is turned on.You can follow these instructions to makesure your computer is set to run WindowsAero:◆ Color.To set the color to 32 bit, openPersonalization in the Control Panel, clickDisplay Settings, select Highest (32 bit)under Colors, and then click OK.◆ Monitor.To set the monitor refresh rate,open Personalization in the ControlPanel, click Display Settings, clickAdvanced Settings, click the Monitor tab,click a refresh rate that is higher than 10hertz, and then click OK.◆ Theme.To change the desktop theme,open Personalization in the ControlPanel, clickTheme, select Windows Vistain theThemes list, and then click OK.◆ Color scheme.To change the colorscheme, open Personalization in theControl Panel, click Window Color andAppearance, select Windows Aero in theColor Scheme list, and then click OK.◆ Transparency.To turn on window frametransparency, set the color scheme toWindows Aero, open Personalization inthe Control Panel, click Window Colorand Appearance, select the EnableTransparency check box, and thenclick OK.
  • 28. 8When you first start Windows Vista (New!),you see the Windows desktop, or a Welcomescreen (a way to identify yourself on the com-puter), depending on your installation.Thedesktop is an on-screen version of an actualdesk, containing windows, icons, files, andprograms.You can use the desktop to access,store, organize, modify, share, and exploreinformation (such as a letter, the news, or alist of addresses), whether it resides on yourcomputer, a network, or the Internet.The longvertical bar on the right-side of the desktop iscalled the Windows Sidebar (New!). It con-tains mini-programs called gadgets (New!),which provide easy access to frequently usedtools and information at a glance.The bar atthe bottom of your screen is called thetaskbar; it allows you to start programs andswitch among currently running programs. Atthe left end of the taskbar is the Start button,Exploring the Windows DesktopStart menu Explorer windowStart button TaskbarWindowsSidebarand gadgetsBackgroundpicture ondesktopDesktopicon
  • 29. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 9which you use to start programs, find andopen files, access the Windows Help andSupport Center, and much more. Next to theStart button is the Quick Launch toolbar,which contains buttons you use to quicklystart your Internet browser and media playerand show the desktop. At the right end of thetaskbar is the notification area, which displaysthe time, the date, and program related icons.If icons in the notification area are not usedfor a while, an arrow appears to hide theicons and reduce clutter.You can click thearrow to display and hide the icons. Whenyou use a hidden icon, it reappears in thenotification area. If you upgraded yourcomputer to Windows Vista from a previousversion of Windows, your desktop mightcontain additional desktop icons and toolbars.Open program windowSimilar open windowsgrouped on the taskbarNotification iconsStart buttonQuick Launchtoolbar
  • 30. 10A mouse is a handheld input device you rollacross a flat surface (such as a desk or amouse pad) to position the mouse pointer,the small symbol that indicates the pointer’srelative position on the desktop. When youmove the mouse, the mouse pointer on thescreen moves in the same direction.The shape of the mouse pointer changes toindicate different activities. Once you movethe mouse pointer to a desired position onthe screen, you use the mouse buttons, rightor left, to tell your computer what to do.Using the MouseBasic Mouse TechniquesTask What to doPointing Move the mouse to position it over an item on the desktop.Clicking Press and release the left mouse button.Double-clicking Press and release the left mouse button twice quickly.Dragging Point to an item, press and hold the left mouse button, move themouse to a new location, and then release the mouse button.Right-clicking Point to an item, and then press and release the right mouse button.DraggingClickingmouse pointer
  • 31. A typical mouse has two mouse buttons. You use the left one to clickbuttons, select text, and drag items around the screen. When you clickan item with the right button, such as an icon, text, or graphic, a short-cut menu appears with a list of commands related to the selected item.For example, when you right-click a file icon, a shortcut menu appearswith a list of file commands, such as Open, Explore, Search, Delete, andRename. Instead of searching for commands on the main menus, youcan save time and get quick results by using a shortcut menu.Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 11Using the Mousefor Quick ResultsUse the Shortcut MenuCommandRight-click an item.Click a command from theshortcut menu.21Did You Know?You can swap the functions of theright and left mouse buttons. Click theStart button on the taskbar, clickControl Panel, double-click the Mouseicon in Classic view, click the Buttonstab, select the Switch Primary AndSecondary Buttons check box, andthen click OK.A mouse wheel can make scrollingfast and easy. If your mouse has awheel between the two mouse but-tons, you can roll it to quickly scroll afew lines or an entire screen at a time.For Your InformationUsing the Mouse with the Web StyleWindows Vista integrates the use of the Internet with its other func-tions. You can choose to extend the way you click on the Internet withthe rest of your computer by single-clicking (known as the Web style)icons to open them, or stay with the default by double-clicking (knownas the Classic style). To change from one style to the other, click theStart button, click Control Panel, click Classic View (if necessary),double-click the Folder Options icon, click the Single-click to open anitem (point to select), or Double-click to open an item (Single-click toselect) option, and then click OK. The steps in this book assume youare using Windows Classic style.See AlsoSee “Changing Mouse Settings” onpage 456 for information on changingthe way the mouse works.12Short cut menu for theRecycle Bin icon.
  • 32. 12The key to getting started with the Windowsdesktop is learning how to use the Startbutton on the taskbar. Clicking the button onthe taskbar displays the Start menu, a list ofcommands that allow you to start a program,open a document, change a Windows setting,find a file, or display support information.Thetop of the Start menu indicates who is cur-rently using the computer.The left column ofthe Start menu is separated into two lists:pinned items above the separator line andmost frequently used items below.The pinneditems remain on the Start menu, like a pushpin holds paper on a bulletin board.The mostfrequently used items change as you use pro-grams: Windows keeps track of which pro-grams you use and displays them on the Startmenu for easy access.The right column of the Start menuprovides easy access to folders, Windowssettings, help information, and search func-tionality. An arrow next to a menu itemindicates a cascading menu, or submenu,which is a list of commands for that menuitem. Pointing at the arrow displays asubmenu from which you can chooseadditional commands. As you become morefamiliar with Windows, you might want tocustomize the Start menu to include addi-tional items that you use most often andchange Windows settings in the Control Panelto customize your Windows desktop.As you continue to install programs onyour computer, finding them on the Startmenu can sometimes be difficult. WindowsVista makes it easy with the Instant Searchbar (New!), which allows you to search theStart menu to find programs and otherWindows items, such as Internet favorites,history, files, contacts, e-mail messages, andappointments.To perform a search, click theStart menu, click in the Search box and starttyping the search text you want. As you type,the Start menu shows the possible resultswith priority given to the programs you usefrequently.The search results continue to nar-row as you continue to type. If you dont findwhat you are looking for during a search, youcan click Search Everywhere or Search theInternet to use Windows search capabilities.Using the Start MenuFrequentlyused itemsPoint to display more programsPinned itemsInstantsearchresultsInstant Search bar
  • 33. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 13Start Menu CommandsCommand DescriptionInternet Starts your Internet browser; by default, Internet ExplorerE-mail Starts your e-mail program; by default, Outlook ExpressAll Programs Opens a list of all the programs included on the Start menuInstant Search (New!) Locates programs, and other Windows items, such as Internet favorites, history,files, contacts, e-mail messages, and appointmentsDocuments Opens the Documents folder, where you store and manage filesPictures Opens the Pictures folder, where you store and manage photos, images, andgraphic filesMusic Opens the Music folder, where you store and manage sound and audio filesGames Opens the Games folder, where you play Windows Vista games, such as ChessTitans, FreeCell, Hearts, InkBall, Mahjong Titans, Minesweeper, Purble Place,Solitaire, and Spider SolitaireSearch (New!) Allows you to locate programs, files, folders, or computers on your computernetwork, or find information or people on the InternetRecent Items Opens a list of the most recently opened and saved documentsComputer Opens the Computer window, where you access information about disk drivesand other hardware devicesNetwork Opens the Network window, where you can connect to a networkConnect To Opens the Connect to a Network window, where you can connect to a remotenetwork, including wireless, dial-up, and Virtual Private Network (VPN)Control Panel Provides options to customize the appearance and functionality of the computerDefault Programs Displays the Default Programs window, where you can choose default programsfor Web browsing, e-mail, playing music, and other activitiesHelp and Support (New!) Displays Windows Help topics, tutorials, troubleshooting, support options,and toolsPower (New!) Keeps your session in memory and puts the computer in low-power state so youcan quickly resume workingLock (New!) Locks the computerArrow (New!) Provides options to shut down the computer, restart the computer, set thecomputer to sleep or lock, log off the system, or switch to a different users
  • 34. 14Windows Sidebar (New!) is a pane on the side of the Windows Vistadesktop that gives you quick access to gadgets such as news head-lines and updates, slide shows, weather information, traffic maps,Internet radio streams, and slide shows of online photo albums.Gadgets are mini-applications that can connect to Web services, suchas an RSS feed (which automatically delivers Web content to yourdesktop), or integrate with many of your applications, such as viewingyour calendar. You can customize Windows Sidebar to suit the way youwork—whether you want it always on top or resting below maximizedwindows. You can also move gadgets off the Windows Sidebar andplace them anywhere on your desktop. Windows Vista comes with aset of gadgets to get you started. However, you can easily downloadmore gadgets from an online gadget gallery.Using WindowsSidebarWork with the Sidebar◆ Open the Sidebar. Right-click theSidebar icon in the notificationarea, and then click Open.◆ Close the Sidebar. Right-click theSidebar, and then click CloseSidebar.◆ Close a Gadget. Point to thegadget you want to close, click theClose button, and then click CloseGadget (if requested).◆ Change Gadget Options. Point tothe gadget you want to change,click the Options button (wrenchicon), select the options you want,and then click OK.◆ Move a Gadget. Point to thegadget, and then drag it to anotherlocation on the Sidebar or to thedesktop.Click to opensidebarClick to closesidebarPoint to agadget todisplay optionsWINV-6.4Did You Know?You can download more gadgets.Right-click a blank area of the Sidebar,click Properties, and then click Getmore gadgets online to open thegadget Web site and download moregadgets.
  • 35. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 15Add a GadgetPoint to the plus sign (+) at thetop of the Sidebar, and then clickthe button.Double-click the gadget youwant to add.When you’re done, click theClose button.Keep Windows from CoveringSidebarPoint to blank area in theSidebar.Right-click the blank area of theSidebar, and then clickProperties.Clear the Sidebar is always ontop of other windows check box.Click OK.432132132143
  • 36. One of the most powerful things about Windows is that you can openmore than one window or program at once. This means, however, thatthe desktop can get cluttered with many open windows for the variousprograms. A button appears on the taskbar for each open window. Ifthere isn’t enough room on the taskbar to display a button for eachopen window, Windows Vista groups similar types of windows underone button. You can identify a window by its name on the title bar at thetop of the window. To organize your desktop, you must sometimeschange the size of a window or move it to a different location. Eachwindow is surrounded by a border that you can use to move or resizethe window. Each window has resize buttons in the upper-right corner.16Managing WindowsSwitch Among Open WindowsOn the taskbar, click a button. Ifwindows are grouped, a menuappears.Click the window you want fromthe menu.Move a WindowPoint to the window’s title bar.Drag the window to a newlocation, and then release themouse button.21211 221resizebutton
  • 37. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 17Use Buttons to Resizeand Close a WindowAll windows contain the same sizingand close buttons:◆ Maximize button. Click to make awindow fill the entire screen.◆ Restore Down button. Click toreduce a maximized window.◆ Minimize button. Click to shrink awindow to a taskbar button.◆ Close button. Click to close thewindow.Use the Mouse to Resizea WindowIf the window is maximized, clickthe Restore Down button.Move the mouse over one of theborders of the window until themouse pointer changes into atwo-headed arrow.The directions of the arrow-heads show you the directions inwhich you can resize thewindow.Drag the window border until thewindow is the size you want.321CloseMaximize or Restore DownMinimize12
  • 38. 18A menu is a list of commands that you use toaccomplish certain tasks, such as when youuse the Start menu to open the Control Panel.A command is a directive that providesaccess to a program’s features. Each Windowsprogram has its own set of menus, which areon the menu bar along the top of the programwindow.The menu bar organizes commandsinto groups of related operations. Each groupis listed under the name of the menu, such asFile or Help.To access the commands in amenu, you click the name of the menu. If acommand on a menu includes a keyboardreference, known as a keyboard shortcut, youcan perform the action by pressing the firstkey, then pressing the second key to performthe command quickly.You can also carry outsome of the most frequently used commandson a menu by clicking a button on a toolbar orcommand bar. A toolbar or command barcontains buttons that are convenient shortcutsfor menu commands. A pane is a framewithin a window where you can access com-mands and navigation controls. You can usemenus, toolbar buttons, and commands in apane to change how the Control Panel win-dow’s contents appear. On a menu, a checkmark or selected icons identifies a currentlyselected feature, meaning that the feature isenabled, or turned on.To disable, or turn offthe feature, you click the command again toremove the check mark. A bullet mark alsoindicates that an option is enabled.To disablea command with a bullet mark next to it, how-ever, you must select another command(within the menu section, separated by graylines) in its place.Using Menus, Toolbars, and PanesPane List arrowMenu Check mark orselected iconMenu bar Command bar/Toolbar
  • 39. A dialog box is a window that opens when you choose a menu com-mand followed by an ellipsis (. . .). The ellipsis indicates that you mustsupply more information before the program can carry out the com-mand you selected. Dialog boxes open in other situations as well, suchas when you open a program in the Control Panel. In a dialog box, youchoose various options and provide information for completing thecommand.Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 19Choosing DialogBox OptionsChoose Dialog Box OptionsAll dialog boxes contain the same typesof options, including the following:◆ Tabs. Click a tab to display itsoptions. Each tab groups a relatedset of options.◆ Option buttons. Click an optionbutton to select it. You can usuallyselect only one.◆ Up and down arrows. Click the upor down arrow to increase ordecrease the number, or type anumber in the box.◆ Check box. Click the box to turn onor off the option. A checked boxmeans the option is selected; acleared box means it’s not.◆ List box. Click the list arrow todisplay a list of options, and thenclick the option you want.◆ Text box. Click in the box and typethe requested information.◆ Command buttons. Click a buttonto perform a specific action orcommand. A button name followedby an ellipsis (...) opens anotherdialog box. OK executes theoptions and closes the dialog box.Cancel ignores the options andcloses the dialog box. Applyexecutes the options and leavesthe dialog box open.◆ Preview box. Many dialog boxesshow an image that reflects theoptions you select.For Your InformationNavigating a Dialog BoxRather than clicking to move around a dialog box, you can press theTab key to move from one box or button to the next. You can also useShift+Tab to move backward, or Ctrl+Tab and Ctrl+Shift+Tab to movebetween dialog box tabs.OptionbuttonOpens a differentdialog boxTabUp and downarrowsClose buttonTitle bar Check boxText box Command buttons
  • 40. When you have a question about how to do something in WindowsVista, you can usually find the answer with a few clicks of your mouse.Microsoft Help and Support (New!) is a resource of information, train-ing, and support to help you learn and use Windows Vista. Help andSupport is like a book stored on your computer with additional links tothe Internet, complete with a search feature, and a table of contents tomake finding information easier. If you have an Internet connection, youcan get online help from a support professional at Microsoft or fromother users in Windows communities (an electronic forum where peo-ple share information), or you can invite a friend to chat with you, viewyour screen, and work on your computer to provide remotesupport.20Using WindowsHelp and SupportUse Help and SupportClick the Start button, and thenclick Help and Support.Click an icon with the type ofhelp you want to use:◆ Windows Basics.◆ Table of Contents.◆ Security and Maintenance.◆ Troubleshooting.◆ Windows Online Help.◆ What’s New.Click the item of interest.Read the information.If you can’t find the informationyou need, click the Search Helpbox, type a word or phrase, andthen press Enter.If you need additional help, clicka link under Ask someone orInformation from Microsoft toaccess resources on the Internet.◆ Windows Remote Assistance.Click the link, and then followthe wizard instructions.Click the Close button.7654321526734Click to go backWINV-7.2.1, WINV-7.2.2WINV-7.8.4
  • 41. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 21Use Dialog Box or Window HelpIn a dialog box or window, clickthe Help button (? icon) or aHelp link.◆ In a dialog box, click the itemyou want information about.Read the Help information.Click the Close button.Use Program HelpClick the program’s Help menu,and then click the Helpcommand to open the Helpprogram.Click the main topic of interest.Click a subtopic, if necessary.Read the Help information.If you can’t find the informationyou need, click the Search box,and get Help information usingkeywords.Click the Close button.5432132111542
  • 42. Many users are able to share the same computer. Their individualWindows identities allow them to keep their files completely privateand to customize the operating system with their own preferences.Windows manages these separate identities, or accounts, by givingeach user a unique user name and password. When a user selects anaccount and types a password (if necessary), Windows starts with thatuser’s configuration settings and network permissions. When you wantto change users, you can log off, (which closes all running programs,saves your settings, and signs you off the computer) or switch users,which quickly switches between users without having to closeprograms and saves your current settings.22Switching UsersSwitch Users QuicklyClick the Start button, and thenpoint to the arrow next to theLock button.Click Switch User to changeusers without saving currentsettings.A Welcome screen appears,displaying user accounts.Click your name.If a box for a password appears,type your password.Click the Arrow button or pressEnter to log on to Windows Vista.54321Did You Know?You can change user account optionsin the Control Panel. Click the Startbutton, click Control Panel, double-click the User Accounts icon in Classicview, and then select the options youwant.See AlsoSee “Adding and Deleting UserAccounts” on page 312 for informationon switching users.1 2Start button
  • 43. Chapter 1 Getting Started with Windows Vista 23Log Off and Log On YourComputerClick the Start button, and thenpoint to the arrow next to theLock button.Click Log Off to close all yourprograms, save your settings,and sign off the computer.A Welcome screen appears,displaying user accounts.Click your name.If a box for a password appears,type your password.Click the Arrow button or pressEnter to log on to Windows Vista.Log Off and Log On a NetworkComputerClick the Start button, and thenpoint to the arrow next to theLock button.Click Log Off to close all yourprograms, save your settings,and sign off the computer.Press and then release the Ctrl,Alt, and Delete keys at the sametime.Click the Switch User button,and then click your name orOther User.Type your user name. Forexample: domain nameuser nameor computer nameuser nameType your assigned password.Click the Arrow button or pressEnter to log on to Windows Vista.7654321543211 21 2
  • 44. When you finish working on your computer, you need to make sure toturn off, or shut down, your computer properly. This involves severalsteps: saving and closing all open files, closing all open windows, exit-ing all running programs, shutting down Windows itself, and finally,turning off the computer. However, if you shut down your computerbefore or while installing Windows updates (download must be com-plete), Windows will automatically complete the install before shuttingdown, so you don’t have to wait around. Shutting down your computermakes sure Windows and all its related programs are properly closed;this avoids potential problems starting and working with Windows inthe future. If you turn off the computer by pushing the power switchwhile Windows or other programs are running, you could loseimportant data.24Shutting Down YourComputerShut Down Your ComputerClick the Start button, and thenpoint to the arrow next to theLock button.Click the option you want:◆ Restart. Exits Windows Vistaand restarts the computer.◆ Sleep. Switches the computerto low-power mode andmaintains your session.◆ Hibernate. Saves your session,exits Windows, and thenrestores your session the nexttime you start Windows.◆ Shut Down. Exits WindowsVista and prepares thecomputer to be turned off.IMPORTANT Options varydepending on Windows settings.21Shut Down OptionsOption When to use itRestart When you want to restart the computer and beginworking with Windows againSleep When you want to stop working for a few moments andconserve power (ideal for mobile computers); availablewhen a power scheme is selected in Power OptionsHibernate When you want to stop working for a while and safely turnoff power; restores your session to work again later;available when a power scheme is selected in Power OptionsShut Down When you finish working with Windows and you wantto shut off your computerSee AlsoSee “Updating Windows” on page 440for information on automaticallyupdating Windows.1 2WINV2.1.2,WINV-2.1.3
  • 45. Working with WindowsProgramsIntroductionNow that you know how to work with the graphical elementsthat make Windows Vista work, you’re ready to work withprograms. A program is software you use to accomplish aspecific task, such as word processing or managing files onyour computer.This chapter shows you how to access yourWindows programs (and to customize this access). It alsoshows you how to create and edit files in your programs,share information between programs, and what to do when aprogram is not responding.Windows comes with several small programs, calledAccessories, that are extremely useful for completing basictasks, such as creating a written document or performingbasic calculations. Windows Vista also provides a number ofways for you to resolve some common problems. For exam-ple, you can use older programs (designed to run on previ-ous versions of Windows) on your Windows Vista computerby changing specific settings using the Accessories menu.You can run commands from a text-based interface (called acommand line), and Windows provides an interface for quit-ting a program that has stopped responding without turningoff your computer and losing information in other programs.Other special programs in Windows Vista are games.You canplay games on your computer, or with other people over theinternet.22What You’ll DoStart and Exit a ProgramChange the Way a Program StartsUse Windows AccessoriesCreate a DocumentEdit and Format TextSet Paragraph Tab and IndentsPreview and Print a DocumentSave and Close a DocumentShare Information Among ProgramsInsert and Edit InformationLink and Update InformationInsert Special CharactersCalculate NumbersRun CommandsPlay GamesPlay Internet GamesRun Older ProgramsQuit a Program Not Responding25
  • 46. The most common way to start a Windows program is to use the Startmenu, which provides easy access to programs installed on yourcomputer. Clicking the Start button on the taskbar displays the Startmenu, which lists common and recently used programs and the AllPrograms submenu. The All Programs submenu is the master list ofevery program on your computer. If you start a program, such as youre-mail program, every time you start Windows, you can save some timeby adding the program to the Startup folder. When you’re done workingwith a program, you should exit, or close it, to conserve yourcomputer’s resources.26Starting and Exitinga ProgramStart a Program from theStart MenuWindows Vista provides several waysto start a program:◆ Click the Start button, and thenclick a program.◆ Click the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click a program group ifnecessary, and then click aprogram.◆ Click the Start button, clickComputer or Documents, navigateto the folder with the program orfile associated with the programyou want, and then double-clickthe icon.◆ Click the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, clickRun, type the full path and filename of the program, and thenclick OK.DocumentsAll ProgramsStart button
  • 47. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 27Exit a ProgramWindows Vista provides several waysto exit a program:◆ Click the File menu, and then clickExit.◆ Click the Close button on theprogram’s title bar.◆ Double-click the Control-menu onthe program’s title bar.◆ Right-click the program’s taskbarbutton, and then click Close.Did You Know?You can display the Programs list in asingle column. Right-click the Startbutton, click Properties, clickCustomize, click the Advanced tab,select the Scroll Programs check box,and then click OK twice. Point to theblack triangle arrows at the top andbottom to scroll through the list.See AlsoSee “Using Windows Accessories” onpage 29 for information on usingWindows built-in programs.Taskbar buttonClose buttonControl menu
  • 48. If you start a program, such as your e-mail program, every time youstart Windows, you can save some time by adding the program to theStartup folder. The contents of the Startup folder appear on the Startupsubmenu on the All Programs menu. Every time you start Windows, theprograms in the Startup folder automatically start. Sometimes a pro-gram installs a program to the Startup folder. If you don’t want the pro-gram automatically starting with Windows, you can remove it from theStartup folder.28Changing the Way aProgram StartsAdd a Program to theStartup SubmenuClick the Start button, and thenlocate the program you want toadd to the Startup submenu.Hold down the Ctrl key, and thendrag the program on top of theStartup item on the All Programssubmenu.Using the Ctrl key copies theprogram to the Startup submenu.When the Startup submenu opens,drag the program onto thesubmenu, and then release themouse button and the Ctrl key.The next time Windows Vistastarts, the program will start.Remove a Program from theStartup SubmenuClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then click Startup.Right-click the program you wantto remove on the Startupsubmenu.Click Delete, and then click Yes toconfirm the deletion.Windows deletes the programfrom the Startup submenu, notfrom your computer.321321321321
  • 49. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 29Windows comes with several accessories,built-in programs that are extremely usefulfor completing every day tasks.One of the most useful features Windowsoffers is the ability to use data created in onefile in another file, even if the two files werecreated in different Windows programs.Towork with more than one program or file at atime, you simply need to open them on yourdesktop. A program button on the taskbarrepresents any window that is open on thedesktop. When you want to switch from oneopen window to another, click the programbutton on the taskbar. If you tile, or arrangeopen windows on the desktop so that theyare visible, you can switch among them sim-ply by clicking in the window in which youwant to work.Using Windows AccessoriesFrequently Used Windows AccessoriesProgram DescriptionCalculator Performs arithmetic calculationsInternet Explorer Displays Web (HTML) pagesNotepad Creates, edits, and displays text only documentsPaint Creates and edits bitmap picturesSound Recorder Creates and plays digital sound filesWindows Calendar (New!) Manages appointments and tasks using personal calendarsWindows Contacts (New!) Stores names, addresses, and other contact informationWindows Defender (New!) Helps protect your computer from spyware and other harmful intrudersWindows DVD Maker (New!) Burns pictures and videos to DVDsWindows Fax and Scan (New!) Sends and receives faxes or scanned pictures and documentsWindows Live Messenger Sends and receives instant messages to online contacts; you need todownload the programWindows Mail (New!) Provides e-mail, newsgroup, and directory servicesWindows Media Center (New!) Provides entertainment options for digital and on-demand mediaWindows Media Player Plays sound, music, and videoWindows Meeting Space (New!) Provides an online place to share files, programs, or your desktopWindows Movie Maker Creates movies using audio and video filesWindows Photo Gallery (New!) Views, edits, organizes, and shares photos and videosWordPad Creates, edits, and displays text, Rich Text Format, and Worddocuments
  • 50. A document is a file you create using a word processing program, suchas a letter, memo, or resume. When you start WordPad, a blankdocument appears in the work area, known as the document window.You can enter information to create a new document and save theresult in a file, or you can open an existing file and save the documentwith changes. As you type, text moves, or wraps, to a new line whenthe previous one is full.30Creating aDocumentCreate a DocumentClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click WordPad.If WordPad is already open, clickthe New button on the toolbar,click Rich Text Document, andthen click OK.Type your text.Press Enter when you want tostart a new paragraph.Change the Page SetupClick the File menu, and then clickPage Setup.Specify the paper size and source.Specify the page orientation,either portrait or landscape.Specify the page margins.Click OK.5432132121 33245
  • 51. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 31Open an Existing Documentfrom Within a ProgramClick the Open button on thetoolbar.Click the Files name list arrow, andthen click the file type you want toopen.Click an icon on the FavoritesLinks to open a frequently usedfolder.If desired, click the Look in listarrow, and then click the drive orfolder from where you want toopen the file.Double-click the folder from whichyou want to open the file.Click the document you want toopen.Click Open.Open a Recent Document fromthe Start MenuClick the Start button.Point to Recent Documents.Click the recently openeddocument you want to re-open.3217654321Did You Know?You can remove all recently useddocuments from the Recent Itemssubmenu. Right-click the Start button,click Properties, click the Start Menutab, clear the privacy related checkboxes, and then click OK.43236712
  • 52. One of the advantages of using a word processing program is that youcan edit a document or change the contents without re-creating it. Inthe WordPad work area, the mouse pointer changes to the I-beampointer, which you can use to reposition the insertion point (called navi-gating) and insert, delete, or select text. Before you can edit text, youneed to highlight, or select, the text you want to modify. Then you candelete, replace, move (cut), or copy text within one document orbetween documents even if they’re different programs. When you cutor copy an item, it’s placed on the Clipboard, which stores only a singlepiece of information at a time. You can also move or copy selected textwithout storing it on the Clipboard by using drag-and-drop editing.32Editing TextSelect and Edit TextMove the I-beam pointer to theleft or right of the text you wantto select.Drag the pointer to highlightthe text.TIMESAVER Double-click aword to select it; triple-click aparagraph to select it.Perform one of the followingediting commands:◆ To replace text, type your text.◆ To delete text, press theBackspace key or theDelete key.Insert and Delete TextClick in the document to place theinsertion point where you want tomake the change.◆ To insert text, type your text.◆ To delete text, press theBackspace key or theDelete key.132121I-beampointer
  • 53. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 33Move or Copy TextSelect the text you want to moveor copy.Click the Cut button or Copy buttonon the toolbar.Click where you want to insert thetext.Click the Paste button on thetoolbar.Move or Copy Text Using Dragand DropSelect the text you want to moveor copy.Point to the selected text, and thenclick and hold the mouse button.If you want to copy the text to anew location, also press and holdthe Ctrl key. A plus sign (+)appears in the pointer box,indicating that you are dragging acopy of the selected text.Drag the selected text to the newlocation, and then release themouse button (and the Ctrl key, ifnecessary).Click anywhere in the document todeselect the text.43214321424131
  • 54. You can change the format or the appearance of text and graphics in adocument so that the document is easier to read or more attractive. Aquick and powerful way to add emphasis to parts of a document is toformat text using bold, italics, underline, or color. For special emphasis,you can combine formats, such as bold and italics. In addition, you canchange the font style and size. A font is a set of characters with thesame typeface or design that you can increase or decrease in size,such as Arial or Times New Roman.34Formatting TextFormat TextSelect the text or click in theparagraph you want to format.Use any of the formatting tools tostyle text:◆ Font list arrow◆ Font Size list arrow◆ Font Script list arrow; alanguage type◆ Bold button◆ Italic button◆ Underline button◆ Color buttonUse any of the formatting tools toadjust text spacing:◆ Alignment buttons◆ Bullet button321Font Size BoldUnderline Align LeftAlign RightFont ScriptItalicColorCenterBulletsDid You Know?Font size is measured in points. Onepoint is 1/72 of an inch high.12Font
  • 55. Tabs set text or numerical data alignment in relation to the edges of adocument. A tab stop is a predefined stopping point along thedocument’s typing line. Default tab stops are set every half-inch on theruler, but you can set multiple tabs per paragraph at any location. Eachparagraph in a document contains its own set of tab stops. The defaulttab stops do not appear on the ruler, but the manual tab stops you setdo appear. Once you place a tab stop, you can drag the tab stop toposition it where you want. If you want to add or adjust tab stops inmultiple paragraphs, simply select the paragraphs first.Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 35Setting ParagraphTabsCreate and Clear a Tab StopSelect the text or click in theparagraph you want to format.Click the ruler where you want toset the tab stop.To move a tab, drag the tab stop toposition it where you want.To clear a tab stop, drag it off theruler.4321For Your InformationChanging the Word Wrap DisplayAs you type a complete line of text, it wraps to the next line. Dependingon your preference, you can change the Document window to displaytext wrapped to the window or ruler. To change word wrap options,click the View menu, click Options, click the tab with your text format,click the word wrap option you want, and then click OK. In the Optionsdialog box, you can set different word wrap options for each of the textformats in which you can save documents, such as Text, Rich Text,Word, and Write. The wrapping options affect only how text appears onyour screen. When printed, the document uses the margin settingsspecified in Page Setup.See AlsoSee “Setting Paragraph Indents” onpage 36 for information on changingthe text alignment.2 1
  • 56. 36When you indent a paragraph, you move its edge in from the left orright margin. You can indent the entire left or right edge of a paragraphor just the first line. The markers on the ruler control the indentation ofthe current paragraph. The left side of the ruler has three markers. Thetop triangle, called the first-line indent marker, controls where the firstline of the paragraph begins. The bottom triangle, called the hangingindent marker, controls where the remaining lines of the paragraphbegin. The small square under the bottom triangle, called the left indentmarker, allows you to move the first-line Indent marker and the leftindent marker simultaneously. When you move the left indent marker,the distance between the hanging indent and the first-line indentremains the same. The triangle on the right side of the ruler, called theright indent marker, controls where the right edge of the paragraphends.Setting ParagraphIndentsChange Paragraph IndentsSelect the text or click in the paragraphyou want to format.◆ To change the left indent of thefirst line, drag the First-Line Indentmarker.◆ To change the indent of thesecond and subsequent lines, dragthe Hanging Indent marker.◆ To change the left indent for alllines, drag the Left Indent marker.◆ To change the right indent for alllines, drag the Right Indent marker.As you drag a marker, the dottedguideline helps you position the indentaccurately.Hanging indent markerRight indent markerFirst-line indent markerLeft indent marker
  • 57. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 37Before printing, you should verify that the page looks the way you want.You save time, money, and paper by avoiding duplicate printing. PrintPreview shows you the exact placement of your text on each printedpage. Printing a paper copy is a common way to review and share adocument. You can use the Print button on the toolbar to print a copy ofyour document using the current settings, or you can open the Printdialog box and specify the print options you want.Previewing andPrinting a DocumentPreview a DocumentClick the Print Preview button onthe toolbar.Use the toolbar buttons to previewthe document:◆ To change the view size, clickZoom In or Zoom Out.◆ To view other pages, click NextPage or Prev Page.◆ To view two pages at a time,click Two Pages.◆ To print the document, clickPrint.When you’re done, click Close.Print All or Part of a DocumentClick the File menu, and then clickPrint.Click a printer.Specify the range of pages youwant to print.Specify the number of copies youwant to print.Click Print.54321321323425
  • 58. Saving your files frequently ensures that you don’t lose work during anunexpected power loss. The first time you save, specify a file name andfolder in the Save As dialog box. The next time you save, the programsaves the file with the same name in the same folder. If you want tochange a file’s name or location, you can use the Save As dialog boxagain to create a copy of the original file. To conserve your computer’sresources, close any file you are not working on.38Saving and Closinga DocumentSave a DocumentClick the File menu, and then clickSave As.Click an icon on the FavoritesLinks to open a frequently usedfolder.If desired, click the Save in listarrow, and then click the drive orfolder where you want to save thefile.Double-click the folder in whichyou want to save the file.Type a name for the file, or use thesuggested one.To change the format of a file,click the Save as type list arrow,and then click a file format.Click Save.7654321Did You Know?You can save a file in a new folder.In the Save As dialog box, click theNew Folder button, type the new foldername, click Open, and then click Save.You can close a document. Click theClose button in the program window orclick the File menu, and then clickClose. If necessary, click Yes to saveyour changes.2 65 73New folder button
  • 59. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 39Windows makes it easy to insert a file or partof a file created in one program into a filecreated in a different program.The ability toshare files and information among differentprograms is called object linking and embed-ding (OLE). With OLE, you can work with adocument in WordPad and at the same timetake advantage of the specialized tools inanother program, such as Paint or MicrosoftExcel. By using OLE, you’ll be able to accessfeatures from other programs, edit dataeasily, update to the latest information, andsave space.Information shared between two pro-grams is an object, which can be a picturefrom a graphics program, a chart from aspreadsheet program, a video clip, text, oralmost anything else you can create on acomputer.The program that creates the objectis called the source program; the programthat creates the file into which you want toinsert the object is called the destinationprogram. Likewise, the file that originally con-tained the object is the source file, and the filewhere you want to insert the object is the des-tination file. Both embedding and linkinginvolve inserting an object into a destinationfile; they differ in where they store theirrespective objects. With embedding, a copy ofthe object becomes part of the destinationfile. If you want to edit the object, you makechanges in the destination file, and the origi-nal file remains intact. With linking, a repre-sentation of the object appears in thedestination file, but the object is stored in thesource file. If you want to edit the linkedobject, you make changes in the source file orits representation in the destination file, andthe other file will reflect the changes the nexttime you open it.Sharing Information Among ProgramsEmbeddedobjectObjectDestination program Source program
  • 60. Instead of switching back and forth between programs to copy andpaste information, you can insert, or embed, the information.Embedding inserts a copy of one document into another. Once youembed data, you can edit it using the menus and toolbars of the sourceprogram without leaving the program in which it’s embedded (that is,the destination program). For example, you can create a picture in aprogram, such as Paint, or select an existing picture and insert it into aWordPad document. The inserted picture is an object you can resize.40Inserting and EditingInformationEmbed an Existing ObjectClick where you want to embedthe object.Click the Insert menu, and thenclick Object.Click the Create from File option.Click Browse, and then double-click the file with the object youwant to embed.Click OK.Embed a New ObjectClick where you want to embedthe object.Click the Insert menu, and thenclick Object.Click the Create New option.Double-click the type of object youwant to create.Enter information in the newobject using the menus andtoolbars in the source program.Click outside the object to closethe object.6543215432135465
  • 61. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 41Edit an ObjectOpen the document with theobject you want to edit.Double-click the object.Edit the object using the menusand toolbars in the sourceprogram.Click outside the object to closethe object.Resize an ObjectClick the object to select it.Drag a sizing handle to change thesize of the object.◆ Drag a corner sizing handle tochange height and widthsimultaneously.◆ Drag the top or bottom middlesizing handle to change height.◆ Drag the left or right middlesizing handle to change width.214321Did You Know?You can use Paste Special to embedpart of a file. Select and copy theinformation, click where you want toembed the copied information, clickthe Edit menu, click Paste Special,click the Paste option to embed, selecta format, and then click OK.432Drag a sizing handle
  • 62. When you want to keep source and destination files in sync with eachother, you can link the source file that created the object with the desti-nation file that displays the object. Linking displays information storedin one document (the source file) into another (the destination file). Youcan edit the linked object from either file, although changes are storedin the source file. Only a representation of the object appears in thedestination file; any changes made to the object are done in the sourcefile, whether you access it by double-clicking the object in thedestination file or by opening it in the source program.42Linking and UpdatingInformationLink an Object BetweenProgramsClick where you want to embedthe object.Click the Insert menu, and thenclick Object.Click the Create from File option.Click Browse, and then double-click the file with the object youwant to link.Select the Link check box.Click OK.654321Did You Know?You can use Paste Special to link partof a file. Select and copy the informa-tion, click where you want to link thecopied information, click the Editmenu, click Paste Special, click thePaste Link option to link, select aformat, and then click OK.3645Linked object
  • 63. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 43Update a Linked FileOpen the file with the sourceprogram.Edit the file using the sourceprogram’s commands.Click the Save button on thetoolbar.Click the Close button to exit thesource program.Open the linked file with thedestination program.The object automatically updates.Click the Save button on thetoolbar.Click the Close button to exit thedestination program.7654321Did You Know?You can change a link to updatemanually. In the destination program,select the object, click the Edit menu,click Links, click the Manual optionbutton, and then click Close.For Your InformationFinding, Changing, and Breaking a Linked ObjectInstead of opening a linked object from the source file to makechanges, you can open a linked object from the destination file usingthe Open Source button in the Links dialog box. The Open Sourcebutton finds the source file containing the linked object and opensthat file. After making changes, you exit and return to the destinationfile. The Links dialog box keeps track of the source file location. Youcan change the linked source to a different file by using the ChangeSource button. If you want to disregard a link and change it to anembedded object, select the linked object in the destination file, clickEdit on the menu bar, click Object Properties, click the Link tab, clickBreak Link, click Yes in the message box, and then click OK. On theLink tab in the Object Properties dialog box, you can also open orchange the source file, change update options, and update thesource for the selected object.265 47
  • 64. When you need to insert special characters such as ©, ™, or ® thatdon’t appear on your keyboard, you can use a special accessory pro-gram called Character Map to do the job. Character Map displays allthe characters that are available for each of the fonts on yourcomputer.44Inserting SpecialCharactersInsert a Special CharacterClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, clickSystem Tools, and then clickCharacter Map.Click the Font list arrow, and thenclick a font.Double-click the character youwant to insert.TIMESAVER Click a characterto see an enlarged view of it.Click Copy to place the characteron the Clipboard.Click the Close button.Click in the document to place theinsertion point.Click the Edit menu, and then clickPaste.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+V toquickly paste the contents fromthe Clipboard.765432132547Copyright special character 6
  • 65. If you don’t have a handheld calculator handy, you can use theCalculator program provided by Windows Vista to perform standardcalculations or even more complex ones. Calculator performs basicarithmetic, such as addition and subtraction, as well as functions foundon a scientific calculator, such as logarithms and factorials.Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 45Calculating NumbersUse the CalculatorClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Calculator.Click the View menu, and thenclick Standard or Scientific.Enter a number, or click thenumber buttons.Click a function button.Enter another number.When you’ve entered all thenumbers you want, click theequals (=) button.Click the Edit menu, and then clickCopy to copy the result to theClipboard to paste in a document.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.87654321Did You Know?You can use the numeric keypad onyour keyboard with the Calculator.Press the number, +, -, *, /, and Enterkeys to quickly enter numbers and usethe calculator.You can find out the purpose of a key.Right-click the key, and then clickWhat’s this?734826
  • 66. Besides running Windows Vista programs, you can also entercommands and run programs written in MS-DOS. MS-DOS stands forMicrosoft Disk Operating System. MS-DOS, or DOS, employs a com-mand-line interface through which you must type commands at a com-mand prompt to run different tasks. A character such as a > or $appears at the beginning of a command prompt. Each DOS commandhas a strict set of rules called a command syntax that you must followwhen expressing a command. Many commands allow you to includeswitches and parameters that give you additional control of thecommand.46Running CommandsRun a CommandClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Command Prompt.At the prompt, type a commandincluding any parameters, andthen press Enter.When you’re done, click the Closebutton, or type exit, and then pressEnter.Find a CommandClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Command Prompt.At the prompt, type help, and thenpress Enter.Read the list of commands. Usethe scroll bar or scroll arrows todisplay additional information.When you’re done, click the Closebutton, or type exit, and then pressEnter.43213212343promptWINV-7.4.1,WINV-7.4.2
  • 67. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 47Get Information Abouta CommandClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Command Prompt.At the prompt, type a commandfollowed by a space and /?, andthen press Enter.Read the information about thecommand. Use the scroll bar orscroll arrows to display additionalinformation.When you’re done, click the Closebutton, or type exit, and then pressEnter.4321Did You Know?You can use a wildcard character tochange more than one file. An asteriskis a wildcard and represents any num-ber of characters. For example, thecommand dir at*.doc matchesatback.doc, ati.doc, and atlm.doc.You can change the appearance of theCommand Prompt window. Right-clickthe Command Prompt window title bar,and then click Properties.You can ping a connection to makesure it works and find out an IPaddress. Ping is a diagnostic networktool that verifies whether an IPaddress is accessible. To test a con-nection, type ping IP address at thecommand prompt, and then pressEnter. To find an IP address, typeipconfig /? or type ipconfig /all, andthen press Enter. To get a new IPaddress, type ipconfig/release, pressEnter, type ipconfig/renew, and thenpress Enter.Common DOS CommandsCommand Purposecd foldername Changes to the specified foldercls Clears the screencopy Copies the specified files or folderdir Lists the contents of the current folderc: (where c is a drive) Switches to the specified driveexit Closes the Command Prompt windowrename Renames the specified file or filesmore filename Displays the contents of a file, one screenof output at a timetype filename.txt Displays the contents of the text file234
  • 68. If you have some free time, you can play some fun and exciting games.Windows provides several games you can play against thecomputer—Chess Titans (New!), FreeCell, Hearts, InkBall (New!),Mahjong Titans, (New!), Minesweeper, Purble Place (New!), Solitaire,and Spider Solitaire.48Playing GamesPlay a GameClick the Start button, and thenclick Games.Double-click the game you want.Play the game.When you’re done, click the Gamemenu, and then click a commandto start a new game with the sameor different players, or exit thegame.4321See AlsoSee “Playing Internet Games” on page50 for information on playing gamesover the Internet against other players. 243
  • 69. Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 49Did You Know?You can get more information aboutplaying each game in Help. Start thegame, click the Help menu, and thenclick Contents or Help Topics.Playing the GameGame Object is toChess Titans Put your opponents’ king in checkmate. Each playerhas one king. As you capture your opponent’s pieces,strategize a way to capture the opposing king.FreeCell Stack the cards in the cells at the top in descendingorder, starting from any card, alternating the red andblack cards.Hearts Score the lowest number of points, one point for eachheart and 13 points for the Queen of Spades. You playa card to follow suit or a heart or the Queen of Spadeswhen you can’t follow suit.InkBall Use the mouse or tablet pen, draw ink strokes to guidethe balls into holes of the same color and to blockballs from entering holes of a different color.Mahjong Titans Remove all the tiles from the board by findingmatching pairs of free tiles. Mahjong is a form ofsolitaire that is played with tiles instead of cards.Minesweeper Uncover all the squares that don’t contain mines in theshortest amount of time. You use the numbers in theuncovered squares to determine which adjacentsquares contain mines.Purble Place Teach colors, shapes, and pattern recognition.Solitaire Reveal all the cards that are turned face down bystacking them in descending order (alternating the redand black cards) on the lower piles, and stack them inascending order from Ace through King by suit in theupper piles. You use the mouse to drag one card ontop of another.Spider Solitaire Stack the cards by suit in one column in descendingorder.Get Help for each game
  • 70. Windows XP provided several games you can play against players overthe Internet—Backgammon, Checkers, Hearts, Reversi, and Spades.These and other games are still available on the MSN Games Web site,but you can no longer access them from the Start menu in WindowsVista. When you start an Internet game, the game server finds playersmatched to your skill level and language from around the world. Youcan’t select the players or locations of your opponents, but you cancommunicate with them by using the Chat controls.50Playing InternetGamesPlay an Internet GameOpen your Web browser, and thengo to the online instructions andgame Help to play the game youwant.21See AlsoSee “Sending and Receiving InstantMessages” on page 218 for informa-tion on playing games over the Internetusing Windows Messenger.1
  • 71. Some older programs are designed to run on earlier versions ofWindows and don’t work properly on Windows Vista. You can set thecompatibility of Windows Vista to act like an earlier version ofWindows to run an older program. In addition, you can also set displayresolution and color settings, and user privilege levels to provide thebest level of compatibility for the program and the Windows Vista oper-ating system. You set options in the Compatibility tab in the program’sProperties dialog box.Chapter 2 Working with Windows Programs 51Running OlderProgramsSet Compatibility for anOlder ProgramClick the Start button, and thenlocate the older program.Right-click the program you wantto run, and then click Properties.Click the Compatibility tab.Select the Run this program incompatibility mode for check box.Click the list arrow, and then clickthe version of Windows in whichthe program was designed.Select the check boxes forapplying the appropriate settingsto the display, based on theprogram’s documentation.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can test your program using theProgram Compatibility Wizard. Clickthe Start button, click Help andSupport, click the Get your programsto work on this version of Windowslink, read the Help topic, and thenfollow the instructions to start theProgram Compatibility Wizard.73465WINV-3.1.5
  • 72. If a program stops responding while you work or freezes up, Windowsprovides you with the option to end the task (New!). When you end atask, you’ll probably lose any unsaved work in the problem program. Ifthe problem persists, you might need to reinstall the program or con-tact product support to fix the problem. Pressing Ctrl+Alt+Delete orclicking the Close button closes the non responsive program and opensthe Task Manager, where you can stop the program. You can also usethe Task Manager to view system performance and log off users.52Quitting a ProgramNot RespondingEnd a Task Not RespondingRight-click the taskbar, and thenclick Task Manager.If Windows doesn’t respond whenyou right-click, pressCtrl+Alt+Delete, and then clickTask Manager.Click the Applications tab.Select the program notresponding.Click End Task. If you’re asked towait, click End Now.End a Program Not RespondingIf a program is not responding,click the Close button on theprogram’s title bar. Click severaltimes, if necessary.If you see a dialog box telling youthe program is not responding,click End Now.When a message appears, clickSend Information to sendinformation about the error overthe Internet to Microsoft, or clickCancel to continue.32143213423WINV-7.5.1
  • 73. Managing Files and FoldersIntroductionFile management is organizing and keeping track of files andfolders, helping you stay organized, so information is easilylocated. A folder is a container for storing programs and files,similar to a folder in a file cabinet. As with a file cabinet,working with poorly managed files is like looking for a needlein a haystack—it is frustrating and time-consuming to searchthrough irrelevant, misnamed, and out-of-date files to findthe one you want. Windows Vista allows you to organize fold-ers and files in a file hierarchy, imitating the way you storepaper documents in real folders. Just as a file cabinet con-tains several folders, each containing related documents withdividers grouping related folders together, so the Windowsfile hierarchy allows you to organize your files in folders, andthen place folders in other folders. At the top of each hierar-chy is the name of the hard drive or main folder.This drive orfolder contains several files and folders, and each folder con-tains related files and folders.Using the file management tools, you can save files infolders with appropriate names for easy identification,quickly and easily create new folders so you can reorganizeinformation and delete files and folders that you no longerneed.You can also search for a file when you cannot remem-ber where you stored it, create shortcuts to files and foldersfor quick and easy access, and even compress files and fold-ers to save space.A folder can hold different types of files, such as text,spreadsheets, and presentations.The Documents folder is themain location in Windows Vista where you store your files.However, there are some special folders, such as Pictures andMusic, designed with specialized features to store specifictypes of files.33What You’ll DoUse the Explorer WindowChange the Explorer Window ViewOpen and View the ComputerView and Open DocumentsNavigate Between FoldersView the Folders ListCustomize the Navigation PaneOrganize Files by HeadingsSearch for Files and FoldersPerform an Instant SearchAdd Properties and Tags to FilesCreate and Rename Files and FoldersCopy and Move Files and FoldersDelete and Restore Files and FoldersCreate a Shortcut to a File or FolderChange Folder OptionsChange File and Folder List ViewsCustomize Personal FoldersShare Files or Folders with OthersCompress Files and FoldersManage Files Using a CD or DVD53
  • 74. 54The Explorer windows (New!) are powerfuleasy-to-use tools for working with files con-sistently across Windows Vista. Explorers giveyou more information and control while sim-plifying how you work with your files.Theexperience is easy and consistent, whetheryoure browsing documents or photos oreven using the Control Panel. Key elements ofthe Explorer windows in Windows Vista aredesigned to help you get to the informationyou need, when you need it. Each Explorerwindow includes the following elements:◆ Back and Forward buttons. Use tonavigate between previously viewedfolders.◆ Address bar. Use to navigate directly to adifferent location, including local andnetwork disks, folders, and Weblocations.◆ Search box. Use to perform instantsearches, which show only those filesthat match what you typed in the Searchbox for the current folder and any of itssubfolders.◆ Toolbar/Command bar. Use to performfile related commands.Toolbar/Commandbars display only the task buttons thatare appropriate for the files beingdisplayed.There are two consistentbuttons on everyToolbar/ Command bar:Organize and Views.◆ Navigation pane. Use to display commonfolders, such as Documents, Pictures,Music, the Folders list, and other favoritelinks, such as recently changed files,saved searches, and public folders.◆ Folders list. Use to access additionalfolders using a folder tree structuresimilar to the previous version ofWindows.To open or close the Folderslist, click Folders at the bottom of theNavigation pane.Using the Explorer WindowNavigationpaneSearch boxAddress barBack and Forward buttonsToolbar/Command barFolders list
  • 75. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 55Windows Vista displays the contents of adrive or folder in different ways to help youfind the information you are looking for abouta file or folder.The available views includeExtra Large, Large, Medium and Small Icons(New!), List, Details, andTiles.Icons view displays icons in different sizes(Extra Large, Large, Medium, and Small),sorted alphabetically in horizontal rows, withthe name of the file or folder below each icon.When you view files using one of the Iconviews, Live icons (New!)—thumbnails—dis-play the first page of documents, the image ofa photo, or the album art for individual songs,making it easier to find exactly what you arelooking for.List view displays small icons, sorted alpha-betically into vertical columns, with the nameof the file or folder next to each icon.Details view displays small icons, sortedalphabetically in a single vertical column, withthe name of the file or folder and additionalinformation, such as file size, type, and date,in columns to the right.Tiles view displays icons, sorted alphabeti-cally into vertical columns, with informationabout the file next to each icon.Switching Between ViewsYou use the Views button on the toolbar in anExplorer window to quickly switch betweenwindow views. When you click the Views but-ton, the view switches between the followingfour views: List, Details,Tiles, and LargeIcons. If you want to select a different view,you can click the arrow next to the Views but-ton to display a menu, where you can click aview or drag the slider. When you drag theslider, you can position it anywhere within therange, not just the main positions.Changing the Explorer Window ViewLive iconsViews button
  • 76. The Computer window is the starting point to access every disk, folder,and file on your computer. You can access the Computer window fromthe Start menu. The Computer window displays several types of local,removable, and network drives. Drives and folders are represented byicons. Each drive is assigned a drive letter, denoted with parenthesesand a colon, such as Local Disk (C:), to make it easier to identify.Typically, the floppy is drive A, the hard (also known as local) disk isdrive C, and the CD or DVD is drive D. If your computer includes addi-tional drives, your computer assigns them letters in alphabetical order.Once you open more than one drive or folder, you can use buttons onthe Command bar to help you move quickly between folders.56Opening and Viewingthe ComputerOpen and View the ComputerClick the Start button, and thenclick Computer.Click a drive to select it.Review the drive details in theDetails pane.Double-click the drive to open it.Click the Back button or Forwardbutton on the toolbar to return ormove to a previously visitedwindow.TIMESAVER You can press theBackspace key to go back to aprevious folder you visited.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.6543213652Details pane
  • 77. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 57Typical Disk Drives on a ComputerIcon Type DescriptionLocal A hard magnetic disk (or hard disk) on which you can storelarge amounts of data. The Local Disk (C:) stores all the fileson your computer.Floppy A soft removable magnetic disk that comes in a 3½-inchsize, which stores up to 1.44 MB of data. Floppy disks areslower to access than a hard disk, but are portable andmuch less expensive.Removable A removable magnetic disk on which you can storecomputer data, such as a Zip disk (requires software).Another is a Flash memory card the size of a large stampthat holds128, 256, 512 MB or greater. Flash drives connectdirectly into a USB plug without software.CD-ROM Compact Disc-Read-Only Memory An opticaldisk on which you can stamp, or burn, up to 1 GB (typicalsize is 650 MB) of data in only one session. The disccannot be erased or burned again with additional new data.CD-R Compact Disc-Recordable A type of CD-ROMon which you can burn up to 1 GB of data in multiplesessions. The disc can be burned again with new data,but cannot be erased.CD-RW Compact Disc-Rewriteable A type of CD-ROM on whichyou can read, write, and erase data, just like a hard disk.DVD Digital Video Disc A type of DVD-ROM that holds aminimum of 4.7 GB, enough for a full-length movie.DVD-R Digital Video Disc-Recordable A type of DVD-ROM onwhich you can burn up to 4.7 GB of data in multiplesessions. The disc can be burned again with new data, butcannot be erased.DVD-RW Digital Video Disc-Rewriteable A type of DVD-ROM onwhich you can read, write, and erase data, just like a harddisk.Did You Know?You can add the Computer icon to thedesktop. Right-click the desktop in ablank area, click Personalize, clickChange desktop icons in the left pane,select the Computer check box, andthen click OK.You can find Windows system infor-mation in Computer. Click the Startbutton, click Computer, click Systemproperties on the toolbar.You can find drive or device proper-ties in Computer. Click the Start button,click Computer, click the drive ordevice, click Properties on the toolbar,and then click the General tab.See AlsoSee “Changing the Explorer WindowView” on page 55 for information onchanging the display of a folder’scontents.
  • 78. Windows makes it easy to manage the personal and business files andfolders you work with every day. You can access your Documentsfolder from the Start menu. In the Documents folder, you can view fileinformation, organize files and folders, and open files and folders. Onceyou open more than one folder, you can use buttons on the Commandbar to help you move quickly between folders. Depending on previousinstallation, devices installed, or other users, your personal foldersmight differ.58Viewing and OpeningDocumentsView and Open DocumentsClick the Start button, and thenclick Documents.Click a file to select it.Review the document details inthe Details pane.Double-click the file to open it.Use the scroll bars to viewadditional documents. Drag thescroll box, or click the scrollarrows.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.654321Did You Know?Windows creates a separateDocuments folder for each user.When you share a computer, Windowscreates a separate Documents folderand stores personalized settings foreach user. Each user’s Documentsfolder is located in the Documents AndSettings folder under the user’s nameon the local hard disk.3246
  • 79. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 59Open Any Folder and SwitchBetween FoldersClick the Start button, and thenclick the user account name, orany other Explorer window, suchas Documents, Pictures, or Music.Double-click the folder to open it.Click the Back button or Forwardbutton to return or move to apreviously visited window.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.4321Did You Know?Windows stores music and picturefiles in separate folders in yourpersonal folder. Windows storesmusic files in the Music folder and pic-tures in the Pictures folder, which youcan access from the Start menu.For Your InformationOpening a Document with a Different ProgramMost documents on your desktop are associated with a specific pro-gram. For example, if you double-click a document whose file nameends with the three-letter extension “.txt,” Windows automaticallyopens the document with Notepad, a text-only editor. There are situ-ations, though, when you need to open a document with a programother than the one Windows chooses, or when you want to choose adifferent default program. For example, you might want to open a textdocument in WordPad rather than Notepad so that you can add for-matting and graphics. To do this, right-click the document icon youwant to open, point to Open With, and then click the application youwant to use to open the document, or click Choose Program toaccess more program options. Once you open a text file usingWordPad, this option is automatically added to the Open With menu.See AlsoSee “Changing the Explorer WindowView” on page 55 for information onchanging the display of a folder’scontents.43 2
  • 80. 60Windows Vista makes it easy to find and open recently used files. Youcan use the Recent Items option on the Start menu, or the RecentlyChanged folder (New!) in the Navigation pane of an Explorer window.To quickly open a recently used file, click the Start menu, point toRecent Items, and then click the file you want to open. To view recentlychanged files, open an Explorer window, such as Documents, and thenclick Recently Changed in the Navigation pane. If you want to open afile, simply double-click it.Opening RecentlyUsed DocumentsOpen a Recently UsedDocumentsClick the Start button, and thenpoint to Recent Items.Click the file you want to openfrom the submenu.The program associated with thefile starts and opens the file.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.Open a Recently Changed FileClick the Start button, and thenopen an Explorer window, such asUsername, Documents, Pictures,or Music.Click the Recently Changed link.To open a file, double-click the fileicon.The program associated with thefile starts and opens the file.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.432132112231
  • 81. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 61Windows Vista comes with a personal folder that store your most fre-quently used folders in one location. The personal folder appears onthe Start menu with the name of the person logged on to the computer.The personal folder only contains files and folder associated with auser account and are unique for each user on the computer. The per-sonal folder (New!) includes a variety of folders: Contacts, Desktop,Documents, Favorites, Links, Music, Pictures, Saved Games, Searches,and Videos. You can access these folders using the personal folder orby name on the Start menu.Working withPersonal FoldersView and Open a PersonalFolderClick the Start button, and thenclick the user account name at thetop of the right column on the Startmenu.Double-click a folder to open it.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.321132
  • 82. 62The Address bar (New!) appears at the top of every Explorer windowand displays the current location on your computer or network. Thelocation appears as a series of links separated by arrows. You canchange your current location by either typing a new location—even aWeb address on the Internet—or selecting one using the Address bar.You can also use the Back and Forward buttons to the left of theAddress bar to switch between locations you have previously visited.Navigating BetweenFoldersNavigate to a Location◆ Click a location. Use either of thefollowing methods:◆ Visible folder location. To godirectly to a location visible inthe Address bar, click thelocation name.◆ Visible subfolder location. Togo to a subfolder of a locationvisible in the Address bar, clickthe arrow to the right, and thenclick the location name.◆ Type a location. Click a blankspace (to the right of text) in theAddress bar, and then type thecomplete folder name or path tothe location, and then press Enter.You can type common locationsand then press Enter. The commonlocations include: Computer,Contacts, Control Panel,Documents, Favorites, Games,Music, Pictures, Recycle Bin, andVideos.If you type a Web address (URL) inthe Address bar, the Explorerwindow switches to InternetExplorer.Address bar Click a locationNavigation pane
  • 83. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 63Windows Vista offers a useful feature for managing files and folders,called the Folders list. The Folders list displays the window in twopanes, or frames, which allows you to view information from two differ-ent locations. The left pane of the Folders list displays the file hierarchyof all the drives and folders on the computer, and the right pane dis-plays the contents of the selected drive or folder. This arrangementenables you to view the file hierarchy of your computer and the con-tents of a folder simultaneously making it easy to copy, move, delete,and rename files and folders. Using the non filled arrow and the filledarrow to the left of an icon in the Folders list allows you to display dif-ferent levels of the drives and folders on your computer without open-ing and displaying the contents of each folder.Viewing theFolders ListView the Folders ListOpen any folder window.In the Navigation pane, click theFolders link.TIMESAVER Press theWindows key+E to open theComputer window with theFolders list.Perform the commands you wantto display folder structure andcontents:◆ To show the file and folderstructure, click the non filledarrow.◆ To hide the file and folderstructure, click the filled arrow.◆ To display the contents of afolder, click the folder icon.In the Navigation pane, click theFolders link again to close theFolders list.4321Did You Know?You can quickly determine if a foldercontains folders. When an arrowdoesn’t appear next to an icon in theFolders list, the item has no foldersin it.3 2
  • 84. 64Windows Vista gives you the option to customize the layout for eachExplorer window depending on the information the window contains.The layout (New!) for each Explorer window includes a Menu Bar,Details pane, Preview pane, and Navigation pane. The Details andNavigation panes appear by default. Some Explorer windows, such asthe personal folder labeled with your user account name, also includea Search Pane, which you can use. The Organize menu shows or hidesthe layout elements. If you prefer working with menus like the previousversion of Windows, you can show the Menu Bar and use traditionalmenus.Changing the ExplorerLayoutChange the Explorer LayoutOpen the folder window you wantto change.Click the Organize button, andthen point to Layout.Select the layout item you want toshow or hide: Menu Bar, SearchPane, Details Pane, Preview Pane,or Navigation Pane.Layout options vary depending onthe type of Explorer window.TIMESAVER To quickly displaythe Menu bar, press the Alt key,and then release it. Press the Altkey again to remove it.32123WINV-4.1.4
  • 85. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 65The Navigation pane (New!) provides links to commonly used foldersand saved searches to reduce the number of clicks it takes to locate afile or folder. Windows Vista provides a default list of favorite linksincluding Documents, Pictures, Music, Recently Changed, andSearches. You can customize the Navigation pane to include thefolders or saved searches you want for your everyday use. You canmove current links, add or rename folders or save searches, or removean item. If the Navigation pane gets cluttered, you can restore it backto the original default items and start from there.Customizing theNavigation PaneCustomize the Navigation Pane◆ Move a link. Drag an item in theNavigation pane to a higher orlower position.◆ Add a link. Drag an item from itsoriginal location to a position onthe Navigation pane. This includesfolders from the Folder list at thebottom of the Navigation pane.◆ Rename a link. Right-click theitem, and then click Rename. Typea new name, and then press Enter.The original folder or search is notrenamed, only the Navigation link.◆ Remove a link. Right-click theitem, and then click Remove Link.The original folder or search is notremoved, only the Navigation link.◆ Restore default links. Right-click ablank area of the Navigation pane,and then click Restore DefaultFavorite Links.Move a linkRename a link Remove a linkNavigation paneWINV-4.2.4
  • 86. 66In Explorer windows, files appear in lists with headings at the top. Youcan use the headings to change how files are displayed in the window.There are several ways to organize your files by using file list headingsand they include filtering, stacking, and grouping. Filtering (New!) dis-plays only files with the properties you select by heading type. Stacking(New!) displays all of the files in the view into piles by heading type.After you stack files into piles, you can open individual ones to view thecontents of the stack. Grouping (New!) displays a sequential list of allof the files by heading type. Grouping and stacking are similar organi-zational tools. Grouping organizes files into visible groups, whilestacking organizes files into hidden groups within an icon.Organizing Files byHeadingsOrganize Files Using FilteringOpen the folder that contains thefiles you want to filter.Point to the heading you want tofilter by.Click the arrow to the right of theheading you want to filter by.Select the property check boxesyou want to filter by.Click in a blank area to close thesearch menu.◆ To cancel the search, pressEsc.54321Did You Know?You can sort files using headings.Open the folder that contains the filesyou want to sort, point to the headingyou want to sort by, click the arrow tothe right, and then click Sort. Click in ablank area to close the search menu.To quickly sort files by headings, clickthe heading title. Either method, thesort toggles between ascending anddescending.2543WINV-4.5.3, WINV-4.5.4,WINV-4.5.5
  • 87. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 67Organize Files Using StackingOpen the folder that contains thefiles you want to stack.Point to the heading you want tostack by.Click the arrow to the right of theheading you want to stack by.Click Stack by <heading name>.Click in a blank area to close thesearch menu.◆ To cancel the search, pressEsc.To view the files within anindividual stack, double-click thestack.Organize Files Using GroupingOpen the folder that contains thefiles you want to group.Point to the heading you want togroup by.Click the arrow to the right of theheading you want to group by.Click Group.Click in a blank area to close thesearch menu.◆ To cancel the search, pressEsc.5432165432125643254
  • 88. 68Sometimes remembering precisely where you stored a file can bedifficult. Windows provides a Search folder (New!) to help you findand view all of your files or folders in one place. The Search folder pro-vides easy access to all of your most common files, such as docu-ments, pictures, music, and e-mail, in a single view. If you don’t find thefile or folders you’re looking for, you can perform an advanced search.An advanced search gives you the option to find files or folders by type,name, title, location, date (taken, modified, or created), size, or propertytag. The search locates files and programs stored anywhere in indexedlocations, which includes personal folders, e-mail, offline files, andWeb sites in the History list for your Web browser. The Search folder isaccessible from the Start menu (or any folder window) to help youlocate files and folders.Searching for Filesand FoldersCreate a Simple Search by TypeClick the Start button, and thenclick Search.Click the type of file you want tolocate: All, E-mail, Document,Picture, Music, or Other.◆ To search for folders, click All.Click in the Search box.Type a word or part of a word.As you type, programs and filesthat match your text appear on theStart menu. You don’t have topress Enter.TROUBLE? In the Search box,you must press Enter to start asearch for files in non-indexedlocations.4321Did You Know?You can search everywhere on yourcomputer. If you can’t find a file, youcan search everywhere on your com-puter. In the Advanced Search pane,specify any search criteria, click theLocations arrow, click Everywhere,and then click Search. This might takea long time.2 34SearchresultsWINV-4.4.5,WINV-4.4.6
  • 89. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 69Create an Advanced SearchClick the Start button, and thenclick Search.Click the type of file you want tolocate: All, E-mail, Document,Picture, Music, or Other.Click the Advanced Search button.Specify the search options youwant:◆ Name. Type a file name.◆ Tags. Type a property tag.◆ Title. Type the author name.◆ Location. Click the list arrow,and then select a searchlocation.◆ Date. Click the first list arrow,select the date type you wantto find, click the second listarrow, select a search criteria,and then specify a value.◆ Size. Click the list arrow, selecta search criteria, and thenspecify a value.Select or clear the Include non-indexed, hidden, and system files(might be slow) check box.Click Search.65432123546Results
  • 90. 70If you frequently perform the same search, you can save your searchresults (New!) like any file and perform or modify the search againlater. When you save a search, the search is saved by default in theSearches folder, which you can open by clicking the Searches folderlink in the Navigation pane. Like any link, you can move a saved searchfrom the Searches folder to the Favorite links section in the Navigationpane to make it more accessible. To run a saved search, display thesaved search link, and then double-click it.Saving a SearchSave a SearchClick the Start button, and thenclick Search.Specify the criteria you want, andthen perform the search.Click the Save Search button onthe toolbar.Type a name for the search.Click Save.To use a saved search, click theSearches link in the Favorite Linkspane, and then double-click thesaved search.6543213 2546WINV4.4.2
  • 91. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 71Changing SearchOptionsChange Search OptionsClick the Start button, and thenclick Search.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Folder andSearch Options.TIMESAVER After a search,click Search Tools on the toolbar,and then click Search Options.Click the Search tab.Select the What to search optionyou want.Select or clear the check boxesunder How to search:◆ Include subfolders when typingin the Search box.◆ Find partial matches.◆ Use natural language search.◆ Don’t use the Index whensearching the file system(might be slow).Select or clear the check boxesunder When searching non-indexed locations:◆ Include system directories.◆ Include compressed files (ZIP,CAB, ...)Click OK.7654321When you perform a search for files or folders, Windows Vista uses thesearch options (New!) to help customize the search results. You canspecify whether you want to search for file names and content or justfor file names and whether to include subfolders or find partialmatches. For non-indexed searches, you can set options to include sys-tem directories or compressed files (ZIP, CAB...). The search optionsare available in the Folder Options dialog box under the Search tab.73546WINV-4.4.1
  • 92. 72You can also find files and programs using the Search box at thebottom of the Start menu and at the top of every Explorer window. TheSearch box (New!) filters out items that don’t match the text you type.The search includes text in the file name, text in the file, tags (a customfile property), and other file properties. The search locates files andprograms stored anywhere in indexed locations, which includespersonal folders, e-mail, offline files, and Web sites in the History listfor your Web browser.Performing an InstantSearchFind a File or Program Using theSearch Box on the Start MenuClick the Start button.Click in the Search box.Type a word or part of a word.As you type, programs and filesthat match your text appear on theStart menu. You don’t have topress Enter.TROUBLE? In the Search box,you must press Enter to start asearch for files in non-indexedlocations.321Did You Know?You can display search properties.Right-click the heading in an Explorerwindow that you want to seeproperties for, and then click More.1 3WINV-4.4.3,WINV-4.4.4
  • 93. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 73Find a File or Folder Using theSearch Box From a FolderClick the Start button, and thenopen the Explorer window whereyou want to start looking, such asDocuments, Pictures, or Music.Click in the Search box.Type a word or part of a word.As you type, programs and filesthat match your text appear on theStart menu. You don’t have topress Enter.TROUBLE? In the Search box,you must press Enter to start asearch for files in non-indexedlocations.321Did You Know?You can use wildcards to expand asearch. Use the * (asterisk) wildcardsymbol in a file name when you’reunsure of the entire name. For exam-ple, type S*rs to find all files beginningwith “S” and ending with “rs,” such asStars and Sports cars.23Results
  • 94. 74The Search box (New!) at the bottom of the Start menu and at the topof every Explorer window filters out items that don’t match the text youtype. The search includes text in the file name, text in the file, tags(a custom file property), and other file properties. In the Search box,you can perform advanced searches by specifying properties and usingboolean filters. For example, Name:Agenda finds only files that have theword agenda in the file name. In addition, you can use boolean filters,such as AND, NOT, OR, Quotes, Parentheses, >, or <. For example,Agenda AND Report find files that contain both words agenda andreport. When you type boolean filters, you need to use all capital let-ters. You can also combine properties and boolean filters together tocreate a more specific search.Performing anAdvanced SearchFind Files and Folders Usingthe Search FolderTurn off natural language search.(default off).◆ Click the Start button, clickControl Panel, double-click theFolder Options icon in Classicview, click the Search tab,clear the Use natural languagesearch check box, and thenclick OK.Click in the Search box at thebottom of the Start menu or at thetop of an Explorer window.Type an advanced search. See thetable for some examples.321Search ExamplesExample Descriptionagenda AND report Finds files that contain both agenda and report.agenda NOT report Finds files that contain agenda, but not report.agenda OR report Finds files that contain either agenda or report.“Agenda Report” Finds files that contain the exact phrase “AgendaReport” in quotes.(agenda report) Finds files that contain both words agenda andreport in any >10/10/08 Find files that are later than 10/10/08.size: < 100 MB Find files that are less than 100 MB.subject: agenda Find files with the subject agenda and any filesAND report that contain the word report.23
  • 95. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 75If using properties and boolean filters seems a little to much for you tohandle, you can find files using natural language search (New!),which allows you to perform the same property or boolean search, yetuse a form that is easier to use. Instead of kind: document author:(Steve AND Holly), you can type documents by Steve and Holly. Beforeyou can use natural language in a Search box, you need to turn it onunder the Search tab in Folder Options in the Control Panel.Performing NaturalLanguage SearchesTurn On Natural LanguageSearchClick the Start button, and thenControl Panel.Double-click the Folder Optionsicon in Classic view.Click the Search tab.Select the Use natural languagesearch check box.Click OK.Perform a Natural LanguageSearchClick in the Search box at thebottom of the Start menu or at thetop of an Explorer window.Type a natural language search.Some examples include:◆ documents modified today◆ e-mail from holly sent this week◆ music by Mozart◆ videos of family createdDecember 2007215432153412
  • 96. 76When you create a file, Windows automatically adds properties to thefiles, such as name, creation date, modified date, and size. These prop-erties are important to Windows, however, they may not be usefulwhen you are searching for a file. You can add or modify common filesproperties and create or modify custom tag properties (New!) to makeit faster and easier to locate files in the future. You can add or modifyproperties for most files. However, there are some exceptions, such asplain text (.txt) or rich text format (.rtf) files. You can add or modify prop-erties using the Details pane in an Explorer window, the Details tab inthe Properties dialog box, or in the Save As dialog box. If you want toremove some or all of the property information in a file, you can quicklyremove it using the Properties dialog box.Adding Propertiesand Tags to FilesAdd or Modify PropertiesClick the Start button, and thenclick Documents.Click the file you want to add ormodify properties.In the Details pane, click the tagyou want to change, and then typethe new tag.◆ If the Details pane is notavailable, right-click the file,click Properties, click theDetails tab. When you’re done,click Apply.To add more than one tag,separate each entry with asemicolon.To rate a file using the ratingproperty, click the star thatrepresents the rating you want togive the file.Click Save.6543215243 6WINV-4.6.1,WINV-4.6.2
  • 97. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 77Add or Modify Properties WhileSaving a FileClick the File menu in the programyou are using, and then clickSave As.Type tags and other properties inthe boxes provides.To add more than one property,separate each entry with asemicolon.Type the name of the file.Click Save.Remove PropertiesClick the Start button, clickDocuments, and then locate thefile in which you want to removeproperties.Select the file you want to removeproperties.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click RemoveProperties.Click the Create a copy with allpossible properties removedoption or click the Remove thefollowing properties from this file:option.Select or clear the check boxesfor each property.Click OK.65432154321235243645
  • 98. 78Windows keeps track of files in indexed locations (New!) and storesinformation about them in the background using an index, like the onefound in the back of this book, to make locating files faster and easier.You can use Indexing Options in the Control Panel to view, add, remove,and modify indexed locations, indexed file types, and other advancedindex settings. For example, if a file type is not recognized by the index,you can add it, or if you’re having problems with the search index, youcan rebuild or restore it.Modifying the Indexto Improve SearchesView, Add, or Remove IndexedLocationsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Indexing Optionsicon.TIMESAVER After a search,click Search Tools on the toolbar,and then click Modify IndexLocations.Click Modify.If you don’t see all the locations,click Show all locations.If a folder location containssubfolders, you can double-clickthe folder to expand it.Select or clear the check box nextto the folder locations you want toadd or remove from the index.Click OK.Click Close.87654321Did You Know?You can index file attributes for afolder. Right-click the folder, clickProperties, click the General tab, clickAdvanced, select the Index this file forfast searching check box, and thenclick OK twice.834567WINV-4.4.1
  • 99. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 79Set Advanced Indexing OptionsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Indexing Optionsicon.Click Advanced.Click the Index Settings tab.Select or clear the following checkboxes:◆ Index encrypted files.◆ Treat similar words withdiacritics as different words.For index troubleshooting, useeither of these buttons:◆ To re-index selected locations,click Rebuild.◆ To restore your index to itsoriginal settings, click RestoreDefaults.If you need to change the IndexLocation, specify a new location orclick Select new.Click the File Types tab.Select or clear the check boxeswith the file types you want toinclude or exclude in the index.For each selected file type, clickthe option to specify how the fileshould be indexed.Click OK.Click Close.1211109876543214765118910
  • 100. The keys to organizing files and folders effectively within a hierarchyare to store related items together and to name folders informatively.Creating a new folder can help you organize and keep track of files andother folders. In order to create a folder, you select the location whereyou want the new folder, create the folder, and then lastly, name thefolder. You should name each folder meaningfully so that just by read-ing the folder’s name you know its contents. After you name a folder orfile, you can rename it at any time.80Creating andRenaming Filesand FoldersCreate a FolderOpen the drive or folder where youwant to create a folder.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click New Folder.TIMESAVER Right-click ablank area of the window, andthen click New Folder.With the New Folder nameselected, type a new name.Press Enter.4321Did You Know?File names can be up to 255characters. You can use spaces andunderscores in names, but you can’tuse the following characters: @ * : < >| ? “ or /. Remember the best way tokeep your files organized is with aconsistent naming convention.23WINV-4.2.1, WINV-4.2.2,WINV-4.6.3
  • 101. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 81Rename a File or FolderClick the file or folder to select it.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Rename.With the name selected, type anew name, or click to position theinsertion point, and then edit thename.Press Enter.TIMESAVER Right-click the fileor folder you want to rename, clickRename, type a name, and thenpress Enter. You can also selectthe file, click the file name, type aname, and then press Enter.4321Did You Know?You can rename a group of files.Select all the files you want to rename,right-click one of the selected files,click Rename from the shortcut menu,type a name, and then press Enter. Thegroup name appears with numbers inconsecutive order.123
  • 102. Sometimes you will need to move a file from one folder to another, orcopy a file from one folder to another, leaving the file in the first loca-tion and placing a copy of it in the second. You can move or copy a fileor folder using a variety of methods. If the file or folder and the locationwhere you want to move it are visible in a window or on the desktop,you can simply drag the item from one location to the other. Moving afile or folder on the same disk relocates it whereas dragging it from onedisk to another copies it so that it appears in both locations. When thedestination folder or drive is not visible, you can use the Cut (to move),Copy, and Paste commands on the Edit menu to move or copy theitems.82Copying and MovingFiles and FoldersCopy a File or FolderOpen the drive or folder containingthe file or folder you want to copy.Select the files or folders you wantto copy.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Copy.Display the destination folderwhere you want to copy the filesor folder.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Paste.54321For Your InformationSending Files and FoldersWhen you right-click most objects on the desktop or in Computer orWindows Explorer, the Send To command, located on the shortcutmenu, lets you send, or move, a file or folder to a new location onyour computer. For example, you can send a file or folder to a remov-able disk to make a quick backup copy of the file or folder, to a mailrecipient as an electronic message, or to the desktop to create ashortcut. You can also use the Send To command to move a file orfolder from one folder to another. To send a file or folder, right-clickthe file or folder you want to send, point to Send To on the shortcutmenu, and then click the destination you want.Did You Know?You can arrange files and folders in anExplorer window by using AutoArrange or Align to Grid. The AutoArrange option keeps icons in a win-dow organized so they don’t overlapeach other, while the Align to Gridoption aligns icons in a windowaccording an invisible grid to keepthem organized. To turn either of theseoptions on, click the View menu infolder you want to modify, and thenclick Auto Arrange or Align to Grid. Todisplay the menu bar, click Organize onthe toolbar, point to Layout, and thenclick Menu Bar.32WINV-4.6.3
  • 103. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 83Move a File or FolderOpen the drive or folder containingthe file or folder you want to move.Select the files or folders you wantto move.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Cut.Display the destination folderwhere you want to move the filesor folder.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Paste.Copy or Move a File or FolderUsing Drag and DropOpen the drive or folder containingthe file or folder you want to copyor move.Select the files or folders you wantto copy or move.Click the Folders link in theNavigation pane.Click the arrows to display thedestination folder, and then clickthe destination folder.Right-click the selected files orfolders, drag to the destinationfolder, and then click Copy Here orMove Here.TIMESAVER To move theselected items, drag them to thedestination folder. To copy theitems, hold down the Ctrl keywhile you drag.5432154321324235
  • 104. When you organize the contents of a folder, disk, or the desktop, youmight find files and folders that you no longer need. You can deletethese items or remove them from the disk. If you delete a file or folderfrom the desktop or from the hard disk, it goes into the Recycle Bin. TheRecycle Bin, located on your desktop, is a temporary storage area fordeleted files. The Recycle Bin stores all the items you delete from yourhard disk so that if you accidentally delete an item, you can remove itfrom the Recycle Bin to restore it. Be aware that if you delete a filefrom a removable disk, it is permanently deleted, not stored in theRecycle Bin. The files in the Recycle Bin do occupy room on your com-puter, so you need to empty it to free up space.84Deleting andRestoring Filesand FoldersDelete Files and FoldersSelect the files and folders youwant to delete.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and then click Delete.TIMESAVER Press the Deletekey to delete selected items.Click Yes to confirm the deletionand place the items in the RecycleBin.On the desktop, right-click theRecycle Bin icon, and then clickEmpty Recycle Bin.Your computer permanentlyremoves the items.4321214Recycle Bin iconWINV-4.6.3
  • 105. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 85Restore Files and FoldersDouble-click the Recycle Bin iconon the desktop.Select the item or items you wantto restore.Click the Restore this item orRestore all items button on thetoolbar.321For Your InformationChanging Recycle Bin PropertiesYou can adjust several Recycle Bin settings by using the Propertiesoption on the Recycle Bin shortcut menu. For example, if you want todelete files immediately rather than place them in the Recycle Bin,right-click the Recycle Bin, click Properties, and then select the DoNot Move Files To The Recycle Bin check box. Also, if you find thatthe Recycle Bin is full and cannot accept any more files, you canincrease the amount of disk space allotted to the Recycle Bin bymoving the Maximum size of Recycle Bin slider to the right. Thepercentage shown represents how much space the contents of theRecycle Bin takes on the drive.Did You Know?You can undo a deletion. If you acci-dentally delete a file, click Organize,and then click Undo Delete. Windowsremembers your last three actions.You can’t open a deleted folder andrestore selected items. When you’vedeleted a folder, you have to restorethe entire folder.23
  • 106. It could take you a while to access a file or folder buried several levelsdown in a file hierarchy. To save some time, you can create shortcutsto the items you use frequently. A shortcut is a link that you can placein any location to gain instant access to a particular file, folder, or pro-gram on your hard disk or on a network just by double-clicking. Theactual file, folder, or program remains stored in its original location, andyou place an icon representing the shortcut in a convenient location,such as in a folder or on the desktop.86Creating a Shortcutto a File or FolderCreate a Shortcut to a Fileor FolderOpen the drive or folder containingthe file or folder in which you wantto create a shortcut.Right-click the file or folder, andthen click Create Shortcut.To change the shortcut’s name,right-click the shortcut, clickRename from the shortcut menu,type a new name, and then pressEnter.Drag the shortcut to the desiredlocation.4321For Your InformationPlacing Shortcuts on the Start Menu and TaskbarYou can place shortcuts to frequently used files, folders, and pro-grams on the Start menu or toolbar on the taskbar. To do this, simplydrag the shortcut file, folder, or program to the Start button, wait untilthe Start menu opens, drag to the All Programs submenu, wait untilthe submenu opens, and then drag the shortcut to the appropriateplace on the menu. You can also drag a shortcut to a toolbar on thetaskbar using the same method. When you release the mouse, theitem appears on the menu or toolbar.Did You Know?You can improve performance bylimiting desktop items. To improveperformance on your computer andfind files more easily, it’s better to cre-ate desktop shortcuts rather than storefiles in the Documents folder.241WINV-4.2.3
  • 107. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 87If you want to hide files and folder for added privacy purposes, you cando it by setting two separate options: one to set the option to hide spe-cific files and folders, and the other to set a general folder option toshow or hide files and folders. If you set the option to hide specific filesand folders and the Show hidden files and folders option is set, the hid-den files and folder appear transparent. If the general option is set toDo not show hidden files and folder, the hidden files and folder areactually hidden. The only way to view them again is to set the generaloption to Show hidden files and folders again. Anyone can show hiddenfiles and folders, so it shouldn’t be used for security purposes.Hiding Files andFoldersShow or Hide Hidden Files andFoldersRight-click the file or folder youwant to hide or unhide, and thenclick Properties.Select or clear the Hidden checkbox.Click OK.The files or folders appeartransparent or hidden.Show or Hide Hidden Files andFoldersClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Folder Optionsicon.Click the View tab.Click the Do not show hidden filesand folders or Show hidden filesand folders option.To set the current view to allfolders, click Apply to Folders.Click OK.654321321326354WINV-4.1.3
  • 108. When you work with files and folders, Windows displays folder con-tents in a standard way, known as the default. The default folder viewsettings are as follows: Tiles view displays files and folders as icons;common task links appear in the left pane; folders open in the samewindow; and items open when you double-click them. Depending onprevious installation or users, your folder view settings might differ.Instead of changing the folder view to your preferred view—Icons, List,or Details—each time you open a folder, you can change the view per-manently to the one you prefer. In addition to the defaults, you canchange options such as folder settings to show or hide file extensionsfor known file types, show or hide hidden files and folders, show orhide protected operating system files, and show pop-up descriptions offolders and desktop items.88Changing FolderOptionsChange the Way AllFolders WorkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Folder Optionsicon.Click the General tab.Select a Tasks option to displayfrequently used tasks or thecontents of the folder.Select a Browse folders option todisplay each folder in the samewindow or its own window.Select a Click items as followsoption to single-click or double-click items.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can restore all folder options todefault Windows settings. On theGeneral tab in the Folder Options dia-log box, click Restore Defaults.73546WINV-4.1.1, WINV-4.1.2,WINV-4.1.3
  • 109. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 89Change the Folder ViewClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Folder Optionsicon.Click the View tab.To set the current view to allfolders, click Apply to Folders.Select the check boxes for theoptions you want, and clear thecheck boxes for the ones youdon’t. Some common optionsinclude:◆ Always show menus (New!).◆ Hidden files and folders. Clickan option to show or hide them.◆ Hide extensions for known filetypes.◆ Hide protected operatingsystem files (Recommended)(New!).◆ Show encrypted orcompressed NTFS files in color(New!).◆ Show pop-up description forfolder and desktop items.Click OK.654321For Your InformationUnderstanding File ExtensionsThe program Windows uses to open a document depends on a three-letter extension to the document’s file name, called a file extension.You might have never seen a document’s file extension because yoursystem might be set up to hide it. The file extension for simple textfiles is “.txt” (pronounced “dot t-x-t”), and many graphic files have theextension “.bmp”. This means that the full name for a text file namedMemo is Memo.txt. If you double-click a document whose file nameends with the three-letter extension “.txt,” Windows automaticallyopens the document with Notepad, a text-only editor. If you want todisplay or change file extension settings, click the Start button, clickControl Panel, and then double-click the Folder Options icon. If youwant to display file extensions in dialog boxes and windows, click theView tab, and then clear the Hide extensions for known file typescheck box in the Advanced settings list box. If you want to change theprogram Windows automatically starts with a given file extension,click the Start button, point to All Programs, click Default Programs,click Associate a file type or protocol with a program, select the filetype, and then click Change Program to see the list of the file exten-sions Windows recognizes and the programs associated with each ofthem, and make changes as appropriate.Did You Know?You can reset folder views to originalWindows settings. On the View tab inthe Folder Options dialog box, clickReset Folders.6345
  • 110. You can display files and folders in a variety of different ways, depend-ing on what you want to see and do. When you view files and folders inDetails view, a default list of file and folder information appears, whichconsists of Name, Size, Type, and Date Modified. If the default list of fileand folder details doesn’t provide you with the information you need,you can add and remove any file and folder information from the Detailsview. If you need to change the way Windows sorts your files and fold-ers, you can use the column indicator buttons in the right pane ofDetails view. Clicking one of the column indicator buttons, such asName, Size, Type, or Date Modified, in Details view sorts the files andfolders by the type of information listed in the column.90Changing File andFolder List ViewsChange File Details to ListOpen the folder you want tochange.Right-click a column title, and thenclick More, or click the Viewmenu, and then click ChooseDetails.TIMESAVER Right-click acolumn title in Details view, andthen click the detail you want toshow or hide.Select the check boxes with thedetails you want to include andclear the ones you don’t.Click the Move Up or Move Downbuttons to change the order of theselected items.Click the Show or Hide button toshow or hide the selected items.Specify the width in pixels of thecolumn for the selected items.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?An ellipsis indicates information ishidden. To show the information, dragthe edge of the column indicatorbutton to resize the column.273645WINV-4.5.2
  • 111. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 91In your personal folders, you can create your own folders andcustomize view options based on the contents. In the toolbar of thePictures and Music folders, Windows provides buttons with filemanagement activities specifically related to the contents of the folder,such as Slide Show in the Pictures folder, or Play All in the Musicfolders. When you create a new folder, you can customize it forpictures, music, and videos by applying a folder template, which is acollection of folder task links and viewing options. When you apply atemplate to a folder, you apply specific features to the folder, such asspecialized task links and viewing options for working with pictures,music, and videos.CustomizingPersonal FoldersChange the Folder LookOpen the folder you want tochange.Click the Organize button on thetoolbar, and the click Properties.Click the Customize tab.Click the list arrow, and thenselect the type of folder you want:All Items, Documents, Picturesand Videos, Music Details, orMusic icons.Select the Also apply thistemplate to all subfolders checkbox to apply the option.To select a picture for display onthe this folder icon, click ChooseFile.To restore the default picture forthe this folder, click RestoreDefault.Click OK.87654321See AlsoSee “Customizing the Taskbar” onpage 118 for information on modifyingthe taskbar.835674WINV-4.2.6,WINV-4.5.1
  • 112. 92Windows Vista maintains a set of personal folders and options foreveryone on your computer to make sure the contents of each user’spersonal folders remain private. The contents of your personal foldersare private, unless you decide to share the contents with others whouse your computer. If you want the other users on your computer tohave access to files, you can place those files in a shared folder calledthe Public folder (New!) that each user can access. The Public foldercontains subfolders to help you organize the files you are sharing, andinclude Documents, Downloads, Music, Pictures and Videos. If you’reconnected to a network, the files in the public folder are available tonetwork users. You can also share files from any folder on your com-puter that you want to designate as a shared folder. When you specifya shared folder, you can also set access permission levels for a personor group.Sharing Folders orFiles with OthersShare a File or Folders from thePublic FolderOpen the drive or folder containingthe files or folders you want toshare.Select the files or folders you wantto share.Click the Folders link to display theFolders list.Click the arrow next to the Publicfolder to display the Publicsubfolders.Drag the selected items onto thePublic folder or subfolder whereyou want to share files.54321See AlsoSee “Setting Network SharingOptions” on page 374 for informationon controlling access to a public folderover a network.4352WINV-4.3.1,WINV-4.3.2
  • 113. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 93Share Any Folder on YourComputerOpen the drive or folder containingthe files or folders you want toshare.Select the folders you want toshare.Click the Share button on thetoolbar.Do any of the following:◆ Type the name of the personwith whom you want to sharefiles, and then click Add.◆ Click the arrow to the right ofthe text box, click the person’sname, and then click Add.◆ Click the arrow to the right ofthe text box, and then clickCreate a new user to create anew user account.Click the arrow next to thepermission level for the person orgroup, and then select a sharingpermission:◆ Reader. Allows viewing only.◆ Contributor. Allows viewing andadding files, and changing ordeleting files they add.◆ Co-owner. Allows viewing,adding, changing, and deletingall files.◆ Remove. Deletes the currentpermission setting.Click Share, and the wait whileWindows sets up sharing.If you want, click the e-mail orcopy link to notify people you haveshared this folder and files.Otherwise, click Done.876543213264578
  • 114. You can compress files in special folders that use compressing soft-ware to decrease the size of the files they contain. Compressed foldersare useful for reducing the file size of one or more large files, thus free-ing disk space and reducing the time it takes to transfer files to anothercomputer over the Internet or network. A compressed folder is denotedby a zippered folder icon. You can compress one or more files in a com-pressed folder by simply dragging them onto the compressed foldericon. When a file is compressed, a copy is used in the compression,and the original remains intact. You can uncompress, or extract, a filefrom the compressed folder and open it as you normally would, or youcan open a file directly from the compressed folder by double-clickingthe Compressed File icon. When you open a file directly, Windowsextracts the file when it opens and compresses it again when it closes.94Compressing Filesand FoldersCompress Files and FoldersSelect the files and folders youwant to copy to a compressedfolder.Right-click one of the selecteditems, point to Send To, and thenclick Compressed (Zipped) Folder.If you want, rename thecompressed folder.To copy additional files or foldersto the compressed folder, drag thefiles onto the compressed folder.4321Did You Know?You can also compress file attributesin a folder. Right-click the folder, clickProperties, click the General tab, clickAdvanced, select the Compress con-tents to save disk space check box,and then click OK twice.241Compressed folder
  • 115. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 95View Compressed FilesDouble-click the compressedfolder to open it.Double-click an item in the folderto open it using its associatedprogram.Decompress FilesDouble-click the compressedfolder to open it.Select the files you want todecompress.Do one of the following:◆ Single file or folder. Double-click the compressed folder toopen it, and then drag the fileor folder from the compressedfolder to a new location.◆ All files. Right-click thecompressed folder, and thenclick Extract All, and then stepthrough the Extraction Wizard.32121131
  • 116. The low cost and large storage size of discs, either CD or DVD (New!),makes creating and using CDs or DVDs an effective way to back upinformation or transfer large amounts of information to another com-puter without a network. Before you can create a CD or DVD, you musthave a blank writeable CD or DVD and a recorder (also known as awriter or burner) installed on your computer. You can copy, or write,files and folders to either a writeable disc (CD-R or DVD-R) or a rewrite-able disc (CD-RW or DVD-RW). With writeable discs, you can read andwrite files and folders many times, but you can’t erase them. Withrewriteable discs, you can read, write, and erase files and folders manytimes, just like a hard disk. When you burn a disc, Windows needs diskspace on your hard disk equal to the capacity of the disc. For a typicalCD, this is between 650 and 740 megabytes (MB) and for a DVD, this isabout 4.7 gigabytes (GB). Do not copy more files and folders to the CDor DVD than it will hold; anything beyond the limit will not copy. WithWindows Vista, you can burn a disc using one of two formats: Live FileSystem or Mastered. The Live File System (New!) format allows you tocopy files to a disc at any time, like a USB drive, while the Masteredformat needs to copy them all at once. If you need a disc for WindowsXP or later and want the convenience of copying files at any time, theLive File System is the best choice. When you need a compatible discfor older computers, the Mastered format is the better choice.96Managing FilesUsing a CD or DVDBurn a Disc Using the MasteredFormatInsert a writeable CD or DVD intoyour CD or DVD recorder.Click Burn files to disc.Type a name for the disc.Click Show/Hide formattingoptions.Click the Mastered option.Click Next to continue.Open the folder that contains thefiles you want to burn, and thendrag the files onto the empty discfolder.Click Burn to disc on the toolbar.The selected files are copied tothe disc. The disc recorder trayopens when the disc is complete.8765432126354WINV-4.6.4
  • 117. Chapter 3 Managing Files and Folders 97Burn a Disc Using the LiveSystem FormatInsert a writeable CD or DVD intoyour CD or DVD recorder.Click Burn files to disc.Type a name for the disc.Click Show/Hide formattingoptions.Click the Live File System option,click Change version, and thenselect the version you want.Click Next to continue.Windows names, formats, andprepares the disc for use.Upon completion, open the folderwith the files you want to burn.Drag the files into the disc folder.As you drag files into the discfolder, they are copiedautomatically to the disc.To close the session and preparethe disc for use, press the Ejectbutton on your disc drive or right-click the writeable drive, and thenclick Close session.After you close a session, you canstill add files to the disc. However,you need to close the session.987654321Did You Know?You can erase some or all of the fileson a disc. Insert the writeable discwith the Live File System format, clickthe Start button, click Computer, clickthe writeable drive, and then clickErase this disc on the toolbar to eraseall the files. Double-click the writeabledrive, select the files you want todelete, and then press Delete.Live File System VersionsVersion Compatible with1.02 Windows 98 and many Apple Computers; also works if youneed to format DVD-RAM or MO (Magneto-optical) discs1.5 Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 20032.01 Windows XP and Windows Server 20032.5 The latest version of Windows; Windows Vista43569
  • 118. This page intentionally left blank
  • 119. Customizing Windows Usingthe Control PanelIntroductionWindows Vista gives you the ability to customize your workenvironment (your computer’s desktop and other settings) tosuit your personal needs and preferences.You can adjustmost Windows features through the Control Panel, a centrallocation for changing Windows settings. From the ControlPanel you access the individual programs for changing theproperties, or characteristics, of a specific element of yourcomputer, such as the desktop, the taskbar, or the Startmenu. Each icon in the Control Panel represents an aspect ofWindows that you can change to fit your own working habitsand personal needs. For example, you can use the Displayicon to change the background picture or color of the desk-top, or theTaskbar and Start Menu icon to customize thetaskbar and Start menu. Some Control Panel settings are vitalto how you work (such as the Date andTime, or theLanguage settings) and others are purely aesthetic (such asthe background picture, or which screen saver you use).The Control Panel also includes icons to setup useraccounts and maintain security (see Chapter 11), and setupand manage local-area, wide-area, and wireless networks(see Chapter 12).You can access printers and faxes (seeChapter 13), add and remove programs and automaticallyupdate Windows (see Chapter 14).You can also work withhardware, such as a scanner, digital camera, modem, audioand speakers, mouse, and keyboard (see Chapter 15).44What You’ll DoView the Control PanelChange the Desktop BackgroundCustomize the Desktop and WindowsSidebarUse a Screen SaverChange the DisplayUse Multiple MonitorsChange the Desktop AppearanceSet the Date and TimeChange Regional and Language OptionsWork with FontsDisplay and Arrange ToolbarsCustomize the Taskbar and Start MenuChange the Way a CD or DVD StartsUse the Ease of Access ToolsUse the Ease of Access CenterListen to the ComputerRecognize Your Speech99
  • 120. The Control Panel is a collection of utility programs that determine howWindows Vista looks and works on your computer. The Control Paneldisplays utilities in two different views: Control Panel Home and ClassicView. Control Panel Home displays utilities in functional categoriesbased on tasks with some direct links, while Classic view displays anicon for each utility program as in previous versions of Windows. Youcan change views by using the Control Panel task pane.100Viewing the ControlPanelView the Control Panel inClassic ViewClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.In the Navigation pane, clickClassic View.View the Control Panel HomeClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.In the Navigation pane, clickControl Panel Home.Click a Control Panel icon or tasklink.Click the Back button on thetoolbar to return to Control PanelHome.432121See AlsoSee “Customizing the Start Menu” onpage 120 for information on changingthe Start menu to directly open ControlPanel programs.4 232
  • 121. The desktop background, or wallpaper, is a picture that serves as yourdesktop’s backdrop, the basic surface on which icons and windowsappear. You can select a background picture and change how it looksusing the Desktop Background dialog box. Once you select a back-ground picture, you can display it on the screen three different ways:Tile displays the picture consecutively across the screen; Center dis-plays the picture in the center of the screen; and Stretch enlarges thepicture and displays it in the center of the screen. Instead of selectinga background picture, which can sometimes make icons on the desktopdifficult to see, you can also change the background to a color.Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 101Changing theDesktop BackgroundSelect a Desktop BackgroundRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Desktop Background.Click the Picture Location listarrow and select a location, orclick Browse, select a picture inthe location you want, and thenclick Open. The default picturelocations include:◆ Windows Wallpapers.◆ Pictures.◆ Sample Pictures.◆ Public Pictures.◆ Solid Colors.Select the picture you want to use.Select the position option youwant.Click OK.Click the Close button.7654321723465WINV-6.3.1
  • 122. The icons on the desktop provide easy access to programs, folders,and system related shortcuts. If your desktop is getting cluttered, youcan quickly show or hide the desktop icons. In addition, you can cus-tomize the desktop to show or hide the familiar icons Computer, User’sFiles, Network, Recycle Bin, or Control Panel. You can also quickly sort,resize, and rearrange desktop icons by right-clicking the desktop, andthen using commands on the View and Sort By submenus.102Customizing theDesktopDisplay or Hide Desktop IconsRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.TIMESAVER To show or hideall desktop icons, right-click thedesktop, point to View, and thenclick Show Desktop Icons.In the left pane, click Changedesktop icons.Select or clear the check boxes toshow or hide desktop icons.To change the appearance of anicon, select the icon, click ChangeIcon, select an icon, and thenclick OK.Click OK.Click the Close button.654321Did You Know?You can resize desktop icons. Right-click the desktop, point to View, andthen click Large Icons, Medium Icons,or Classic Icons. Classic icons are thesmallest size.You can arrange desktop icons. TheAuto Arrange option keeps iconsorganized so they don’t overlap eachother, while the Align to Grid optionaligns icons in a window according aninvisible grid to keep them organized.Right-click the desktop, point to View,and then click Auto Arrange or Alignto Grid.543WINV-6.3.2
  • 123. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 103Windows Sidebar (New!) is a pane on the side of the Windows Vistadesktop that gives you quick access to mini-applications calledgadgets that can connect to Web services, such as news headlines, orintegrate with many of your applications, such as viewing your calen-dar. You can customize Windows Sidebar to suit the way you work—whether you want it always on top or resting below maximizedwindows. If you are having problems with a gadget, you can stop itfrom running. If the gadget was installed with Windows Vista, you canrestore it.Customizing theWindows SidebarChange Windows SidebarPropertiesRight-click a blank area of theSidebar, and then clickProperties.Select or clear the Start Sidebarwhen Windows starts checkbox.Select or clear the Sidebar isalways on top of other windowscheck box.Click the Right or Left option todisplay select a desktop location.If you have more than onemonitor, click the list arrow, andthen select a monitor.To stop a gadget from running,click View list of runninggadgets, select the gadget youwant to stop, click Remove, andthen click Close.To restore default Windowsgadgets, click Restore gadgetsinstalled with Windows.Click OK.876543217 865432WINV-6.4.2
  • 124. 104In the past, you needed a screen saver, a continually moving display, toprotect your monitor from burn in, which occurs when the same displayremains on the screen for extended periods of time and becomes partof the screen. Those days are gone with the emergence of new displaytechnology. Screen savers are more for entertainment than anythingelse. When you leave your computer idle for a specified wait time, ascreen saver displays a continuous scene, such as an aquarium, untilyou move your mouse to stop it.Using a Screen SaverSelect a Screen SaverRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Screen Saver.Click the list arrow, and then clicka screen saver.Click Settings.Select the options you want for thescreen saver, and then click OK.Click Preview to see the screensaver in full-screen view, and thenmove your mouse to end thepreview.Specify the time to wait until yourcomputer starts the screen saver.Select or clear the On resume,display logon screen check box.Click OK.987654321Did You Know?You can turn off a screen saver. On theScreen Saver tab, click (None) fromthe Screen Saver list arrow.7 8 9643WINV-1.4.1,WINV-6.3.4
  • 125. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 105If you find yourself frequently scrolling within windows as you work orsquinting to read small text, you might want to change the size of thedesktop on your monitor. A monitor displays pictures by dividing thedisplay screen into thousands or millions of dots, or pixels, arranged inrows and columns. The pixels are so close together that they appearconnected. The screen resolution refers to the number of pixels on theentire screen, which determines the amount of information your moni-tor displays. A low screen resolution setting, such as 640 by 480 pixels(width by height), displays less information on the screen, but the itemson the screen appear relatively large, while a high setting, such as 1024by 768 pixels, displays more information on the screen, but the items onthe screen appear smaller. You can also change the color quality. Thehigher the color quality, the more colors the computer displays, whichrequires greater system memory. The most common color quality set-tings are as follows: 16-bit, which displays 768 colors, and 24-bit and32-bit, both of which display 16.7 million colors.Changing the DisplayChange the Display SizeRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Display Settings.Drag the slider to specify a screensize.Click the Colors list arrow, andthen click a color quality.Click OK.If a message alert appears, clickYes or No to accept or decline thenew settings.Windows reverts to originalsettings after 15 seconds.654321Did You Know?You can eliminate flicker on yourmonitor. On the Monitor tab, clickAdvanced, click the Monitor tab, andthen increase the screen refresh rate.60 Hertz is the default setting.3 54WINV-3.4.1, WINV-3.4.2,WINV-3.4.3
  • 126. 106You can increase the size of your workspaceon the desktop and your productivity byadding another monitor to your computer. Forexample, you can work on a document inWordPad on one monitor and search for Webcontent in your Web browser on the othermonitor. One monitor is the primary monitor,which displays the dialog boxes that appearwhen you start your computer and most pro-grams; the other monitor is the secondarymonitor, which displays windows, icons, andprograms you drag to it from the primarymonitor. Before you can use more than onemonitor, you need to install another displayadapter, a hardware device that allows a com-puter to communicate with its monitor, onyour computer that supports multiple moni-tors. After you install the display adapteraccording to the manufacturer’s instructionsand restart the computer, Windows automati-cally detects the new device and applied thevideo settings best suited to the display. Inthe Control Panel, double-click the Displayicon in Classic View, click the Settings tab,click the monitor icon that represents the sec-ondary monitor that you want to use, selectthe Extend the desktop onto this monitorcheck box, and then click Apply to activate thesecondary monitor.To arrange multiple moni-tors, click the monitor icons and drag them inthe preview window to the positions youwant.You can set different screen resolutionsand color settings for each monitor. See“Adding a Secondary Monitor” on page 462for more information on using multiple moni-tors.Using Multiple MonitorsSelect to extend desktopMultiplemonitorsSelected monitor
  • 127. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 107If text and other items, such as icons, on the screen are not largeenough for you to comfortably view, you can customize the screen todisplay items larger. Windows Vista allows you to increase the Dots PerInch (DPI) scale (New!), which is the number of dots that a device candisplay or print per linear inch. The greater the number, of dots perinch, the better the resolution. DPI is a standard measurement used tospecify screen and printer resolution. 96 DPI is the default screenoption and 120 DPI is the other available standard option. However, youcan set a custom DPI setting, which is not recommended unless youare an experienced user. After you change the DPI, you need to restartWindows to see the change.Changing Text Size onthe ScreenChange the DPI Scaling OptionsRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.In the left pane, click Adjust fontsize (DPI).Click the Default scale (96 DPI) -fit more information or Largerscale (120 DPI) - make text morereadable option.To create a custom DPI scale,click Custom DPI, enter thepercentage you want, and thenclick OK.Click OK.To see the changes, close all ofyour programs, and restartWindows.54321543WINV3.4.4
  • 128. You can change the entire appearance of the desktop by using desktopthemes. A desktop theme changes the desktop background, screensaver, mouse pointers, sounds, icons, and fonts based on a set theme,such as baseball, science, sports, travel, or underwater. You can evenchange your desktop to the classic Windows look. You can use one ofthe predefined desktop themes or create your own. If a theme isn’texactly what you want, you can change the appearance of colors,fonts, and sizes used for major window elements such as title bars,icons, menus, borders, and the desktop itself.108Changing the DesktopAppearanceSelect a Desktop ThemeRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Theme.Click the Theme list arrow, andthen click a theme.◆ Use a theme file. In the Themelist, click Browse, select thetheme file you want, and thenclick Open.Click OK.4321Did You Know?You can save a theme. In the ThemeSettings dialog box, click Save As,name the theme, specify a location,and then click Save.34
  • 129. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 109Customize the DesktopAppearanceRight-click a blank area on thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Window Color andAppearance.Click the color scheme you want.Click Advanced if you want tochange the color, size, or font forindividual items for a WindowsClassic color scheme.To set appearance effects, clickEffects, and then set one or moreof the following effects:◆ Smooth edges of screen fonts;use ClearType.◆ Show shadows under menus.◆ Show window contents whiledragging.Click OK.654321Frequently Asked QuestionsWhat’s ClearTypeClearType is a font technology that improves the display on a com-puter monitor. ClearType makes on-screen text more clear, smooth,and detailed, which can reduce eye strain. ClearType is turned on bydefault in Windows. This is useful and most effective when you useLCD devices, including flat-panel monitors, mobile computers, andsmaller hand-held devices. ClearType is optimized for use with somefonts, including Constantia, Cambria, Corbel, Candara, Calibri, andConsolas. To set the ClearType setting, you open the Personalizewindow in the Control Panel, open the Appearance Settings dialogbox, and then open the Effects dialog box.3 645
  • 130. The date and time you set in the Control Panel appear in the lower-rightcorner of the taskbar. When you click or hover over the taskbar clock,the data appears. Programs use the date and time to establish whenfiles and folders are created and modified. To change the date andtime, you modify settings in the Date and Time dialog box. When youmodify the time, it’s important to also verify or update the time zone set-ting in the Time Zone Settings dialog box, which is used to accuratelydisplay creation and modification dates in a different time zone. Withan Internet connection, you can set options on the Internet tab to makesure the time is accurate. If you need to know the time in other timezones, you can display additional clocks, which you can display byclicking or hovering over the taskbar clock.110Setting the Dateand TimeChange the Date or TimeClick the time on the taskbar in thenotification area, and then clickChange date and time settings.Click the Date and Time tab.If needed, click Change time zone,click the list arrow, select a timezone, and then select or clear theAutomatically adjust clock forDaylight Saving Changes checkbox, and then click OK.Click Change date and time.Click the date arrows to select themonth and year.Click a day, and then specify atime.Click OK.Click OK.8765432118342
  • 131. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 111Keep the Time AccurateClick the time on the taskbar in thenotification area, and then clickChange date and time settings.Click the Internet Time tab.Click Change settings.Select the Synchronize with anInternet time server check box.Click the Server list arrow, andthen click a time server.Click Update now, and then waitfor the time to update.Click OK.Click OK.Add ClocksClick the time on the taskbar in thenotification area, and then clickChange date and time settings.Click the Additional Clocks tab.Select the Show this clock checkbox.Click the Select time zone listarrow, and then select a time zone.Type a name.If you want another clock, performsteps 3 through 5 for Clock 2.Click OK.7654321876543217567654324
  • 132. You can also install multiple input languages on your computer andeasily switch between them. An input language is the language inwhich you enter and display text. When you install additional lan-guages on your computer, the language for the operating system does-n’t change, only the characters you type on the screen. Each languageuses its own keyboard layout, which rearranges the letters that appearwhen you press keys. When you install Text services or another lan-guage, the Language Bar toolbar appears on your desktop and in theToolbars menu. Text services are text-related add-on programs for asecond keyboard layout, handwriting recognition, speech recognition,and an Input Method Editor (IME), which is a system that lets you inputAsian language characters with a standard 101-keyboard. You canswitch between different language keyboard layouts using theLanguage bar or keyboard shortcuts.112Changing LanguageOptionsChange Text Services andInput LanguagesClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theRegional and Language Optionsicon in Classic view.Click the Keyboards andLanguages tab, and then clickChange keyboard.Click the Language list arrow, andthen click a language to use whenyou start your computer.Click Add to add an inputlanguage.Select an input language, and thenclick Remove to delete it, or clickProperties to modify it.Click the Language Bar tab tochange the look and behavior ofthe Language bar.Click the Advanced Key Settingstab to define keyboard shortcuts toswitch between input language.Click OK.Click OK.9876543219254638
  • 133. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 113Change the Language BarSettingsClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theRegional and Language Optionsicon in Classic view.Click the Keyboards andLanguages tab.Click Change Keyboards.Click the Language Bar tab.Select the options you want.Click OK, and then click OK again.Use the Language Bar◆ To switch languages, click theLanguage bar, and then click alanguage.◆ To change Language bar settings,right-click the Language bar, andthen click an option, such astransparency, vertical(orientation), and minimize.◆ To change Text Services and InputLanguages, right-click theLanguage bar, and then clickSettings.65432164Language baroptionsLanguage barLanguages5
  • 134. 114For those who work in international circles, you can change the formatof the date, time, currency, and number into almost any form. For exam-ple, you can change the decimal symbol and list separator, the formatused for negative numbers and leading zeros, and the measurementsystem (U.S. or metric).Changing RegionalOptionsChange the Display for Dates,Times, Currency, and NumbersClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theRegional and Language Optionsicon in Classic view.Click the Formats tab.Click the Format list arrow, andthen click a locale with thesettings you want.Click Customize this format tochange individual settings.Select the format options you wanton the different tabs.Click OK.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can change regional format bylanguage and country. On the Locationtab, click the Current language listarrow, and then click a language.See AlsoSee “Changing Language Options” onpage 112 for information on workingwith different languages.274356
  • 135. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 115Everything you type appears in a font, or typeface, a particular designset of letters, numbers, and other characters. The height of charactersin a font is measured in points, each point being approximately 1/72inch, while the width is measured by pitch, which refers to how manycharacters can fit in an inch. You might have heard common fontnames, such as Times New Roman, Arial, Courier, or Symbol. Windowscomes with a variety of fonts for displaying text and printing docu-ments. Using the Fonts window, you can view these fonts, see a sampleof how a font appears when printed, and even install new fonts.Working with FontsView or Install FontsClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theFonts icon in Classic view.The currently installed fonts onyour computer appears in theFonts window.Click the File menu, and then clickInstall New Font.◆ To quickly display the menu bar,press the Alt key.Navigate to the drive and foldercontaining the font you want toinstall.Select the font. To select morethan one font, hold down the Ctrlkey while you click each font.Click OK.Click the Close button.654321See AlsoSee “Formatting Text” on page 34 forinformation on using fonts.Frequently Asked QuestionsWhat’s the Difference Between the Fonts?Everything you type appears in a font, a particular typeface designand size for letters, numbers, and other characters. Usually, eachtypeface, such as Times New Roman, is made available in four varia-tions: normal, bold, italic, and bold italic. There are two basic types offonts: scalable and bitmapped. A scalable font (also known as out-line font) is based on a mathematical equation that creates charac-ter outlines to form letters and numbers of any size. The two majorscalable fonts are Adobe’s Type 1 PostScript and Apple/Microsoft’sTrueType or OpenType. Scalable fonts are generated in any point sizeon the fly and require only four variations for each typeface. Abitmapped font consists of a set of dot patterns for each letter andnumber in a typeface for a specified type size. Bitmapped fonts arecreated or prepackaged ahead of time and require four variations foreach point size used in each typeface. Although a bitmapped fontdesigned for a particular font size will always look the best, scalablefonts eliminate storing hundreds of different sizes of fonts on a disk.2 6True Type Open TypeBitmappedfont
  • 136. Toolbars provide easy access to commonly used tasks. Windows Vistacomes with a set of toolbars you can use to access programs, folders,documents, and Web pages right from the taskbar. You can rearrange,resize, and move the toolbars to compliment your working style. Whenyou move a toolbar, you can attach or dock it, to any of the sides on thedesktop or you can float it in a window anywhere within the desktop.116Displaying andArranging ToolbarsShow or Hide a ToolbarRight-click a blank area on thetaskbar.Point to Toolbars, and then click atoolbar without a check mark.A toolbar with a check mark isalready displayed.21Did You Know?You can display hidden buttons on atoolbar. Click the double-arrow at theend of the toolbar.You can display buttons on thetaskbar. Click the up or down arrow onthe taskbar to scroll through thetaskbar buttons.You can also show or hide toolbarsusing the Taskbar and Start MenuProperties dialog box. Right-click thetaskbar, click Properties, click theToolbars tab, select or clear the tool-bar check boxes, and then click OK.Toolbars on the TaskbarToolbar DescriptionAddress Opens Web pages, network locations, files, and foldersusing the Address bar from Internet ExplorerWindows Media Opens the Windows Media Player to play music andPlayer videosLinks Opens links using the Links toolbar from InternetExplorerTablet PC Input Opens the Table PC Input Panel to use ink as anPanel input deviceLanguage bar Switches between languagesDesktop Opens windows to files, folders, and shortcuts on thedesktopQuick Launch Starts Internet Explorer and other programs, switchbetween windows,or minimizes all the windowsNew Toolbar Adds a new toolbar to WindowsSee AlsoSee “Customizing the Taskbar” onpage 118 for information on modifyingthe taskbar.12
  • 137. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 117Unlock or Lock the TaskbarRight-click a blank area on thetaskbar.Click Lock the Taskbar.◆ Toolbars on the taskbar arelocked when a check mark isdisplayed.◆ Toolbars on the taskbar areunlocked when a check markisn’t displayed.Move a ToolbarRight-click a blank area on thetaskbar, and then click Lock theTaskbar to remove the checkmark, if necessary.Point to the dotted bar or name ofthe toolbar, and then drag it to anew location on the desktopdocked to the side or floating inthe middle.2121Did You Know?You can resize a toolbar. Unlock thetaskbar, and then drag the small verti-cal bar at the beginning of the toolbar.You can expand or collapse a toolbar.Unlock the taskbar, and then double-click the small vertical bar at thebeginning of the toolbar.121Dotted bar indicatestaskbar is unlocked2
  • 138. The taskbar is initially located at the bottom of the Windows desktopand is most often used to switch from one program to another. As withother Windows Vista elements, you can customize the taskbar; forexample, you can change its size and location, customize its display, oradd or remove toolbars to help you perform the tasks you need to do. Ifyou need more room on the screen to display a window, Auto-hide canbe used to hide the taskbar when it’s not in use. You can also groupsimilar windows (such as several WordPad documents) together on thetaskbar to save space. If icons in the notification area are hidden whenyou want to see them, you can customize the notification area toalways show the icons you want to use. In addition, you can alsochoose whether to show or hide common system icons, includingClock, Volume, Network, and Power.118Customizing theTaskbarCustomize the TaskbarRight-click a blank area on thetaskbar, and then click Properties.Click the Taskbar tab.Select the Auto-hide the taskbarcheck box to hide the taskbarwhen you’re not using it.The taskbar appears when youmove the mouse to where thetaskbar would appear.Select the Keep the taskbar on topof other windows check box tokeep the taskbar available.Select the Group similar taskbarbuttons check box to have similarwindows grouped together in onebutton when the taskbar iscrowded.Select the Show Quick Launchcheck box to display the QuickLaunch toolbar.Click OK.7654321763452WINV-6.2
  • 139. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 119Customize the Notification AreaRight-click a blank area on thetaskbar, and then click Properties.Click the Notification Area tab.Select the Hide inactive iconscheck box to hide seldom-usedicons in the notification area.Select or clear the system iconsyou want to show or hide on thenotification area.Click Customize.Specify which icons are alwaysdisplayed, which are neverdisplayed, and which are hiddenwhen inactive.Click OK.Click OK.87654321Did You Know?You can access taskbar and Startmenu settings in the Control Panel.Double-click the Taskbar and StartMenu icon in the Control Panel inClassic view.You can move the taskbar. Unlock thetaskbar, and then drag a blank area onthe taskbar to a new location on anyside of the desktop.See AlsoSee “Displaying and ArrangingToolbars” on page 116 for informationon working with toolbars on thetaskbar.8542376
  • 140. The left column of the Start menu is separated into two lists (New!):pinned items above the separator line and most frequently used itemsbelow. The pinned items remain on the Start menu, like a push pinholds paper on a bulletin board, until you unpin them. The right columnof the Start menu provides easy access to folders, Windows settings,help information, and search functionality. You can add shortcuts toprograms, files, or folders to the Start menu or customize the way theStart menu looks and functions.120Customizing theStart MenuChoose a Start Menu StyleRight-click the Start button, andthen click Properties.Click the Start menu or ClassicStart menu option.Click OK.Pin or Unpin a Programon the Start MenuClick the Start button, and thenlocate a program.To pin a program, right-click theprogram, and then click Pin toStart Menu.To unpin a program, right-click apinned program on the Start menu,and then click Unpin from StartMenu.321321Did You Know?You can rearrange Start menu items.Click the Start button, point to AllPrograms, locate the item you want tomove, and then drag the item to a newlocation. A thick, black line indicatesthe new location of the item.3212WINV-6.1
  • 141. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 121Customize the Start MenuRight-click the Start button, clickProperties, and then clickCustomize.Select check boxes and clickoptions to specify the items youwant (as a menu or link) or don’twant included on the Start menu.Click the up or down arrow tospecify the number of recentlyused programs on the Start menu.To show an Internet or E-mail linkon the Start menu, select theInternet link or E-mail link checkboxes, and then select theprogram you want to use.Click OK.Select or clear the privacy checkboxes to store and display a list ofrecently opened files or programs.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can add a shortcut to an item tothe Start menu. Right-click the item,point to Send To, and then clickDesktop. Drag the shortcut from theDesktop onto the Start button, andthen drag it to a new location on theAll Programs submenu.You can run a program automaticallywhen Windows starts. Create a short-cut for the program, and then drag theshortcut into the Startup folder. Clickthe Start button, point to All Programs,click Access, right-click Startup, andthen click Open.7165342
  • 142. 122When you double-click an audio or video file, or click a Web link, adefault program associated with that file type automatically starts andopens the file. The Set Programs Access and Computer Defaults icon inthe Control Panel provides an easy way to change the default programused for specific file types. Types such as .bmp or .jpg, and commonactivities, such as Web browsing, sending e-mail, playing audio andvideo files, and using instant messaging. You can also specify whichprograms are available from the Start menu, the desktop, and otherlocations. To change default options , you need to have administratorprivileges for your computer. The options you set apply to all users onyour computer.Setting DefaultProgramsSet Your Default ProgramsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.TIMESAVER Click the Startbutton, point to All Programs, andthen click Default Programs.Double-click the Default Programsicon in Classic View.Click Set your default programs.Select a program.Click Set this program as default,or Choose defaults for thisprogram.If you select Choose defaults forthis program, select the extensionyou want this program to open bydefault, and then click Save.When you’re done, click Close.Click OK.Click the Close button.98765432193854
  • 143. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 123Set Program Access andComputer DefaultsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Default Programsicon in Classic View.Click Set program access andcomputer defaults, and then enteradministrator permissions, ifrequested.Click the option for the type ofprogram you want to set:Computer Manufacturer (ifavailable), Microsoft Windows,Non-Microsoft, or Custom.Click the option or select from alist the defaults you want to set.Click OK.Click the Close button.Change File Type ProgramAssociationClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Default Programsicon in Classic View.Click Associate a file type orprotocol with a program.Click the extension.Click Change program.Select the program you want touse; click Browse if necessary tolocate it.Click OK.When you’re done, click Close.Click the Close button.98765432176543216458453
  • 144. When you insert a CD or DVD into your computer, you can specify howyou want Windows Vista to respond. You can have Windows detectsthe type of content on the disc and automatically start, or prompt youeach time to choose an action. If you have CDs or DVDs with musicfiles, pictures, video files, or mixed content, you can change the actionWindows takes when it detects the content on the disc. You can haveWindows play or rip a CD or DVD using Windows Media Player, openthe first folder to view files using Windows Explorer, or take no action.Windows Vista allows you to set AutoPlay options for a wide-variety ofCDs and DVDs, including an audio or enhanced audio CD, DVD orenhanced DVD movie, Software and games, pictures, video and audiofiles, blank CD or DVD, mixed content, HD DVD or Blu-ray Disc movie,Video or Super Video CD.124Changing the Way aCD or DVD StartsSet AutoPlay OptionsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Auto Play icon inClassic View.To display the AutoPlay dialog boxeverytime you insert a CD or the Use AutoPlay for allmedia and devices check box.For each of the different mediatypes, click the list arrow, and thenselect the default action you want;options vary depending on thetype of CD or DVD.◆ To turn off AutoPlay for aspecific media type, click Takeno action.To reset defaults, click Reset alldefaults.Click Save.654321Did You Know?You can stop Windows from perform-ing an action on a CD or DVD. Holddown the Shift key while you insert theCD or DVD.364
  • 145. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 125If you have difficulty using a mouse or typing,have slightly impaired vision, or are deaf orhard of hearing, you can adjust the appear-ance and behavior of Windows Vista to makeyour computer easier for you to use.The Easeof Access Center helps you configureWindows for your vision, hearing, and mobil-ity needs.You can also answer a few ques-tions about your daily computer use that canhelp Windows recommend accessibility set-tings and programs for you.To open the Easeof Access Center, click the Start button on thetaskbar, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Ease of Access icon.To use the Easeof Access questionnaire, click Get recommen-dations to make your computer easier to use.The Ease of Access Center provides utilities toadjust the way your keyboard, display, andmouse function to suit various vision andmotor abilities. Some of the accessibility toolsavailable include Magnifier, On-ScreenKeyboard, Narrator, and High Contrast. Youcan also set accessibility options, such asStickyKeys, FilterKeys,ToggleKeys, Sound-Sentry, ShowSounds, and MouseKeys, thatautomatically turn off accessibility features,provide warning sounds, and determine whento apply the settings.The accessibility tools inWindows Vista are intended to provide a lowlevel of functionality for those with specialneeds. If these tools do not meet your dailyneeds, you might need to purchase a moreadvanced accessibility program.Using Ease of Access ToolsEase of Access Center ToolsOption DescriptionMagnifier Displays a separate window with a magnified portion of the screen; this is designed tomake the screen easier to read for users who have impaired vision.On-Screen Keyboard Displays an on-screen keyboard; this is designed to use the computer without themouse or keyboard.Narrator Use the computer without a display; this is a text-to-speech utility program designed forusers who are blind or have impaired vision.High Contrast Sets the desktop appearance to high contrast to make the computer easier to see; thisis designed to make the screen easier to read for users who have impaired vision.StickyKeys Enables simultaneous keystrokes while pressing one key at a time, such as Ctrl+Alt+Del.FilterKeys Adjusts the response of your keyboard; ignores repeated characters or fastkey presses.ToggleKeys Emits sounds when you press certain locking keys, such as Caps Lock, Num Lock,or Scroll Lock.SoundSentry Provides visual warnings for system sounds.ShowSounds Instructs programs to provide captions.MouseKeys Enables the numeric keypad to perform mouse functions.
  • 146. The Ease of Access Center (New!) allows you to check the status ofand start or stop the Magnifier, Narrator, and On-Screen Keyboardaccessibility programs. Magnifier is a utility that enlarges an area ofthe screen. Narrator is a text-to-speech utility that gives users who areblind or have impaired vision access to the computer. On-ScreenKeyboard is a utility that displays a keyboard on the screen whereusers with mobility impairments can type using a mouse, joystick, orother pointing device. If you have administrator access to your com-puter, you can specify how the accessibility programs start when youlog on, lock the desktop, or start the Ease of Access Center.126Using the Ease ofAccess CenterUse the Ease of Access CenterPress A+U to start the Ease ofAccess Enter.TIMESAVER The Windows keyA is located in the lower-leftcorner of the keyboard.◆ You can also start the Ease ofAccess Center in the ControlPanel. Double-click the Ease ofAccess icon.To get recommendations on whatto use, click Get recommendationsto make your computer easier touse, and then follow theinstructions.To provide quick access tocommon tools, select the Alwaysread this section aloud andAlways scan this section checkboxes.Click the utility program or thesettings you want to manage.Select or clear the check boxesyou want to specify how you wantthe selected program to start or asetting to be applied.Click Save or exit the window.When you’re done with the Ease ofAccess Center, click the Closebutton.76543217243
  • 147. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 127Use the MagnifierClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, clickEase of Access, and then clickMagnifier.Click the Scale factor list arrow,and then click a level.Select or clear the check boxeswith the presentation options toinvert colors, start minimized, orshow Magnifier.Select or clear the check boxeswith the tracking options to followthe mouse cursor, keyboard focus,or text editing.Click Hide to use the Magnifierprogram, or click the Close buttonto close the program. (Restore theMagnifier window, if necessary.)Use the On-Screen KeyboardOpen the program in which youwant to type.Click the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, clickEase of Access, and then click On-Screen Keyboard.Position the cursor, if necessary.Type the text you want, or typekeyboard commands.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.5432154321523425413
  • 148. Windows Vista comes with an accessibility tool called Narrator thatreads aloud what appears on your screen, such as window items,menu options, and typed characters. Windows uses Text-to-Speech(TTS) technology to recognize text and play it back as spoken wordsusing a synthesized voice, which is chosen from several pre-generatedvoices. Narrator is designed for those who are blind or have impairedvision and works with the Windows desktop and setup, Control Panel,Notepad, WordPad, and Internet Explorer. Narrator supports only theEnglish language and might not read words aloud correctly in otherprograms. You can adjust the speed, volume, or pitch of the voice inNarrator and change other Text-to-Speech options using Speech prop-erties in the Control Panel.128Listening to theComputerChange Text-To-Speech OptionsClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theText to Speech icon in Classicview.Click the Voice selection listarrow, and then select asynthesized voice.Drag the Voice speed slider toadjust the speed of the voice.Click Preview Voice.To set a preferred audio device asoutput for TTS playback, clickAdvanced, make a selection, andthen click OK.To adjust settings for your audiooutput devices, click Audio Output,specify the options you want onthe Playback, Recording, orSounds tabs, and then click OK.Click OK.7654321See AlsoSee “Recognizing Your Speech” onpage 130 for information on speechcapabilities.2437 56
  • 149. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 129Common Narrator ShortcutsAction ResultCtrl+Shift+Enter Get information about the current itemor Alt+HomeCtrl+Shift+Spacebar Read the entire selected windowCtrl+Alt+Spacebar Read the selected window layoutAlt+End Get a summary of the current itemCtrl Stop Narrator from reading textInsert+F2 Select all of the text with the current text patternInsert+F3 Read the current characterInsert+F4 Read the current wordInsert+F5 Read the current lineInsert+F6 Read the current paragraphInsert+F7 Read the current pageInsert+F8 Read the current documentUse the NarratorClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, clickEase of Access, and then clickNarrator.Select the Narrator check boxoptions you want:◆ To hear what you type, selectthe Echo User’s Keystrokescheck box.◆ To hear background events,select the Announce SystemMessages check box.◆ To hear an announcementwhen the screen scrolls, selectthe Announce ScrollNotifications check box.◆ Select the Start NarratorMinimized check box tominimize the Narrator dialogbox.Click Voice Settings.Select a voice and adjust the voicespeed, volume, and pitch.Click OK.Click the Minimize button to usethe Narrator program or click Exitto close the program. (Restore theNarrator window, if necessary.)Click Yes, if necessary.6543213 Click toexit Narrator26
  • 150. If you have a speech-enabled program, you can initialize and customizespeech recognition options using Speech properties in the ControlPanel. Speech recognition (New!) is the ability to convert a spokenvoice into electronic text. Windows Vista adapts to your speech, andspeech recognition increases over time. You can use the speechrecognition properties to select a language, create a profile to accom-modate your speaking style and environment, and train your computerin as little as ten minutes to recognize and adapt to the sound of yourvoice, word pronunciation, accent, speaking manner, and new or dis-tinctive words. Some programs use speech differently, so you need tocheck the speech-enabled program for details. Speech Recognition isnot available in all languages.130Recognizing YourSpeechSet Up Speech RecognitionClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theSpeech Recognition Options iconin Classic view.Click Set up microphone, and thenfollow the wizard instructions toadjust the microphone.Click Take Speech Tutorial, andthen follow the instructions to takethe 30 minute training tutorial toteach you the commands usedwith speech recognition.Click Train your computer torecognize your speech, and thenfollow the wizard instructions totrain your voice.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.54321Did You Know?You can view and print a SpeechRecognition reference card. Click theStart button, click Control Panel, dou-ble-click the Speech RecognitionOptions icon in Classic view, and thenclick Open and Speech ReferenceCard.5234
  • 151. Chapter 4 Customizing Windows Using the Control Panel 131Set Speech Recognition OptionsClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theSpeech Recognition Options iconin Classic view.In the left pane, click Advancedspeech options.Click the Speech Recognition tab.Click the list arrow, and thenselect a language.To start the Profile Wizard, clickNew, type your name, click OK,follow the wizard instructions tocreate a profile, adjust themicrophone, and train your voice,and then click Finish.Select or clear the User Settingscheck boxes you do or don’t want.Click OK.Start Speech RecognitionClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theSpeech Recognition Options iconin Classic view.Click Start Speech Recognition.If requested, follow the wizardinstructions to create a profile,adjust the microphone, and trainyour voice, and then click Finish.Click the Speech Recognitionbutton to toggle between Sleepingand Listening mode.TIMESAVER Right-click theSpeech Recognition button toselect command options.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.5432176543217564314 52
  • 152. This page intentionally left blank
  • 153. Exploring the InternetIntroductionThe Internet is a global collection of more than a billioncomputers (and growing) linked together to shareinformation.The Internet’s physical structure includes tele-phone lines, cables, satellites, and other telecommunicationsmedia. Using the Internet, computer users can share manytypes of information, including text, graphics, sounds, videos,and computer programs.The World Wide Web (also knownas the Web) is a part of the Internet that consists of Web siteslocated on different computers around the world.History of the Internet and the World Wide WebThe Internet has its roots in the Advanced Research ProjectsAgency Network (ARPANET), which the United StatesDepartment of Defense started in 1969. In 1986, the NationalScience Foundation formed NSFNET, which replacedARPANET. NSFNET expanded the foundation of the U.S.portion of the Internet with high-speed, long-distance datalines. In 1991, the U.S. Congress expanded the capacity andspeed of the Internet further and opened it to commercialuse.The Internet is now accessible in almost every country inthe world.The Web was developed in Switzerland in 1991 tomake finding documents on the Internet easier. Software pro-grams designed to access the Web, known as Web browsers,use point-and-click interfaces.The first such Web browser,Mosaic, was introduced at the University of Illinois in 1993.Since the release of Mosaic, Microsoft Internet Explorer andFire Fox have become two popular Web browsers.55What You’ll DoUnderstand Web Sites and BrowsersConnect to the InternetCreate an Internet ConnectionSet Up Windows FirewallStart Internet ExplorerView the Internet Explorer WindowBrowse the WebChange a Home PageModify the Links BarAdd a Web Page to the Favorites ListView and Maintain a History ListRead and Subscribe to FeedsSearch the WebPreview and Print a Web PageSave Pictures or Text from a Web PageDownload Files from the Web or FTPSave a Web PageUse Another Web Browser133
  • 154. 134A Web site contains Web pages linkedtogether to make searching for information onthe Internet easier. Web pages are documentsthat contain highlighted words, phrases, andgraphics, called hyperlinks (or simply links)that open other Web pages when you clickthem. Some Web pages contain frames. Aframe is a separate window within a Webpage that lets you see more than one Webpage at a time. Web browsers are softwareprograms that you use to “browse the Web,”or access and display Web pages. Browsersmake the Web easy to navigate by providinga graphical, point-and-click environment.Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 is a popularbrowser from Microsoft that is built-in toWindows Vista. With a Web browser, you candisplay Web pages from all over the world,display Web content on the desktop, viewWeb feeds (New!), use links to move from oneWeb page to another, play audio and videoclips, search the Web for information, makefavorite Web pages available offline (whenyou’re not connected to the Internet), andprint text and graphics on Web pages.Understanding Web Sites and BrowsersWeb pageWeb browserLinkWeb site
  • 155. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 135Universities and large companies are mostlikely connected to the Internet via high-speedwiring that transmits data very quickly. As theInternet continues to explode around theworld, several high-speed connection optionsare becoming more available and affordablefor business and home use: DSL (DigitalSubscriber Lines), wires that provide a com-pletely digital connection; and cable modems,which use cable television lines. DSL andcable modems, also known as broadbandconnections, are continually turned on andconnected and use a network setup. If abroadband connection is not available, youneed to establish a connection over a phoneline using a dial-up modem. Data travelsmore slowly over phone lines than over digi-tal lines and cable modems. Whether you usea phone line, a DSL line, or a cable modem,Windows can help you establish a connectionbetween your computer and the Internetusing the Connect to the Internet wizard. First,you need to select an ISP (Internet ServiceProvider), which is a company that sets up anInternet account for you and provides Internetaccess. ISPs maintain servers connecteddirectly to the Internet 24 hours a day.You paya fee, sometimes by the hour, but more oftena flat monthly rate.To connect to the Internet,you need to obtain an Internet account andconnection information from your ISP or yoursystem administrator. For details, see“Creating an Internet Connection” on page136. If you are working on a network, you canalso share one Internet connection witheveryone. For information on creating anInternet Connection Sharing (ICS), see“Sharing an Internet Connection” on page378.Protecting your Computer with a FirewallWhen you connect to the Internet, you canaccess Web sites on the Internet, but otherusers on the Internet can also access informa-tion on your computer and potentially infect itwith harmful viruses and worms. For moreinformation, see “Avoiding Viruses and OtherHarmful Attacks” on page 330.You can prevent this by activatingWindows Firewall, another security layer ofprotection. A firewall is a security system thatcreates a protective barrier between yourcomputer or network and others on theInternet. Windows Firewall monitors all com-munication between your computer and theInternet and prevents unsolicited inboundtraffic from the Internet from entering yourcomputer. Windows Firewall blocks all unso-licited communication from reaching yourcomputer unless you specifically allow it(unblock) to come through, known as anexception. For example, if you run a program,such as Windows Messenger that needs toreceive information from the Internet or a net-work, Windows Firewall asks if you want toblock or unblock the connection. If you chooseto unblock it, Windows Firewall creates anexception so the program can receive infor-mation. For details, see “Setting Up WindowsFirewall” on page 137.If you send and receive e-mail, WindowsFirewall doesn’t block spam or unsolicitede-mail or stop you from opening e-mail withharmful attachments.To protect your com-puter from these attacks, see “ProtectingAgainst E-mail Attacks” on page 345.Windows Firewall helps block viruses andworms from reaching your computer, but itdoesn’t detect or disable them if they arealready on your computer or come throughe-mail.To protect your computer, you need toinstall antivirus software.Connecting to the Internet
  • 156. Sometimes connecting your computer to the Internet can be the mostdifficult part of getting started. The Connect to the Internet wizard sim-plifies the process, whether you want to set up a new connection usingan existing account or select an Internet service provider (ISP) to setup a new account. In either case, you will need to obtain connectioninformation from your ISP or your system administrator.136Creating an InternetConnectionCreate an Internet ConnectionClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Welcome Center,and then double-click Connect tothe Internet.Click Set up a new a connection,or Set up a new connectionanyway to set up a secondconnection.Click the option with the way youwant to connect: Wireless,Broadband (PPPoE), or Dial-up.◆ For a wireless connection,select a network, and then goto Step 8.Type the name and password yourISP gave you. For a dial-upconnection, type a dial-up phonenumber.For the password, select or clearthe Show characters orRemember this password checkboxes.Type a connection name.Select or clear the Allow otherpeople to use this connectioncheck box.Click Connect.87654321See AlsoSee “Connecting to a WirelessNetwork” on page 364 for informationon wireless Internet connection.386574
  • 157. If your computer is directly connected to the Internet, you needWindows Firewall to protect your computer from unauthorized accessfrom others on the Internet. Windows Firewall is enabled by default forall Internet and network connections. However, some computer manu-facturers and network administrators might turn it off, so you need tocheck it. When Windows Firewall is enabled, you might not be able touse some communication features, such as sending files with a mes-saging program or playing an Internet game, unless the program islisted on the Exceptions tab in Windows Firewall. If you use multipleInternet and networking connections, you can use the Advanced tab toenable or disable individual connections.Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 137Setting Up WindowsFirewallSet Up Windows FirewallClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, double-click the WindowsFirewall icon in Classic view.In the left pane, click TurnWindows Firewall on or off, andthen click the General tab.IMPORTANT If you’re part of anetwork, options are grayed out.Click the On (recommended)option.To set maximum protection, selectthe Block all incomingconnections check box or clear itto make exceptions.To make program exceptions, clickthe Exceptions tab.Select the check boxes with theexceptions you want; if necessary,click Add program to add it.Click OK, and then click the Closebutton.7654321Did You Know?You can restore Windows Firewalldefault settings. In Windows Firewall,click the Advanced tab, click RestoreDefaults, and then click OK.WindowsFirewallSettings27534WINV-1.1.1,WINV-1.1.2
  • 158. Internet Explorer is a Web browser that you use to search the Web. Youcan start Internet Explorer using the Start menu, the Internet Explorericon on the desktop, or the button on the Quick Launch toolbar on thetaskbar. After you start Internet Explorer, you might need to connect tothe Internet by selecting a dial-up or broadband service and entering auser name and password. If you have problems running InternetExplorer—sudden shutdowns—due to add-on programs, you can startInternet Explorer with no add-ons (New!), and then turn off individualadd-ons to determine the problem. The elements of the InternetExplorer window allow you to view, print, and search for information onthe Internet. Once you establish a connection to the Internet, you areready to explore Web pages on the Internet.138Starting InternetExplorerStart Internet ExplorerClick the Start button, and thenclick Internet.◆ To start Internet Explorerwithout Add-ons, click the Startbutton, point to All Programs,click System Tools, and thenclick Internet Explorer (NonAdd-ons).If necessary, click Connect to dialyour ISP. You might need to typeyour user name and passwordbefore Internet Explorer willconnect to the Internet.The Internet Explorer windowopens.21Did You Know?You can find Internet Explorer on theAll Programs submenu. If InternetExplorer doesn’t appear on the left col-umn of the Start menu, it’s available onthe All Programs submenu.See AlsoSee “Customizing the Start Menu” onpage 120 for information on showingInternet Explorer on the Start menu.For Your InformationBrowsing with Protected ModeInternet Explorer 7 includes protected mode (New!), which makes itdifficult for hackers using a Web site to install malicious software onyour computer, yet makes it easy for you to installed wanted soft-ware using the Standard user account (with security enabled)instead of the Administrator user account (with security disabled).Protected mode is turned on by default. When a Web page tries toinstall unwanted software, a warning message appears on the Statusbar. If you need to disable or enable it, click the Tools button, clickInternet Options, click the Security tab, clear or select the EnableProtected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer) check box,and then click OK.1
  • 159. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 139Viewing the Internet Explorer WindowQuick TabsDisplays multiple Websites in a single browserwindowAddress barDisplays the address of the currentWeb page or document you areviewing or trying to accessTitle barDisplays the name of the Webpage you are viewingInstant SearchQuickly searchthe Web usingdifferent searchproviders to getthe best resultsStatus barIndicates the progress of loading aWeb page, as well as other messagesabout selected actionsBrowser paneDisplays the current Webpage, document, or foldercontentsExplorer barDisplays links to web pages from Searchresults, Favorites list, and History list. TheExplorer bar is only visible when you click thecorresponding button on the toolbar.
  • 160. A Web address (also known as a URL, which stands for UniformResource Locator) is a unique place on the Internet where you canlocate a Web page. With Internet Explorer, you can browse sites on theWeb with ease by entering a Web address or by clicking a link. Eachmethod is better at different times. For example, you might type anaddress in the Address bar to start your session. Then you might click alink on that Web page to access a new site. As you open Web sites,Internet Explorer creates separate tabs for each one, so you can viewmultiple Web sites in a single window. When you type an Internetaddress in the Address bar, Internet Explorer tries to find a recently vis-ited page that matches what you’ve typed so far. If Internet Explorerfinds a match, it fills in the rest of the address. You can also useAutoComplete to fill out forms on the Web, including single-line edits,and user names and passwords.140Browsing the WebView a Web PageUse any of the following methods todisplay a Web page:◆ In the Address bar, type the Webaddress, and then press Enter.If you have recently entered theWeb page address, AutoCompleteremembers it and tries to completethe address for you. Thesuggested match is highlighted.Click the correct address orcontinue to type until the addressyou want appears in the Addresslist.◆ Click any link on the Web page,such as a picture or colored,underlined text. The mouse pointerchanges to a hand when it is overa link.Did You Know?You can have AutoComplete quicklycomplete a Web address. In theAddress bar, type the name of the Website, such as perspection, and thenpress Ctrl+Enter. AutoComplete addsthe “www.” and “.com”.Type a Web addressClick a link
  • 161. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 141Turn Off AutoComplete OptionsClick the Tools button, and thenclick Internet Options.Click the Content tab.Click Settings.Clear the AutoComplete optionsyou want to turn off.◆ Web address.◆ Forms.◆ User names and password onforms.Click OK.Click OK.654321Did You Know?You can browse folders and run pro-grams from the Address bar. Clickanywhere in the Address bar, type thelocation of the folder or program, pressEnter, and then click Allow. For exam-ple, typing C:Windows opens theWindows folder.You can display the menu bar andtoolbar using the Tools button. If youwant to display the menu bar and anytoolbars that you liked to use from ear-lier releases of Internet Explorer, clickthe Tools button, and then click MenuBar or point to Toolbars and click atoolbar.You can work offline. If connectiontime is an issue, you can downloadand display a Web page and then workoffline to read it. Click the Tools button,and then click Work Offline. When youchoose to work offline, InternetExplorer starts in offline mode until youclick the Tools button, and then clickWork Offline again to clear the checkmark.For Your InformationUnderstanding a Web AddressThe address for a Web page is called a URL. Each Web page has aunique URL that is typically composed of four parts: the protocol (aset of rules that allow computers to exchange information), the loca-tion of the Web site, the name that maintains the Web site, and a suf-fix that identifies the type of site. A URL begins with a protocol, fol-lowed by a colon, two slashes, the location of the Web site, a dot,the name of the Web site, a dot, and a suffix. The Web site is thecomputer where the Web pages are located. At the end of the Website name, another slash may appear, followed by one or more foldernames and a file name. For example, in the web site address, downloads/main.htm, the protocol ishttp (HyperText Transfer Protocol), the location of the Web site iswww (World Wide Web), the name of the Web site is perspection,and the suffix is com (a commercial organization); a folder at that siteis called /downloads; and within the folder is a file called main.htm.54
  • 162. 142As you open Web sites, Internet Explorer creates separate tabs (New!)for each one, so you can view multiple Web sites in a single window,which reduces the number of items on the taskbar. You can open Webpages on new tabs and quickly switch between them. If you prefer avisual way to switch between tabs, you can use Quick tabs (New!),which displays thumbnails, to open and close Web pages. The listarrow to the right of the Quick Tabs button displays a list of all openWeb pages, and you can use it to open a Web page as an alternatemethod. After you have opened a set of tabs, you can save them as agroup, so you can quickly view them again later.Browsing with TabsUse Tabbed BrowsingUse any of the following methods to usetabbed browsing:◆ Open a new tab. Press Ctrl+click alink (in the background) orCtrl+Shift+click a link (in theforeground). If you have a mousewith a wheel or middle button, youcan click a link with the wheel ormiddle button to open a link.TIMESAVER Press Alt+Enterto open a new tab in theforeground from the Address bar.◆ Open a blank tab. Click the NewTab button, or press Ctrl+T.◆ Open or close Quick Tabs. Clickthe Quick Tabs button, or pressCtrl+Q. To open the Web page,click a thumbnail. To close a Webpage, click the Close button in thecorner of the thumbnail.◆ Switch between tabs. Click a tab,or press Ctrl+Tab.◆ Close a tab. Click the Close buttonon the tab, or press Ctrl+W.◆ Close Internet Explorer and savetabs. Close Internet Explorer, clickShow Options, select the Openthese the next time I use InternetExplorer check box, and then clickClose Tabs.Quick Tabs viewQuick Tabs Close Tab New Tab
  • 163. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 143Save a Group of TabsClick the Add to Favorites button,and then click Add Tab Group toFavorites.Type a name for the group.Click Add.Open a Group of TabsClick the Favorites Center button.Click the Favorites button.Click the folder that you want toopen.Click the arrow to the right of thefolder name.4321321Did You Know?You can turn off tabs. In InternetExplorer, click the Tools button, clickInternet Options, click the General tab,click Settings in the Tabs section, clearthe Enable Tabbed Browsing checkbox, and then click OK.You can display pop-ups in a windowor tab. In Internet Explorer, click theTools button, click Internet Options,click the General tab, click Settings inthe Tabs section, specify the optionyou want in the When a pop-up isencountered section, and thenclick OK.3231 2 4
  • 164. 144As you browse the Web or your local hard disk, you may want toretrace your steps and return to a Web page, document, or hard diskyou’ve recently visited. You can move backward or forward onelocation at a time, or you can jump directly to any location from theBack list or Forward list, both of which show locations you’ve previ-ously visited in this session. After you start to load a Web page, youcan stop if the page opens too slowly or if you decide not to access it.If a Web page loads incorrectly or you want to update the information itcontains, you can reload, or refresh, the page. If you get lost on theWeb, you can start over with a single click of the Home button. You canalso resize your toolbars so you can see more of the Web address orLinks bar.Navigating BasicsMove Back or Forward◆ To move back or forward one Webpage or document at a time, clickthe Back button or the Forwardbutton on the Address bar.TIMESAVER To move back,press Alt+left arrow. To moveforward, press Alt+right arrow.◆ To move back or forward to aspecific Web page or document,click the list arrow next to theBack and Forward buttons on theAddress bar, and then select theWeb page or document you wantto visit.Stop, Refresh, or Go Home◆ Click the Stop button on theAddress bar.TIMESAVER Press Esc.◆ Click the Refresh button on theAddress bar.TIMESAVER Press F5.◆ Click the Home button on thetoolbar.Forward buttonBack buttonBack/Forward list arrowStop buttonRefresh buttonHome button
  • 165. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 145Working with the Zoom tools (New!) gives you one more way to con-trol exactly what you see in a Web page. Unlike changing text size inprevious versions of Internet Explorer, the Zoom tools allow you toenlarge or reduce everything on the page, including text and images.You can adjust the zoom from 10% to 1000%. The Zoom tools arelocated in the bottom-right corner of the window or available on theZoom submenu on the Page button. If you have a mouse with a wheel,hold down the Ctrl key, and then scroll the wheel to zoom in or out.Zooming the View Inand OutChange the ViewUse any of the following zoomoptions available on the Statusbar (New!):◆ Zoom In or Out. Click theChange Zoom Level buttonarrow on the Status bar, andthen click a zoom percentage.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+(+) tozoom in by increments of 10%, orpress Ctrl+(-) to zoom out byincrements of 10%. Press Ctrl+0 torestore the zoom to 100%.◆ Zoom Level. Click the ChangeZoom Level button on theStatus bar to cycle through100%, 125%, and 150%.◆ Zoom Custom. Click the ChangeZoom Level button arrow on theStatus bar, click Custom, type azoom value, and then click OK.To change the view to full screen,click the Tools button, and thenclick Full Screen. To change back,press F11.21Did You Know?You can change Web page text size tomake it easier to read. Click the Pagebutton, click Text Size, and then clickthe size you want. When you changethe text size, graphics and controlsremain unchanged, so you can focuson the text.21
  • 166. 146Your home page in Internet Explorer is the page that opens when youstart the program. When you first install Internet Explorer, the defaulthome page is the Microsoft Network (MSN) Web site. If you want adifferent page to appear when you start Internet Explorer and when-ever you click the Home button, you can change your home page. Withthe introduction of tabbed browsing, you can display multiple homepages in tab sets (New!). You can choose one of the millions of Webpages available through the Internet, or you can select a particular fileon your hard drive.Changing YourHome PageChange the Home PageOpen the Web page or multipleWeb pages you want to be thenew home page.Click the Home button arrow, andthen click Add or Change HomePage.Click one of the following options:◆ Use this webpage as your onlyhomepage.◆ Add this webpage to yourhomepage tabs.◆ Use the current tab set as yourhome page.Click Yes. Otherwise, click No.To remove a Web page as one ofyour home pages, click the Homebutton arrow, point to Remove, andthen click the Web page you wantto remove, or Remove All, andthen click Yes to confirm.5432121543
  • 167. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 147The Links bar, located below the Address bar when displayed,provides one-click access to Web pages and favorites. You can add orremove buttons on the Links bar to customize it to meet your needs.The Links bar is also available on the Taskbar (New!) when you are notusing Internet Explorer.Modifying theLinks BarDisplay and Hide the Links BarClick the Tools button, and thenpoint to Toolbars.Click Links.Add a Link Button tothe Links BarOpen the Web page or display thefolder you want to add to the Linksbar.Drag the Web page in the Addressbar to the Links bar.Release the mouse button toposition the new item.32121Did You Know?You can quickly remove a link buttonfrom the Links bar. Right-click thebutton you want to delete, click Delete,and then click Yes to confirm.Did You Know?You can add a favorite to the Links bar.Click the Favorites Center button, andthen drag a favorite shortcut to a newlocation in the Links folder.122 3 1
  • 168. 148Rather than memorizing URLs or keeping a handwritten list of Webpages you want to visit, you can use the Favorites Center (New!) tostore and organize the addresses. When you display a Web page thatyou want to display again at a later time, you can add the Web page toyour the Favorites Center; you can also manage feeds and history.Once you add the Web page to the Favorites Center, you can quicklyreturn to the page. To open all the favorites in a folder at the same time,click the blue arrow to the right of the folder (New!). If your list offavorites grows long, you can delete favorites you don’t visit anymoreor move favorites into folders.Adding a Web Pageto the Favorites ListCreate a Favorites ListOpen the Web site you want toadd to your Favorites list.Click the Add to Favorites button,and then click Add to Favorites.Type the name for the site, or usethe default name supplied.Click Create In arrow, and thenselect a location on the Favoritesmenu to place the site.If you want to create a new folder,click New Folder, type a foldername, and then click OK.Click Add.Use the Favorites Center button toquickly return to a favoritelocation.654321Did You Know?You can pin the Favorites Center.When you open the Favorites Center,the pane is not locked into place. Youcan click off the pane to close it. Tolock the pane, click the Pin theFavorites Center button (green arrow)to the right of the History button.You can import favorites from anotherbrowser. Click the Add to Favoritesbutton, click Import and Export, andthen follow the steps in theImport/Export wizard.356 4
  • 169. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 149Access FavoritesClick the Favorites Center button.The Favorites Center paneappears, displaying your currentfavorites list, like a menu. Thepane is not pinned to the window.To pin the pane to the window,click the Pin the Favorites Centerbutton (green arrow).When the pane is pinned, theClose button appears on the pane.Click a folder, if necessary.To open all the favorites in a folderat the same time, click the bluearrow to the right of the folder.Click the page you want.Click off the pane or click theClose button.Organize FavoritesClick the Add to Favorites button,and then click Organize Favorites.Select one or more favorites fromthe list you want to work with.Do any of the following:◆ New Folder. Click New Folder,type the new folder name, andthen press Enter.◆ Move. Click Move, select afolder, and then click OK.◆ Rename. Click Rename, type anew name, and then pressEnter.◆ Delete. Click Delete, and thenclick Yes.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.432165432151 4 2 6423
  • 170. Sometimes you run across a great Web site and simply forget to add itto your Favorites list. With Internet Explorer there’s no need to try toremember all the sites you visit. The History feature keeps track ofwhere you’ve been by date, site, most visited, or order visited today. Toview the History list, click the History button in the Favorites Center,and then click a day or week in the pane to expand the list of Web sitesvisited. Because the History list can grow to occupy a large amount ofspace on your hard drive, it’s important to control the length of time youretain Web sites in the list. Internet Explorer deletes the History listperiodically, based on the settings you specify.150Viewing andMaintaining aHistory ListView and Change the HistoryListClick the Favorites Center buttonon the toolbar.Click the History button.To change the history view, clickthe History button arrow, and thenselect the view option you want.If view By Date, click a week orday to expand or compress the listof Web sites visited.If necessary, click the folder forthe Web site you want to view, andthen click a page within the Website.Click off the pane or click theClose button.65432151 32 6
  • 171. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 151Clear the History ListClick the Tools button, and thenclick Delete Browsing History.◆ You can also open this dialogby clicking Delete on theGeneral tab in the InternetOptions dialog box.Click Delete History, and then clickYes to confirm the operation.Click Close.Change the Number of DaysPages Are SavedClick the Tools button, and thenclick Internet Options.Click the General tab.In the Browsing history section,click Settings.Specify the total number of daysyou want to keep links listed inhistory.Click OK.Click OK.654321321Did You Know?You can search for a history entry.Click the Favorites Center button, clickthe History button arrow, click SearchHistory, type the history entry you wantto find, and then click Search Now.3254
  • 172. 152A feed (New!) delivers frequently updated Web content to yourbrowser on a continuous basis. A feed, also known as RSS (ReallySimple Syndication) feed, XML feed, syndicated content, or Web feed,is usually offered on a subscription basis and typically free of charge. Afeed can deliver text content in the form of news headlines or blogs, ordigital content in the form of pictures, audio, and video. When audiocontent is delivered usually in the MP3 format, it’s referred to as a pod-cast. When you visit a Web site, Internet Explorer checks for availablefeeds. If it discovers a feed, the Feeds button changes color and playsa sound. You can view an individual feed or subscribe to one to getcontent automatically. When you subscribe to a feed, Internet Explorerchecks the Web site and downloads new content so you always stayupdated with the latest site content. Internet Explorer manages acommon feeds list, which allows other programs, such as WindowsSidebar or e-mail, to use them.Reading andSubscribing to FeedsView and Subscribe to a FeedVisit a Web site with a feed.The Feeds button changes colorand plays a sound.TIMESAVER You can alsopress Alt+J to check for feeds.Click the Feeds button.If multiple feeds are available, alist of feeds appears.If available, click the feed youwant to see.A Web page opens, displaying alists of topics, articles, and otherelements you can read andsubscribe to.Click the Subscribe to this Feedbutton, and then click Subscribe tothis Feed, if necessary.Type a name for the feed, and thenselect a folder location for thefeed.Click Subscribe.65432164 152
  • 173. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 153View Subscribed FeedsClick the Favorites Center button.Click Feeds.If needed, click a folder to displayrelated feeds.Click the feed to visit the Web sitefor the feed.Click off the pane or click theClose button.54321Did You Know?What formats are feeds available in?The most common formats are RSSand Atom. All Web feed formats arebased on XML. XML (ExtensibleMarkup Language) is a platform-inde-pendent universal language thatenables you to create documents inwhich data is stored independently ofthe format so you can use the datamore seamlessly in other forms. XML isa markup language just like HTML. Youmark up a document to define thestructure, meaning, and visual appear-ance of the information in the docu-ment.You can change feed settings. Clickthe Tools button, click Internet Options,click the Content tab, click Settings inthe Feeds section, specify the optionsyou want, and then click OK twice.41 2 5
  • 174. You can find all kinds of information on the Web using the InstantSearch box (New!) from the Address bar. The best way to find informa-tion is to use a search engine. A search engine is a program youaccess through a Web site and use to search through a collection ofInternet information to find what you want. Many search engines areavailable on the Web, such as Windows Live Search, Lycos, Google,AOL, and Yahoo. When performing a search, the search engine com-pares keywords with words that if finds on various Internet Web sites.Keywords are words or phrases that best describe the information youwant to retrieve. If the search engine finds your keywords in the storeddatabase, it lists the matched sites on a Web page. These matchedsites are sometimes called hits. The company that manages the searchengine determines what information its database stores, so searchresults of different search engines vary.154Searching the WebSearch the WebClick in the Search box.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+E to goto the Search box without usingthe mouse.To use a specific search providerfor this session only, click theSearch box arrow, and then clickthe provider you want.Type the information you want tofind. Use specific words, eliminatecommon words, such as “a” or“the”, and use quotation marks forspecific phrases.Press Enter or press Alt+Enter todisplay the search results in a newtab.4321Did You Know?You can use the Address bar to searchfor information. In the Address bar,type go, find, or ? followed by a spaceand a word or phrase, and then pressEnter. To turn off or change Addressbar searches, click the Tools button,click Internet Options, click theAdvanced tab, select options underSearch from the Address bar, and thenclick OK.1 3 2Results
  • 175. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 155Change Search ProvidersClick the Search box arrow, andthen click Change SearchDefaults.◆ To add more search providers,click the Search box arrow,click Find More Providers, andthen follow the Web siteinstructions.Click the search provider you wantto set as the default.Click the button with the optionyou want to perform:◆ To set as the default provider,click Set Default.◆ To remove a provider, clickRemove.Click OK.4321Did You Know?You can add search providersdiscovered on Web pages. Some Webpages offer search providers (New!).If one does, click the Search boxarrow, click Add Search Providers toopen a list of providers discovered byInternet Explorer, and then follow theinstructions. A discovered searchprovider is marked with a gold star onthe Search box menu.You can start an Internet search fromthe Start menu. Click the Start button,click in the Search box, type searchcriteria, click Search the Internet, andthen perform the search (New!).You can find specific text on a Webpage. Click the Search box arrow,click Find (On This Page), type the textyou want to find, select find options,and then click Find Next.4321Availablesearch providers
  • 176. Web pages are designed for viewing on a computer screen, but youcan also print all or part of one. Before you print, you should verify thatthe page looks the way you want. You save time, money, and paper byavoiding duplicate or wasteful printing. Printing now scales Web pagesto fit the paper you’re using. Print Preview shows you exactly how theWeb page will look on the printed page, and gives you more controlover margins and scaling (New!). This is especially helpful when youhave multiple pages to print. When you are ready to print, InternetExplorer provides many options for printing Web pages. For Web pageswith frames, you can print the page just as you see it, or you can electto print a particular frame or all frames. You can even use special PageSetup options to include the date, time, or window title on the printedpage. You can also choose to print the Web addresses from the linkscontained on a Web page.156Previewing andPrinting a Web PagePreview a Web PageClick the Print button arrow, andthen click Print Preview.Use the Print Preview toolbarbuttons to preview or print theWeb page:◆ Print the document.◆ Portrait or Landscape. (New!)◆ Page Setup. Opens the PageSetup dialog box.◆ Turn headers and footers onand off. (New!)◆ View Full Width or View FullPage.◆ Show Multiple Pages.◆ Change the Print Size.Use options at the bottom of thePrint Preview to specify the pageto display or switch betweenpages.Drag a margin adjust handle tofine tune the page margins(New!).When you’re done, click the Closebutton.543214523
  • 177. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 157Print a Web PageClick the Print button arrow, andthen click Print.TIMESAVER To print thecurrent page with the current printsettings, click the Print button.Click a printer.Specify the range of pages youwant to print.Specify the number of copies youwant to print.Click the Options tab.If the page contains frames, selectthe print frames option you want.Select or clear the Print all linkeddocuments and Print table of linkscheck boxes.Click Print.87654321For Your InformationSetting Up the Page FormatWhen you print a Web page, you can use the Page Setup dialog boxto control the printing of text and graphics on a page. To open thePage Setup dialog box, click the Print button arrow, and then clickPage Setup. The Page Setup dialog box specifies the printer proper-ties for page size, orientation, and paper source; in most cases, youwon’t want to change them. From the Page Setup dialog box, youcan also change header and footer information. In the Headers andFooters text boxes, you can type text to appear as a header andfooter of a Web page you print. In these text boxes, you can also usevariables to substitute information about the current page, and youcan combine text and codes. For example, if you type Page &p of &Pin the Header text box, the current page number and the total num-ber of pages print at the top of each printed page. Check InternetExplorer Help for a complete list of header and footer codes.See AlsoSee Chapter 14 “Printing and Faxing”on page 397 for information oninstalling and using a printer.See “Previewing and Printing aDocument” on page 37 for more infor-mation on using the Preview windowand the Print dialog box.35428
  • 178. If you find information on a Web page that you want to save forfuture reference or share with others, you can copy and paste it toanother document or save it on your computer. When you copyinformation from a Web page, make sure you’re not violating anycopyright laws.158Saving Pictures orText from a Web PageSave a Picture from a Web PageOpen the Web page with thepicture you want to save.Point to the picture you want tosave to display a toolbar on thegraphic, and then click the Savebutton.If the toolbar doesn’t appear, right-click the picture, and then clickSave Picture As.Select the drive and folder inwhich you want to save the file.Type a name for the file, or use thesuggested name.To change the format of a file,click the Save as type arrow, andthen click a file format.Click Save.654321Did You Know?You can save a page or picturewithout opening it. Right-click the linkfor the item you want to save, and thenclick Save Target As.126354
  • 179. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 159Set a Picture from a Web Pageas the Background PictureOpen the Web page with thepicture you want to use.Right-click the picture, and thenclick Set As Wallpaper or Set AsBackground.Copy Text from a Web PageOpen the Web page with the textyou want to copy.Select the text you want to copy.TROUBLE? The I-beam cursormay or may not appear. You canstill select the text.Right-click the selected text, andthen click Copy, or press Ctrl+C.Switch to where you want to pastethe text.Click the Edit menu, and then clickPaste, or press Ctrl+V.5432121Did You Know?You can create a desktop shortcut tothe current Web page. Right-click inthe Web page, click Create Shortcut,and then click OK.12213
  • 180. There are thousands of sites on the Internet offering all sorts of filesyou can download to your computer, from trailers to the latest gamedemos. You can download files from any Web site by finding the file youwant, right-clicking the link, and telling Internet Explorer where youwant to save the file. Some Web sites are designed with specific linksto make it easier to download files. When you click a download link, aSecurity Warning dialog box opens, asking you to run or don’t run thefile from the Internet or save the file to your computer. Internet Explorerchecks to see whether there are any irregularities with the file or apotential for harm based on the file type, and provides strong warningand guidance to help you understand more about the file you aredownloading.160Downloading Filesfrom the WebDownload a File froma Web PageOpen the Web page from whichyou want to download a file.Click the download link, and thenclick Save, or right-click the linkpointing to the actual file, and thenclick Save Target As.Select the folder in which youwant to save the file.Type a name for the file, or use thesuggested name.Click Save.The File Download dialog boxdisplays the estimated time todownload the file, along with theestimated transfer time.When the download is complete,click Open or Run to open or runthe file, or click Close.654321Did You Know?You can access a site with lots of filesto download. Try these sites to findplenty of files to download: and Justbeware of viruses which can comefrom downloaded files off the Internet.2 1Click to openor save the filedownload
  • 181. Sometimes you’ll need to connect directly to a File Transfer Protocol(FTP) site to download or transfer a file to a remote computer. InternetExplorer allows you to easily access and download files from any FTPsite, public or private. Public FTP sites allow you to access files withoutrequiring that you have an account on the server. Private FTP sitesexpect you to enter your user name and password in order to see thefolders and files. When you are connected to an FTP site, InternetExplorer’s view of the files is the same as looking at a folder on yourlocal hard disk. Within this view you can drag onto your desktop orright-click to copy the file in a particular folder on your computer.Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 161Downloading Filesfrom an FTP SiteDownload a File froman FTP SiteIn the Address bar, type theaddress for the FTP site, and thenpress Enter.If necessary, type your user nameand password, and then clickLog On.IMPORTANT Before youdownload files, make sure yourantivirus software is up-to-date.Click the Page button, and thenclick Open FTP Site in WindowsExplorer.Right-click the file or folder youwant to download, click Copy ToFolder, select a location, and thenclick OK.TIMESAVER You can selectthe items you want to download,and then use the Copy and Pastecommands. Select the files, pressCtrl+C, display the destinationfolder, and then press Ctrl+V.43213142
  • 182. You can save a Web page you want to view offline even if you don’tneed to share it with others or update its content, such as a publishedarticle whose content will not change. There are several ways you cansave the Web page, from saving just the text to saving all of thegraphics and text needed to display that page as it appears on theWeb. When you save a complete Web page, Internet Explorer saves allthe graphic and text elements in a folder. If you need to send a Webpage to a friend or co-worker, you can save all the elements of the Webpage in a single file to make the process easier.162Saving a Web PageSave a Web PageOpen the Web page you want tosave.Click the Page button arrow, andthen click Save As.Select the drive and folder inwhich you want to save the file.Type a name for the file, or use thesuggested name.Click the Save as type arrow, andthen click one of the following:◆ Web Page, complete to savethe formatted text and layoutwith all the linked information,such as pictures, in a folder.◆ Web Archive, single file tosave all the elements of theWeb page in a single file.◆ Web Page, HTML only to savethe formatted text and layoutwithout the linked information.◆ Text File to save only the text.Click Save.654321See AlsoSee “Saving and Closing a Document”on page 38 for more information onusing the Save As dialog box.1263 45
  • 183. Chapter 5 Exploring the Internet 163If you come across a Web page that you want to share with a friend orco-worker, you can send the page or a link to the page directly fromInternet Explorer using your default E-mail program. When you use theSend Page by E-mail and Send Link by E-mail commands on the Pagebutton, Internet Explorer automatically opens your default E-mailprogram and creates a new message with the Web page or link.Sending a Page orLink by E-mailSend a Page or Link by E-mailOpen the Web page with thepicture you want to send.Click the Page button arrow, andthen click Send Page by E-mail orSend Link by E-mail.Internet Explorer opens your mailprogram, and creates a newmessage.Address and send the message.321For Your InformationSearching for Research MaterialWith the Research task pane (New!), you can access data sourcesand insert research material right into your text without leavingInternet Explorer. The Research task pane can help you accesselectronic dictionaries, thesauruses, research sites, and proprietarycompany information. You can select one reference source orsearch in all reference books. This research pane allows you to findinformation and quickly and easily incorporate it into your work. Toopen the Research task pane, click the Research button on thetoolbar. If the button is not visible, click the double-arrow to the rightfirst, and then the button should appear.12
  • 184. 164For Your InformationResetting Internet Explorer SettingsIf you installed another Web browser after installing InternetExplorer, some of your Internet Explorer settings may have changed.You can reset your Internet Explorer settings to their originaldefaults, including your home page and search pages, and choice ofdefault browser, without changing your other browser’s settings. Toreset Internet Explorer settings, click the Tools button, click InternetOptions, click the Advanced tab, click Reset, read the dialog boxcarefully, and then click Reset again.Windows Vista comes with Internet Explorer as the default Webbrowser. If you prefer to use another browser, you can remove InternetExplorer from your computer using the Programs and Features utility inthe Control Panel, install another browser, and set it as your defaultInternet program on the left column of the Start menu.Using Another WebBrowserUse Another Web BrowserIf you want, remove InternetExplorer using the Programs andFeatures utility in the ControlPanel.Install another browser accordingto the manufacturer instructions.Right-click the Start button, andthen click Properties.Click Customize.Click the Internet link arrow, andthen select your browser.Click OK, and then click OK again.654321Did You Know?You can turn off the alert asking tomake Internet Explorer the default. InInternet Options, click the Programstab, clear the Tell me if InternetExplorer is not the default webbrowser check box, and then click OK.You can use the same procedure touse another e-mail program. WindowsVista also comes with Windows Mailas the default e-mail program. You canuse the same basic procedure to useanother e-mail program.See AlsoSee “Adding or Removing WindowsComponents” on page 437 for informa-tion on adding or removing Windowscomponents.65
  • 185. Exchanging Messagesand InformationIntroductionIf you’re like many people today who are using the Internet tocommunicate with friends and business associates, you prob-ably have piles of information (names, e-mail addresses,phone numbers, etc.) that you need often. Unless this infor-mation is in one convenient place, and can be accessedimmediately, the information becomes ineffective and youbecome unproductive. Microsoft Windows Mail (thesuccessor to Outlook Express) solves these problems by inte-grating management and organization tools into one simplesystem. Windows Vista includes Microsoft Windows Mail, apowerful program for managing electronic mail (known ase-mail), and contact information like names, and e-mailaddresses.Using Windows Mail with an Internet connection allowsyou to accomplish several tasks:◆ Create and send e-mail messages◆ Manage multiple e-mail accounts◆ Use the Windows Contacts (New!) to store and retrievee-mail addresses◆ Create stationery or add a personal signature to youre-mail messages◆ Attach a file to an e-mail message◆ Set junk e-mail options and mark e-mail messages asblock or safe◆ Join any number of newsgroups, which are collectionsof e-mail messages on related topics◆ Use the Windows Calendar (New!) to make and manageappointments and tasks◆ Send invitations to meeting participants from withinWindows Meeting Space (New!)66What You’ll DoStart Windows Mail and Set Up anAccountView the Windows Mail WindowImport and Export InformationAdd a Contact to Windows ContactsCompose and Send E-mailCreate E-mail StationeryRead and Reply to E-mailSend and Retrieve a FileManage and Delete E-mailSet Junk E-mail OptionsDivert Incoming E-mail to FoldersSelect and Subscribe to a NewsgroupRead and Filter the NewsPost a News MessageView CalendarsSchedule AppointmentsCreate TasksCreate and Share CalendarsPublish Calendars Over the InternetStart and Hold a MeetingShare Information in a Meeting165
  • 186. Whether you want to exchange e-mail with colleagues and friends orjoin newsgroups to trade ideas and information, Windows Mailprovides you with the tools you need. When you install Windows Vista,a menu item for Windows Mail appears in the left column of the Startmenu and the All Programs submenu. The first time you start WindowsMail, you need to set up an e-mail account. The Connect to the Internetwizard walks you through the process. You can set Windows Mail asyour default e-mail program so that whenever you click an e-mail linkon a Web page or choose the mail command in your Web browser,Windows Mail opens. You can also set Windows Mail as your defaultnews reader so that when you click a newsgroup link on a Web pageor choose the news reader command in your Web browser, WindowsMail opens.166Starting WindowsMailStart Windows MailClick the Start button.Click Windows Mail.TROUBLE? If Windows Maildoesn’t appear in the left columnof the Start menu, it’s available onthe All Programs submenu.If the Connect to the Internetwizard opens, follow the step-by-step instructions to set up youre-mail account.21See AlsoSee “Setting Up an Account” on page168 for information on creating ane-mail account.12
  • 187. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 167Set Options to Start WindowsMail from Your Web BrowserClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Default Programsicon.Click Set your default programs.Click Windows Mail or WindowsMail (News).Click Set this program as default.Click OK.Click the Close button.7654321Did You Know?You can get Help in Windows Mail. Ifyou want to connect to the Internet toget mail or learn how to use WindowsMail features, you can get help fromseveral different sources. To getWindows Mail Help, you can use theHelp system that comes with the pro-gram, or you can view Windows MailWeb sites on the Internet. To openWindows Mail Help, click the Helpmenu, and then click View Help. Tobrowse through a list of questions andanswers on a discussion Web site,click the Help menu, and then clickQuestions & Answers fromCommunities. Your browser starts anddisplays the Windows Mail discussionWeb site.73654
  • 188. Before you can set up an e-mail account, you need your account name,password, e-mail server type, and the names of your incoming andoutgoing e-mail servers from your ISP or network administrator. TheConnect to the Internet wizard helps you connect to one or more e-mailservers. Windows Mail allows you to send and retrieve e-mailmessages from different types of e-mail servers, which are the loca-tions where your e-mail is stored before you access it. Windows Mailsupports three types of accounts: mail, newsgroups, and directoryservices. A newsgroup is an electronic forum where people with acommon interest can share ideas, ask and answer questions, and com-ment on and discuss any subject. Directory services are online addressbooks that are typically provided by large organizations. You can set upmultiple accounts in Windows Mail.168Setting Up anAccountSet Up an AccountClick the Tools menu, clickAccounts, and then click Add.◆ If Windows Mail starts for thefirst time, and the Connect tothe Internet wizard begins.If prompted, click E-mail Account,and then click Next to continue.◆ You can also set up an accountfor a newsgroup or DirectoryService; the wizard steps varydepending on the account type.The Connect to the Internet wizardbegins.Type your name, and then clickNext to continue.Enter your e-mail address, andthen click Next to continue.Click the Mail Server arrow, andthen select the incoming mailserver you want to use.Enter the name of the incomingmail server.Enter the name of the outgoingmail server, and then click Next tocontinue.765432134675
  • 189. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 169Enter your account name and apassword, and then click Nextcontinue.Click Finish.If Windows Mail detect previouslyinstalled e-mail software, select anthe option you want, and followthe import instructions.1098Frequently Asked QuestionsHow Do I Choose an E-mail Server?Windows Mail supports two types of incoming e-mail servers: POP3(Post Office Protocol), and IMAP (Internet Message AccessProtocol). Windows Mail doesn’t support HTTP (Hypertext TransferProtocol). A protocol is a set of rules and standards that control thetransmission of content, format, sequencing, and error managementfor information over the Internet or network much like rules of theroad govern the way you drive. POP3 servers allow you to accesse-mail messages from a single Inbox folder, while IMAP serversallow you to access multiple folders. HTTP servers are used on Websites, such as Windows Live Mail (formerly Hotmail), and allow youto send and receive e-mail messages on a Web site. If you needHTTP support, you can use Windows Live Mail (which you candownload from the Microsoft Web site) instead of Windows Mailwith Windows Vista. When you use POP3 or IMAP e-mail servers,you also need to provide an outgoing e-mail server. SMTP (SimpleMail Transfer Protocol) is generally used to send messages betweene-mail servers.Did You Know?You can remove a Windows Mailaccount. Click the Tools menu, clickAccounts, click the account you wantto remove, and then click Remove.You can import or export Internetaccount settings. Click the Tools menu,and then click Accounts. To importaccount settings, click Import, selectthe Internet Account Files (.iaf), andthen click Open. To export account set-tings, select the account you want toexport, type a name, specify a location,and then click Save.You can change account settings.Click the Tools menu, click Accounts,select the account you want tochange, click Properties, use the tabsto display options, change the onesyou want, click OK, and then clickClose.You can choose an account as thedefault. Click the Tools menu, clickAccounts, select the account you wantto set, click Set as Default, and thenclick Close.810
  • 190. 170Viewing the Windows Mail WindowMessage listThe Messagelist displayse-mailmessages.Preview paneThe Preview pane displays thecontents of the current messageselected in the Message list.Menu barThe Menu bar gives you access toall Windows Mail commands.Status barThe Status bar displays informationabout your Internet connection witha mail or newsgroup server.Folders listThe Folders listcontains all thefolders inwhichWindows Mailstores e-mailmessages.ToolbarThe Toolbar contains buttons for themost commonly used commands youneed to work with mail messages.Frequently Asked QuestionsHow Do You Customize The Layout?You can use the Layout command on the View menu to customize theWindows Mail window to suit your needs. You can show or hidedifferent parts of the window, customize the Preview pane display, andcustomize the toolbar.
  • 191. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 171Windows Mail can import contacts, mail messages, and account set-tings from many of the most popular e-mail programs. You can alsoexport your messages or Windows Contacts information from WindowsMail to work with other programs.Importing andExporting InformationImport an Windows ContactsClick the File menu, point toImport, and then click WindowsContacts.Click an import file type. CSV is acommon text file type.Click Import.Follow the additional instructions,and then click OK.Click Close.Export Your Windows ContactsClick the File menu, point toExport, and then click WindowsContacts.Click an export file type. CSV is acommon text file type.Click Export.Type a file name, and then clickNext to continue.Select the fields for exporting.Click Finish.Click OK, and then click Close.765432154321Did You Know?You can import mail messages fromanother e-mail program. Click the Filemenu, point to Import, and then clickMessages. Select the e-mail program,and then follow the wizard instructionsto import the e-mail messages.3232
  • 192. A contact is a person or company that you communicate with. Onecontact can often have several mailing addresses, phone numbers, ore-mail addresses. You can store this information in Windows Contacts(New!) along with other detailed information, such as job title, cellphone number, and Web page addresses. You can organize your con-tacts into folders or into contact groups, which are groups of relatedpeople with whom you communicate regularly.172Adding a Contact toWindows ContactsAdd or Edit a ContactClick the Contacts button on thetoolbar.◆ You can also click the Startbutton, point to All Programs,and then click WindowsContacts.Click the New Contact button onthe toolbar to create a newcontact or select a contact, andthen click Edit on the toolbar toedit one.Enter the contact’s name.Enter the e-mail address.Click Add.Click the other available tabs toenter additional information.Click OK.Click the Close button.87654321Did You Know?You can add an address from ane-mail message. In the Inbox, open themessage with the e-mail address youwant, right-click the address, and thenclick Add Sender to Contacts.You can automatically add a replyaddress to Windows Contacts. Clickthe Tools menu, click Options, click theSend tab, select the Automatically putpeople I reply to in my Contacts listcheck box, and then click OK.2 87453
  • 193. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 173Create a Contact GroupClick the Contacts button on thetoolbar.Click the New Contact Groupbutton on the toolbar.Type a name for the new group.Click Add to Contact Group todisplay your current list ofcontacts.Click each member in the list ofcontacts you want to add. PressCtrl to select multiple contacts.Click Add.Repeat this step to add morecontacts.To add a contact just to the groupand not to your Contacts list, typethe contact and e-mail address,and then click Create for GroupOnly.To remove a contact from thegroup, click the contact, and thenclick Remove Selected Contacts.Click OK.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.10987654321Did You Know?You can sort your Windows Contacts.In Windows Contacts, point to theheading by which you want to sort,click the arrow, and then click Sort.You can switch the sorting methodfrom ascending to descending byclicking the same column headingagain.For Your InformationPrinting Contacts from Windows ContactsYou can print your contact information in a variety of formats, suchas Memo, Business Card, and Phone List. The Memo style prints allthe information you have for a contact with descriptive titles. TheBusiness Card style prints the contact information without descrip-tive titles. The Phone List style prints all the phone numbers for acontact or for all your contacts. To print contact information, openWindows Contacts, select the contacts you want to print, click Printon the toolbar, select a print range, print style, and the number ofcopies you want to print, and then click Print in the Print dialog box.9348710Contactgroup
  • 194. E-mail is becoming the primary form of written communication for manypeople. E-mail messages follow a standard memo format, with fields forthe sender, recipient, date, and subject of the message. To send ane-mail, you need to enter the recipient’s e-mail address, type a subject,then type the message itself. For a personal touch, you can also createan e-mail message with stationery designs. You can send the samee-mail to more than one individual, to a contact group, or to acombination of individuals and groups. Before you send the e-mail, youcan set a priority flag (high, normal, or low) to convey the message’simportance.174Composing andSending E-mailCompose and Send an E-mailClick the Create Mail button on thetoolbar.◆ To create an e-mail withstationery, click the Create Mailbutton arrow, then click astationery.Click the To button to selectcontacts.TIMESAVER Type therecipient’s name in the To box.Click a recipient or group.Click one of the following:◆ The To button if you want therecipient to receive themessage and to see theaddresses in the To and Ccfields.◆ The Cc button if you want therecipient to receive a copy ofthe message and to see theaddresses in the To and Ccfields.◆ The Bcc button if you want therecipient to receive a copy ofthe message but not be listedas a recipient on any othercopy of the message.Click OK.54321253 4
  • 195. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 175Click in the Subject box, and thenenter a brief description of yourmessage.Click in the message box, and thentype the text of your message.If you want, use the commands onthe Formatting toolbar to formatyour message.If you want, click the Set Prioritybutton arrow on the toolbar, andthen select a priority level.To encrypt or digitally sign amessage, click the Encrypt orDigitally Sign button on thetoolbar.Click the Send button on thetoolbar. Or click the File menu,click Send Later, and then click OKto confirm that the message hasbeen placed in your Outbox folder.If you chose Send Later, click theSend/Receive button on thetoolbar to contact the mail serverand deliver your message.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+M tosend and receive e-mail for allaccounts.1211109876Did You Know?You can save a message in progressto finish and send later. Click the Filemenu, and then click Save. The savemessage is stored in the Drafts folder,which you can open, edit the messageand send later.You can send and receive e-mail froma specific account. Click theSend/Receive button arrow, and thenclick the account you want.For Your InformationChecking the Spelling in E-mailBefore you send an e-mail message, you should spell check the textand read through the content to make sure your spelling is accurateand your content conveys the message you want to the recipient(s).If you have Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, or MicrosoftPowerPoint installed on your computer, Windows Mail uses the spellcheck from the Microsoft Office program to check the spelling ofyour e-mail messages. If you do not have one of these programsinstalled, the Spelling command is not available, and you need tocheck spelling manually. To start the spell check, type an e-mailmessage, click the Tools menu, and then click Spelling. To haveWindows Mail spell check all of your e-mail messages before send-ing them, display the Outlook window, click the Tools menu, clickOptions, click the Spelling tab in the Options dialog box, select theAlways Check Spelling Before Sending check box, and then click OK.9 6810711
  • 196. If you’re tired of the typical bland, unexciting look of e-mail, WindowsMail has the answer—Windows Mail stationery. This feature allowsyou to create e-mail messages with their own colorful background andfont styles. You can also customize your messages with a signature orby attaching your business card. A signature is any file, text file withyour signature, or photo of yourself that you choose. Several stationerystyles are included with Windows Mail.176Creating E-mailStationeryCreate a SignatureClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Options.Click the Signatures tab.Click New to create a newsignature.Type the information for thesignature. If available, select thefile that contains your signature.To enter more than one signature,repeat steps 3 and 4.Select the signature you want touse most of the time, and thenclick Set as Default.If you have multiple accounts,click Advanced, select the checkboxes for the accounts you wantto use, and then click OK.If you want, select the Addsignatures to all outgoingmessages check box, or select theDon’t add signatures to Repliesand Forwards check box.Click OK.987654321Did You Know?You can add your signature to e-mailquickly. In an e-mail message, clickwhere you want the signature, clickthe Insert menu, and then clickSignature. If you have more than onesignature, point to Signature, and thenclick the signature you want to use.9243687Advancedsettings
  • 197. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 177Create Stationery Using theStationery Setup WizardClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Options.Click the Compose tab.Click Create New, and then clickNext to begin the Stationery SetupWizard.Select a picture and color, andthen click Next.Choose the font, font size, andcolor, and then click Next.Choose the left and top margin,and then click Next.Type a name for your stationery,and then click Finish.Select the Mail check box toalways include stationery withyour e-mail messages.Click Select to choose thestandard stationery, and thenclick OK.Click OK.10987654321Did You Know?You can create a message using otheror new stationery. Click the New Mailbutton arrow on the toolbar, and thenselect a stationery, or click SelectStationery to select from other choicesor to create a new one.You can select a stationery for everynew message. Click the Tools menu,click Options, click the Compose tab,select the Mail check box, click Select,click a stationery file, click OK, clickthe Send tab, click the HTML option,and then click OK.1028934
  • 198. You can receive e-mail anytime—even when your computer is turnedoff. You can retrieve your e-mail manually or set Windows Mail to do soautomatically. When you start Windows Mail, the program checks fornew e-mail. It continues to check periodically while the program isopen. New messages appear in boldface in the Inbox along with anymessages you haven’t moved or deleted. Message flags may appearnext to a message, which indicate a certain priority, the need for followup, or an attachment. Windows Mail blocks images and other poten-tially harmful content from automatically downloading in an e-mail mes-sage from unknown people. Blocked items are replaced with a red “x”.You can use the Information Bar or modify the e-mail to view theblocked content. You can respond to a message in two ways: reply to it,which creates a new message addressed to the sender(s) and otherrecipients; or forward it, which creates a new message you can sendto someone else. In either case, the original message appears in theresponse.178Reading and Replyingto E-mailOpen and Read an E-mailClick the Inbox icon in the folderlist for the mail account you want.Open an e-mail message.◆ Click an e-mail message toread it in the Preview pane.◆ Double-click an e-mailmessage or press Enter for aselected message to open itin its own window.To download blocked pictures andother content, click the Informa-tion Bar at the top of the message.Click the Previous or Next buttonon the Message toolbar to readadditional e-mail messages.4321For Your InformationReading E-mail in Plain Text To Avoid VirusesIf you’re unsure of the source of an e-mail, yet still want to protectyour computer from viruses, you can securely view the e-mail inplain text, instead of HTML which can contain potentially harmfulcontent, such as viruses and worms. To read all e-mail in plain text,click the Tools menu, click Options, click the Read tab, select theRead All Messages In Plain Text check box, then click OK.See AlsoSee “Avoiding Viruses and OtherHarmful Attacks” on page 330 for infor-mation on viruses.See “Protecting Against E-mailAttacks” on page 345 for informationon how to protect your computeragainst viruses from an e-mail.21
  • 199. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 179Reply to an E-mailOpen the e-mail message youwant to reply to.Click the Reply button to respondto the sender only, or click theReply All button to respond to thesender and to all other recipients.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+R toreply to the message author.Add or delete names from the Toor the Cc box.Type your message.Attach any files to send.Click the Send button on thetoolbar.Forward an E-mailOpen the e-mail message youwant to forward.Click the Forward button on thetoolbar.Type the name(s) of therecipient(s), or click the To button,and then select the recipient(s).Type your message.Attach any files to send.Click the Send button on thetoolbar.654321654321Did You Know?Attachments aren’t sent on replies.When you reply to a message that hadan attachment, the attachment isn’treturned to the original sender. Youcan forward the message to theoriginal sender if you need to send theattachment back.64535 346
  • 200. You can use e-mail to easily share a file, such as a picture or adocument by attaching it to an e-mail. Upon receiving the e-mail, therecipient can open the file in the program that created it or save it.Make sure you know and trust the sender before you open it, becauseit might contain a virus or other security threat. It’s important to keepyour antivirus software up-to-date. The Attachment Manager providessecurity information to help you understand more about the file you aredownloading. If an attachment is considered safe, Windows Mailmakes it completely available to you. Examples of safe attachments aretext files (.txt) and graphic files, such as JPEGs (.jpg) and GIFs (.gif). Ifan attachment is potentially unsafe, such as an executable program(.exe), screensavers (.scr) or script files (including .vbs), Windows Maildisplays a notice on the Information Bar and blocks it so you will not beable to open it without taking explicit action. If Windows Mail can’tdetermine the safety of an attachment, it displays a security warning(when you try to move, save, open, or print the file) with informationabout the file.180Sending andRetrieving a FileSend a File in an E-mailCompose a new message or replyto an existing message.IMPORTANT Some ISPs havetrouble sending attachments over3 MB; check with your ISP.Click the Attach File button on thetoolbar.Select the drive and folder thatcontains the file you want toattach.Click to select the file.Click Open.Click the Send button on thetoolbar.654321Did You Know?You can open an attachment from ane-mail message. Select the e-mailmessage in the Inbox, click theAttachment icon on the Preview pane,and then click the name of the file.612Attachedfile534
  • 201. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 181Open a File in an E-mailSelect the message with theattached file.IMPORTANT If you’re not sureof the source of an attachment,don’t open it, because it mightcontain a virus or worm. Be sureto use anti-virus software.Click the Attachment icon, andthen click the file name.Click Open.Save Files in an E-mailSelect the message with theattached file.Click the Attachment icon, andthen click Save Attachments.Select the attached file you wantto save or click Select All to selectall the attached files.Click Browse, select the drive andfolder where you want to save thefile, and then click Open.Click Save.54321321See AlsoSee “Avoiding Viruses and OtherHarmful Attacks” on page 330 for infor-mation on how to avoid getting a virusand other harmful threats.See “Protecting Against E-mailAttacks” on page 345 for informationon how to avoid getting a virus from anattached file in an e-mail.21453
  • 202. A common problem with using e-mail is an overcrowded Inbox. To keepyour Inbox organized, you should move messages you want to save toother folders and subfolders, delete messages you no longer want, andcreate new folders as you need them. Storing incoming messages inother folders and deleting unwanted messages make it easier to seethe new messages you receive and to keep track of important mes-sages. If you can’t find a message, you can use the Search box (New!)to quickly find it. If you have not finished composing a message, youcan save it in the Drafts folder and work on it later.182Managing E-mailCreate a New FolderClick the File menu, point to New,and then click New Folder.Type a name for the new folder.Click the folder in which you wantto place the new folder.◆ Click Local Folders to place thefolder in the folder list.◆ Click one of the other folders inthe list to make the new foldera subfolder.Click OK.Organize E-mail in FoldersSelect the e-mail message youwant to move. If necessary, pressand hold the Ctrl key, and click toselect multiple e-mail messages.Drag the e-mail message(s) to thenew folder.214321Did You Know?You can sort messages quickly.To sort messages by sender, subject,date, priority or flag, click a header inthe Preview pane.2432 1
  • 203. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 183Find an E-mail or NewsMessageClick in the Search box.Type a word or part of a word inthe message.As you type, the message listnarrows and displays messagesthat match the search text.When you see the message youwant, double-click the message toopen it.Work on a Draft E-mailOpen a new or a reply to anexisting e-mail message, and thentype a message.Click the File menu, and then clickSave, and then click OK.Close the e-mail message.Click the Drafts folder in the folderlist.Double-click the e-mail messageto view it.When you’re done with themessage, click the Send button.654321321Did You Know?You can flag an important messagethat need attention later. Select thee-mail message, click the Messagemenu, and then click Flag Message.12Searchresults564
  • 204. When you delete an e-mail message, Windows Mail simply moves itinto the Deleted Items folder. If you want to recover a deleted message,you just have to retrieve it from the Deleted Items folder. To get rid of amessage permanently, you need to open the Deleted Items folder,select the message, and click Delete. Windows Mail automaticallyplaces e-mail messages in the Sent Items folder every time you sendthem. You will want to periodically open the Sent Items folder anddelete messages so your mail account doesn’t get too large. You canalso use maintenance options to help you clean up.184Deleting E-mailDelete Unwanted E-mailClick a folder icon in the folder listwith the e-mail you want to delete.Click the e-mail you want todelete.Click the Delete button on thetoolbar.TIMESAVER Press Delete orCtrl+D to delete the selectedmessage(s).32131 2
  • 205. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 185Recover E-mail from the DeletedItems FolderClick the Deleted Items folder inthe folder list to open the folder.Select the e-mail message youwant to retrieve.Drag the e-mail message toanother folder.Change E-mail MaintenanceOptionsClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Options.Click the Advanced tab.Click Maintenance.Select the maintenance optionsyou want.◆ Delete messages on exit orafter a certain number of days.◆ Compact messages to savespace.Click Close.5432132131254
  • 206. 186Junk e-mail can seem like a never ending battle. It keeps piling up.Windows Mail provides the Junk E-mail Options dialog box to help youreduce the amount of junk e-mail you receive. You can set a junk e-mailprotection level that makes sense to you, from no filtering to only thesafe senders list. If you receive junk e-mail from international domainsor languages, you can quickly and easily block them. E-mail hasbecome the new way to commit fraud using spoof sites and addresses.These types of e-mail are called phishing. You can set options inWindows Mail that can help protect you again potential phishingattacks.Setting Junk E-mailOptionsChange Junk E-mail OptionsClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Junk E-mail Options.Click the Options tab.Click the level of junk e-mailprotection option you want.Select or clear the Permanentlydelete suspected junk e-mailinstead of moving it to the junkE-mail folder check box.IMPORTANT You should onlyselect this option if you selectedthe Low option above to avoiddeleting regular e-mail.Click OK.543214235Windows Mail detects junk e-mail
  • 207. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 187Guard Against PhishingClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Junk E-mail Options.Click the Phishing tab.Select the Protect my Inbox frommessages with potential Phishinglinks check box.Select the Move phishing E-mailto the Junk Mail folder check box.Click OK.Block International Junk E-mailClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Junk E-mail Options.Click the International tab.Click Blocked Top-Level DomainList.Select the individual check boxeswith the domains you want toblock or click Select All.Click OK.Click OK.654321543215234623
  • 208. 188If you receive unwanted e-mail from a specific address or domain, youcan block all messages from that sender. On the other hand, if you finda wanted e-mail in the Junk E-mail folder, you can mark it as safe andnot as junk. When you mark a message as junk, Windows Mail movesthe message into the Junk E-mail folder, where you can browserthrough or delete it later. You can mark individual or groups ofmessages as blocked or safe. If you want to add, edit, or removeaddresses or domains from the Safe or Block Senders list, you can usethe Junk E-mail Options dialog box, which you can access from theTools menu.Marking an E-mailBlocked or SafeMark an E-mail Blocked or Safefrom a SenderSelect the e-mail you want toblock.Click the Message menu, and thenpoint to Junk E-mail.Click the Junk E-mail option youwant:◆ Block. Click Add Sender toBlock Senders List or AddSender’s Domain to BlockedSenders List.◆ Safe. Add Sender to SafeSenders List or Add Sender’sDomain to Safe Senders List.Click OK to alert message.4321Did You Know?You can mark e-mail not as junk. Inthe Junk E-mail folder, select thee-mail you want to change, click theMessage menu, point to Junk E-mail,and then click Mark as Not Junk. Thee-mail is moved back to the Inbox.You can add, remove, and changeblocked or safe sender in the JunkE-mail Options dialog box. Click theTools menu, click Junk E-mail, click theSafe Senders or Blocked Senders tab,and then make the changes you want.231
  • 209. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 189Windows Mail can direct incoming messages that meet criteria toother folders in the Folders list rather than to your Inbox. For example,your friend loves sending you funny e-mail, but you often don’t havetime to read it right away. You can set message rules to store anymessages you receive from your friend in a different folder so theywon’t clutter your Inbox. When you are ready to read the messages,you simply open the folder and access the messages just as you wouldmessages in the Inbox. If you receive unwanted e-mail from a specificaddress, you can block all messages from that sender.Diverting IncomingE-mail to FoldersSet Rules for Incoming E-mailClick the Tools menu, point toMessage Rules, and then clickMail.If no rules are set, skip to step 3.Click New to create a new rule, orselect a rule and click Modify toedit an existing one.Click the appropriate conditionsand actions for your rule.Click a link to enter the underlyinginformation for that condition oraction.Specify the criteria for your rule inthe Selection dialog box thatappears, and then click OK.Repeat steps 4 and 5 for eachcondition and action you have set.Type a name for this rule.Click OK.Click OK.987654321Did You Know?You can apply rules right now. Clickthe Tools menu, point to MessageRules, and then click Mail. Click ApplyNow. Select the rule(s) you want toapply and the folder that contains themessages, and then click Apply Now.87345
  • 210. A newsgroup is an electronic forum where people from around theworld with a common interest can share ideas, ask and answerquestions, and comment on and discuss any subject. You can findnewsgroups on almost any topic. Before you can participate in a news-group, you must select a news server. A news server is a computerlocated on the Internet, which stores newsgroup messages, also calledarticles, on different topics. Each news server contains several news-groups from which to choose. The Internet Connection Wizard walksyou through the process of selecting a news server. This wizard alsoappears the first time you use Windows Mail News. To complete thewizard process, you might need an account name and password, andyou need to choose a news server that you want to use.190Selecting a NewsServerSet up a News Server Using theConnect to the Internet WizardClick the Tools menu, clickAccounts, and then click Add.Click the Newsgroup Account, andthen click Next to continue.Type your name, and then clickNext to continue.Read the information in eachwizard dialog box, type therequired information, and thenclick Next to continue.In the final wizard dialog box, clickFinish.If prompted, click a subscribe tonewsgroups option.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can change the news server.Right-click the news server in theFolders list, click Properties, changesettings, and then click OK.You can remove a news server. Right-click the news server in the Folderslist, click Remove Account, and thenclick Yes.123
  • 211. When you add a news server account, Windows Mail retrieves a list ofnewsgroups available on that server. Once you select a newsgroup,you can view its contents, or, if you expect to return to the newsgroupoften, you can subscribe to it. Subscribing to a newsgroup places a linkto the group in the Folders list, providing easy access to the news-group. If you find that you are no longer interested in a newsgroup, youcan unsubscribe from it. You can also view a newsgroup withoutsubscribing to see if you might want to add it to your Folders list.Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 191Subscribing to aNewsgroupSubscribe to a NewsgroupClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Newsgroups.Type the word or phrase for whichyou want to search. As you type,the results appear in theNewsgroup list.Scroll through the list of availablenewsgroups.Click the newsgroup you want tosubscribe to.Click Subscribe.Click Go to to see the postedmessages.654321Did You Know?You can unsubscribe from a news-group. If you no longer want to see anewsgroup in your Folders list, right-click the newsgroup name, clickUnsubscribe on the shortcut menu,and then click OK.64235Click to view subscribed newsgroups
  • 212. Once you have subscribed to a newsgroup, you will want to view itsmessages. Click the newsgroup to display messages, and then click themessage you want to read. Newsgroup messages appear in thePreview pane, just as e-mail messages do. If a plus sign (+) appears tothe left of a newsgroup message, then the message contains a conver-sation thread. A conversation thread consists of the original messageon a particular topic along with any responses that include the originalmessage. Icons appear next to the news messages to indicate whethera conversation thread is expanded or collapsed, and whether or not ithas been read.192Reading the NewsOpen and Read News MessagesClick the newsgroup in the Folderslist whose message you want toread.Scroll through the list to see theposted messages.Find the message you want to readusing the following methods:◆ To display all the responses toa conversation thread, click theplus sign (+) to the left of amessage.◆ To hide all the responses to aconversation thread, click theminus sign (-) to the left of amessage.◆ To view only unread messages,click the View menu, point toCurrent View, and then clickHide Read or IgnoredMessages.◆ To sort the messages based ontype, click the column buttonyou want to sort by. The columnbutton toggles between sortingthe column in ascending anddescending order.To read a message, click itsheader in the message list.Read the message in the Previewpane.5432114News server25
  • 213. After you become familiar with a newsgroup, you might decide that youdon’t want to retrieve messages from a particular person, about aspecific subject, of a certain length, or older than a certain number ofdays. This is called filtering newsgroup messages.Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 193Filtering the NewsFilter Unwanted MessagesClick the Tools menu, point toMessage Rules, and then clickNews.If necessary, click New.Select the conditions for your rule.Select the actions for your rule.Click any undefined value, such asthe e-mail address you want todivert and the folder where youwant to store the unwantedmessages, and then provideinformation.Type a name.Click OK.Click OK.87654321Did You Know?You can ignore or watch a conversa-tion. Select the conversation you wantto ignore or watch, click the Messagemenu, and then click IgnoreConversation or Watch Conversation.7643582
  • 214. Part of the fun of newsgroups is that you can participate in an ongoingdiscussion, respond privately to a message’s author, or start a newthread yourself by posting your own message on a topic of interest toyou. If you post a message to a newsgroup and then change your mind,you can cancel the message. Keep in mind that if someone has alreadydownloaded the message, canceling the message will not remove itfrom that person’s computer.194Posting a NewsMessagePost a News MessageClick the newsgroup in the folderlist to which you want to post amessage.Click the New Post button on thetoolbar.Type a subject for your message.Type your message.Select a post type option.Click the Send button on thetoolbar.Cancel a MessageSelect the newsgroup to whichyou posted the message in theFolders list.Select the message you want tocancel. You will need to wait untilthe newsgroup posts the message.Click the Message menu, clickCancel Message, and thenclick OK.321654321Did You Know?You need to think before you post.Respond to personal questions postedto a newsgroup directly to the author,not to the entire newsgroup.Remember to click the Reply button.6 3451 3 2
  • 215. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 195Reply to a MessageClick the message to which youwant to reply.Select the appropriate command.◆ Click the Reply Group button onthe toolbar to post yourresponse to the newsgroup.◆ Click the Reply button on thetoolbar to send the message’sauthor a private e-mailmessage.◆ Click the Forward button tosend an e-mail message tosome other recipient.Type your message, and if youwant, delete parts of the originalmessage that are unrelated toyour reply.Click the Send button on thetoolbar.4321Did You Know?You should name your messages care-fully. When you compose a message,choose a subject that accuratelyreflects the content of your messageso that people can decide whetherthey want to read it. When you reply toa message, don’t change the subjectline so that the conversation willremain threaded.For Your InformationDeleting Old News MessagesNewsgroup messages are stored on your hard drive, so you shoulddelete unneeded messages to free disk space. Windows Mail givesseveral clean-up options to help you optimize your hard drive space.You can delete entire messages (titles and bodies), compressmessages, remove just the message bodies (leaving the title head-ers), or reset the information stored for selected messages, whichallows you to refresh messages (download again). To clean up fileson your local hard drive, select a news server in the Folders list,click the Tools menu, click Options, click the Advanced tab, and thenclick Maintenance. You can select any of the clean-up options todelete or compress news messages at a specified time, or you canclick Clean Up Now, and then click the button for the clean-up optionyou want to perform.12
  • 216. 196Windows Calendar (New!) is an electronic version of the familiarpaper daily planner. You can schedule time for completing specifictasks, meetings, vacations, holidays, or for any other activity with theCalendar. You can change the Calendar to show activities for the Day,Work Week (five business days), Week (all seven days), or Month. TheAppointment area serves as a daily planner where you can scheduleactivities by the day, work week, full week, or month. Appointments arescheduled activities such as a doctors visit, and occupy a block of timein the Appointment area. Events are activities that last 24 hours orlonger, such as a seminar, and do not occupy blocks of time in your cal-endar. Instead, they appear in a banner at the beginning of a day. Thebottom left pane of Calendar view displays the tasks associated withthe days displayed in the calendar.Viewing theWindows CalendarOpen and Change theCalendar ViewIn Windows Mail, click theWindows Calendar button on thetoolbar.◆ You can also click the Startbutton, point to All Programs,and then click WindowsCalendar.You can change the Calendar viewin several ways.◆ Click the View menu, and thenclick the view option you want.◆ Click the View button arrow,and then click a view.◆ Click the left arrow or rightarrow on the Date Navigator tochange the current month.◆ Click a date on the DateNavigator to view that day’sschedule. The date highlightedin red is today’s date.◆ Click the View menu, and thenclick Details Pane to seeappointment or task details.View and work with appointmentor tasks associated with thecurrent Calendar view.321CurrentcalendarDate NavigatorNavigation paneDetailspaneUse to changethe view
  • 217. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 197In Windows Calendar, an appointment (New!) is any activity youschedule that doesn’t include other people or resources. An event isany appointment that lasts one or more full days (24-hour increments),such as a seminar, a conference, or a vacation. You enter appointmentor event information in the same box; however, when you schedule anevent, the All-day appointment check box is selected; the check box iscleared when you schedule an appointment. If an appointment or eventrecurs on a regular basis, such as a meeting, you can set theRecurrence option. If you need a reminder, you can also set the amountof time you need.Scheduling anAppointmentSchedule an AppointmentIn Windows Mail, click theCalendar button on the toolbar.In Day view, select the day selectthe time you want for theappointment.Click the New Appointment buttonon the toolbar.In the Details pane, type the nameand location of the appointment.Click the Calendar button arrow,and then select calendar whereyou want the appointment toappear.To make an all-day appointment,select the All-day Appointmentcheck box.Enter start and end times, asnecessary.To make an appointment recur,click the Recurrence button arrow,and then select the option youwant.To set a reminder, click theReminder button arrow, and thenspecify a reminder time.To invite someone, type the e-mailaddress of the person you want,press Enter, click the address, andthe click Invite.10987654321103 684759
  • 218. 198A task is something you want to accomplish within a specific time.Windows Calendar allows you to create and manage tasks to theircompletion. You can quickly create a detailed task (New!) using theNew Task button on the toolbar. In the Details pane, you can set a StartDate, Due Date (the date by which the task must be completed), andPriority (Low, Medium, or High) for a task. If you need a reminder, youcan specify a reminder date and time. To manage the completion of atask, you can select or clear the task check box in the Navigation paneor the Complete check box in the Details pane. If you need to addadditional information about a task, you can use the Notes area at thebottom of the pane.Creating TasksCreate or Update a TaskIn Windows Mail, click theCalendar button on the toolbar.Click the New Task button on thetoolbar.In the Details pane, type the nameof the task.Click the Calendar button arrow,and then select calendar whereyou want the task to appear.Click the Priority button arrow, andthen select a priority.Enter start and due dates.To set a reminder, click theReminder button arrow, click Ondate, and then specify a date.The task appears in the Navigationpane.Enter notes for the task.When a task is done, select thecheck box next to the task in theNavigation pane or the Completecheck box in the Details pane.To edit a task, click the task in theNavigation pane to display it in theDetails pane, where you can makethe changes you want.98765432192 34678510
  • 219. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 199In Windows Calendar, you can create individual calendars for multiplepeople who use the program and share them with each other (New!).When you have multiple calendars, you can view them individually orall at once, side-by-side, or overlaid to make it easier to compare onecalendar with another and check for free time. Appointments for eachcalendar are displays in a different color to make them easier to tellwhose schedule each item belongs to. If you want to add anappointment from another calendar to your calendar, you can dragappointments between the two calendars.Creating and SharingCalendarsCreate and Share a CalendarIn Windows Mail, click theWindows Calendar button on thetoolbar.To create a new calendar, click theFile menu, click New Calendar,type the name you want for thecalendar, and then press Enter.To choose the color of yourappointments, click the Color listarrow in the Details pane, andthen select the color you want.To view multiple calendars, selectthe check boxes next to thecalendars you want in theNavigation pane.421Did You Know?You can search for an appointment ortask. In the Search box, type letters orwords from the appointment or taskyou want to find. As you type, thesearch results that match what youtype continue to appear.You can print a calendar. Display thecalendar you want to print, click theFile menu, click Print, select a printer,the print style you want (Day, WorkWeek, Week, or Month), and a printrange (Start and End), and thenclick OK.4233
  • 220. 200Windows Calendar uses the Internet compatible iCalendar format withthe .ics file extension, which allows you to publish and subscribe tocalendars over the Internet (New!). After you create a calendar, youcan publish it to a Web hosting site where you can share it with othersover the Internet. If you want to specify who can access and view apublished calendar, you can add password protection. In addition topublishing, you can also subscribe to a published calendar on the Web,so you can stay up-to-date with other people.Publishing CalendarsOver the InternetPublish a CalendarIn Windows Mail, click theWindows Calendar button on thetoolbar.Click the Share menu, and thenclick Publish.Type the calendar name you want.Enter the location where you wantto publish the calendar, such as aWeb site, or click Browse.Select or clear the Automaticallypublish changes made to thiscalendar check box.Select or clear the check boxesfor details you want to include:Notes, Reminders, or Tasks.Click Publish.If you want to send an e-mailannouncement with calendar links,click Announce, and then addressand send the message.Otherwise, click Finish.To unpublish a calendar, click theShare menu, click Stop Publishing,and then click Unpublish.10987654321Did You Know?You can subscribe to a calendar. clickthe Share menu, click Subscribe, andthen follow the wizard instructions.Check out 9
  • 221. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 201Windows Meeting Space (New!) is a program that allows you to set upa meeting with up to ten people and share documents, programs, oryour desktop. Before you can hold a meeting, each person attendingthe meeting needs to be running Windows Vista. To start a new meet-ing, you give it a name and password for security purposes, and thenyou invite others to attend. In the meeting, you can share a program oryour desktop, and distribute any handout files you want to attendees.Starting a WindowsMeetingStart a New Meeting withWindows Meeting SpaceClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Meeting Space.The first time you start WindowsMeeting Space, select PeopleNear Me options to activate thenetwork to run Meeting Space.Click Start a new meeting.Type a name for the meeting.Type a password to create asecure meeting.To show the password, select theShow characters check box.To set visibility and networkoptions, click Options, selectoptions to allow or not allowpeople to see this meeting, or tocreate a private wireless networkto use with a meeting, and thenclick OK.Click the Create a meeting button(green arrow).To exit or leave a meeting, clickthe Meeting button, and then clickExit or Leave meeting.87654321First time set up forPeople Near Meoptions76345
  • 222. 202In Windows Meeting Space (New!), you invite participants to ameeting and they can individually join in. To invite a person to join ameeting, you send them an e-mail message or an invitation file withmeeting information. Participants can join a meeting at any time duringthe meeting session. For those within your network, you can changemeeting participant settings and sign in options to allow people nearyou to send you invitations. A meeting continues until all participantshave left the meeting. To exit or leave a meeting, you use the Meetingbutton on the Windows Meeting Space window.Holding a WindowsMeetingSend Invitations to a MeetingIn a meeting, click Invite People.Select or clear the Requireparticipants to type the meetingpassword check box.Use one of the following:◆ Select the check box next tothe name of each person youwant to invite, and then clickSend invitations.◆ Click Invite others, and thenclick Send an invitation ine-mail.◆ Click Invite others, and thenclick Create an invitation file,save the file, and then givethe file to the person you wantto invite.321Did You Know?You can change participant status in ameeting. In a meeting, click the partici-pant name you want to change, click astatus option: Available, Busy, Be rightback, or Away.You can select a trusted contact.A trusted contact is someone whosends you their user name and otherinformation in an e-mail message orfile that is accompanied by a digitalcertificate of identity.12Options for sending orcreating invitations3
  • 223. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 203Join a MeetingIf necessary, start WindowsMeeting Space.◆ Click the Start button, point toAll Programs, and then clickWindows Meeting Space.If the meeting is already inprogress, click Join a meetingnear me. Or, if you know thatsomeone has sent you aninvitation file, click Open aninvitation file.Type the password you receivedfrom the person who calls themeeting.Click the Join a meeting button(green arrow).Change Participant SettingsIn a meeting, click the participantname you want to change, andthen click Personal settings.◆ You can also open the PeopleNear Me icon in the ControlPanel to change these settings.Type the name you want otherpeople to see.Select or clear the Make mypicture available check box.Click the Allow invitations fromlist arrow, and then select anoption. Select or clear the Displaya notification when an invitationis received check box.Select or clear the Sign me inautomatically when Windowsstarts check box.Click OK.654321432123542634
  • 224. 204Windows Meeting Space (New!) allows you to share documents, pro-grams, or your desktop with up to ten people running the same versionof Windows Vista. When you share documents, programs, or yourdesktop, participants can view your computer. You can also addhandouts to the meeting. Each participant is given a copy of the file andcan make changes to the copy one at a time. The changes for eachparticipant are made to all participants’ handouts, except the originalhandout, which stays the same. During a sharing session, you cantemporarily give control to another participant to make a change to afile. Since you are in charge of the meeting, you can take control backat any time.Sharing Information ina Windows MeetingShare a Program or YourDesktopStart the program you want toshare in a meeting.In a meeting, click the Share aprogram or your desktop button,and then OK, if necessary.Click Desktop, the runningprogram you want to share, orBrowse for a file to open andshare to open a program and file.Click Share.If necessary, select a file to share,and then click Open to start theassociated program and file.To add a handout to the meeting,click the Add a handout button,select the file, and then clickOpen.If you want, click the Show mehow my shared session looks onother computers or Stop sharing.Minimize the Windows MeetingSpace window, and then startusing the program or your desktopin the meeting.To stop, pause, or see how thesharing session looks, click theappropriate button at the top ofthe screen.9876543212 679
  • 225. Chapter 6 Exchanging Messages and Information 205Give and Take Control of aSharing Session in a MeetingIn a meeting with a shareddocument, program, or yourdesktop, click the Give Controlbutton.To take back control, click TakeControl.TIMESAVER Press theWindows Logo key+Esc to takecontrol back.Change Settings During SharingSessionIn a meeting with a shareddocument, program, or yourdesktop, click the Options button.Click the command you want:◆ Show Windows MeetingSpace window.◆ Connect to a projector. Followthe on-screen instructions toconnect to a video projectorthat is connected to a network,which you can controlremotely.2121Did You Know?The data shared during a meeting issecure. All the data and communica-tions shared during a meeting areencrypted to provide security for allthe participants involved.112
  • 226. This page intentionally left blank
  • 227. Holding Web Discussionsand Video ConferencesIntroductionWindows Vista makes communicating with other computersover the Internet easier than ever with Windows LiveMessenger (version 8).You can talk to others over theInternet (like you do on a telephone), use video to see and beseen by others while you converse, share programs and files,collaborate on documents, share graphical content on awhiteboard (a drawing canvas), and ask for or get remoteonline assistance from a contact.You can use Windows Live Messenger (New!) to exchangeinstant messages with a designated list of contacts over theInternet. An instant message is an online typewritten conver-sation in real-time between two or more contacts. Unlike ane-mail message, instant messages require both parties to beonline, and the communication is instantaneous. WithWindows Live Messenger, you can send instant messages toany of your contacts who are online; have conversations witha group of friends; see the latest information about yourcontacts; see and hear your contacts; send and receive textmessages with a mobile device; send a voice clip to expressyourself personally; and save your conversations. In addition,you can make PC to telephone or PC to PC calls, share andupdate files with your friends using the Sharing folder, andconnect with your friends who useYahoo Messenger (New!).Windows Live Messenger uses different services toexchange messages, files, and other information.The defaultservice is .NET Messenger Service, which individuals mostlyuse. For those working in a corporate environment, WindowsLive Messenger supports Communications Service for net-works that use SIP-server technology and Exchange InstantMessaging for networks that use Microsoft Exchange Server.You can set up Windows Live Messenger to access more thanone type of messaging service. 77What You’ll DoPrepare for Windows Live MessengerStart and View Windows LiveMessengerChange My StatusPersonalize Windows Live MessengerAdd Online ContactsManage Contacts and GroupsSend and Receive Instant MessagesBlock a ContactSend a File During an Instant MessageShare Files Using Shared FoldersMake a Video and Voice CallSend a Message to a Mobile DeviceGet Remote AssistanceCustomize Windows Live Messenger207
  • 228. Windows Live Messenger (New!) is an instant messenging programthat allows you to send and receive instant messages, hold videochats, and share files. Windows Live Messenger doesn’t come installedwith Windows Vista, so you need to download and install it from theMicrosoft Web site. Before you can use Windows Live Messenger, youneed to get an account ID. You use the ID to sign-in to Windows LiveMessenger as well as other Windows Live services, such as WindowsLive Mail and Windows Live Spaces. If you already have an MSNHotmail, MSN Messenger, or Microsoft Passport account, you’vealready got a Windows Live ID.208Preparing forWindows LiveMessengerDownload Windows LiveMessengerClick the Start button, and thenclick point to All Programs.Click Windows Live MessengerDownload.Your Web browser opens,displaying the Windows LiveMessenger Web site.Click the link to download theWindows Live Messengersoftware.Click Run to start the downloadand the installation, or click Saveto save the installation files to yourhard disk, and then double-clickthe Setup icon.Follow the online instructions tocomplete the installation.54321134
  • 229. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 209Create an AccountClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then click WindowsLive Messenger.The Windows Live Messengersign-in windows opens.Click Get a new account at thebottom.Your Web browser opens,displaying the Get your WindowsLive ID Web site.Click the link to sign up for theWindows Live ID.Follow the online instructions tocreate a Windows Live ID.Forgot Your PasswordClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then click WindowsLive Messenger.The Windows Live Messengersign-in windows opens.Click Forgot your password? at thebottom.Your Web browser opens,displaying the Reset yourpassword Web site.Type your Windows Live ID.Type the security characters in thepicture.Click Continue.Follow the online instructions toreset your password.654321432121 4325
  • 230. Windows Live Messenger is an instant messaging program that allowsyou to exchange instant messages with a designated list of contactsover the Internet. An instant message is an online typewritten conver-sation in real time between two or more contacts. Instant messagesrequire both parties to be online, and the communication is instanta-neous. Before you can use Windows Live Messenger, you need aWindows Live ID, which you can get for no charge from Microsoft.After you start Windows Live Messenger, you sign in to let othersonline know you are connected. When you’re done, you sign out.210Starting WindowsLive MessengerStart Windows Live Messengerand Sign In and OutClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Live Messenger.TIMESAVER Double-click theWindows Live Messenger icon inthe notification area of the taskbar.If you’re not automatically signedin, enter your user name andpassword. If you want to sign-inwith a different ID, click the E-mailaddress list arrow, and then clickSign in with a different e-mailaddress.Select or clear the Remember Me,Remember my Password, or Signme in automatically check box.Click the Sign In button.If you want to stay signed in, yetstill close Windows LiveMessenger, click the Close button.To sign out, click Tools, and thenclick Sign out.654321Did You Know?You can stop signing in automatically.Click Tools, click Sign out, and thenclear the Sign me in automaticallycheck box in the Sign-in window.53246
  • 231. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 211If you are having problems signing into Windows Live Messenger, youmight need to add the program (MSNmsgr.exe) to your firewall excep-tions list. If that doesn’t help, you might need to check the Microsoft.NET Messenger Service status, which is the online service provided byMicrosoft that makes it possible for you to use Windows LiveMessenger or MSN Messenger. Microsoft is continually updatingWindows Messenger with new functionality. When a software updateis available, Windows Live Messenger displays a message, where youcan download and install the upgrade.Configuring WindowsLive MessengerUpdate Windows MessengerWhen an update is available, amessage appears at the top of thewindow, click the Click here link.Click the Yes option.Click OK.After the download is complete,click Run, and then follow theinstructions to download andinstall the upgrade.4321Did You Know?You might need to configure the fire-wall. Double-click the WindowsFirewall icon in the Control Panel, clickAllow a program through WindowsFirewall in the left pane, select theWindows Live Messenger check box,and then click OK.You might need to check the .NETMessenger Service status. ClickService status in the Sign-in window,or click the Help menu, and then clickService status.You might need to configure your Webbrowser for sharing. Start InternetExplorer, click the Tools button, clickInternet Options, click the Security tab,click Internet, click Custom Level,enable all scripting options, clickMedium or lower setting for Reset,click the Privacy tab, drag the slider toMedium or higher, and then click OK.132
  • 232. 212Viewing Windows Live MessengerTabsMy StatusContactsCurrent usersigned-inSearch boxConversationwith contactConversationparticipantsFormat conversation textType and sendconversation textToolbar
  • 233. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 213When you sign in with Windows Live Messenger, the program notifiescontacts currently online from your Contacts list that you are availableto chat. While you’re signed in, you might need to leave your computerfor a meeting or lunch. Instead of signing out, you can change youronline status to let your contacts know that you’ll be right back, or thatyou’re not available at the moment for other reasons.Changing My StatusChange My StatusSelect Tools, and then click astatus type:◆ Online◆ Busy◆ Be right back◆ Away◆ In a call◆ Out to lunch◆ Appear offline◆ Sign outChange Status PreferencesSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click Personal.Select or clear the Show me as“Away” when I’m inactive for Xminutes check box, and then enterthe number of inactive minutesyou want, if necessary.Select or clear the Show me as“Busy” and block my alerts whenI’m running a full-screen programor presentation settings are turnedon check box.Click OK.543211 1Status types5432
  • 234. 214Before you start using Windows LIve Messenger, you can customizethe program to show the menu bar if you prefer, automatically sign in,and display personalized information. You can change your displayname, provide a personal message, and select a picture to representyou while you communicate with others online. Instead of selecting aregular static picture, you can select a dynamic display picture(New!) or character that provides animation, such as a WeeMee,MeeGos, Quebles, or Kiwee.PersonalizingWindows LiveMessengerAccess and Show or HideMenus◆ Access and Show Menus. Clickthe Show Menu button at the topof the window to display menus,and then click Show the menu bar.◆ Hide Menus. Click the Hide themenu bar button.Change Sign In PreferencesSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click General.Select or clear the check boxeswith the sign in options you wantto change:◆ Run this program whenWindows starts◆ Allow automatic sign in whenconnected to the Internet◆ Show Windows Live Today◆ Use the same display pictureand personal messageClick OK.4321Click toshow menusShow Menu button432
  • 235. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 215Change Personal InformationSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click Personal.Type the name you want others tosee when you are online.Type a personal message for yourcontacts to see.To show a display picture, selectthe Show my display picture andallow other to see it check box,click Change Picture, select apicture, and then click OK.Click OK.Change Display PictureSelect Tools, and then clickChange display picture.Select the picture you want to useusing one of the following:◆ Dynamic Display Pictures.Click a dynamic display picturelink, and then follow the onlineinstructions.◆ Regular Pictures. Click thepicture you want.◆ Remove Pictures. Select thepicture, and then click Remove.◆ No Picture. Select the Don’tshow a picture check box.Click OK.TIMESAVER In theConversation window, click theOptions for this person buttonarrow for you to change yourdisplay picture and other options.3216543212456332
  • 236. Before you can send instant messages to other people, they need to bein your Contacts list. You can add a person who has a Windows Live IDor a Yahoo member (New!) to your Contacts list by using the Add acontact button. If the person that you want to contact doesn’t haveWindows Live Messenger or an ID, you can send the person an e-mailwith information about getting and installing Windows Live Messengerand obtaining an ID.216Adding OnlineContactsAdd an Outline ContactDouble-click the Windows LiveMessenger icon in the notificationarea of the taskbar, and then signin, if necessary.Click the Add a contact button.Type the e-mail address of theperson you want to add.If the person doesn’t haveWindows Live Messenger, type apersonal invitation message.Type a nickname that others seeduring a conversation.To add a contact to a group, clickthe Group button arrow, and thenselect a group.In the Contact, Personal, Work,and Notes sections, enter theinformation you want to include.Select or clear the Subscribe toupdates for this contact checkbox.Click Add contact.987654321Did You Know?You can quickly delete a contact.Right-click a contact, click Delete con-tact, select or clear the Also block thiscontact and Also remove from my hot-mail contacts check boxes, and thenclick Delete contact.27 53468 9
  • 237. As your Contacts list grows, you may want to organize your contactsinto groups or remove the ones you no longer use. Windows LiveMessenger makes it easy to organize them into predefined groups andgroups that you create. Windows Live Messenger comes with four pre-defined groups by default: Coworkers, Family, Friends, and OtherContacts. Once you have organized your groups, you can select orclear contact check boxes to modify it. You can use the Up and Downbuttons next to the group name to hide and display contacts in a group.Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 217Managing Contactsand GroupsCreate a Contacts GroupClick the Contacts menu, and thenclick Create a group.TIMESAVER Right-click agroup, and then click Create newgroup.Type a name for the new group.Select the contacts or type thee-mail addresses you want to addto the group.Click Save.Modify Contacts and ContactGroups◆ Edit Contact. Right-click thecontact, click Edit contact, makechanges, and then click Save.◆ Edit Contact Group. Right-clickthe contact group, click Editgroup, select or clear contactcheck boxes, and then click Save.◆ Rename Contact Group. Right-click the contact group, clickRename group, type a name, andthen press Enter.◆ Delete Contact Group. Right-clickthe contact group, click Deletegroup, and then click Yes.4321243Right-clickcontacts orgroups toperform tasks
  • 238. An instant message is an online typewritten conversation in real-timebetween two or more contacts. As you type an instant message, youcan format your messages by changing fonts and text color and byinserting backgrounds and color schemes (New!). Each message cancontain up to 400 characters. If you have a writing input device andMicrosoft Windows Journal Viewer installed, you can also draw orhandwrite (New!) your messages. You cannot send an instant mes-sage to more than one person, but you can invite other people usingthe same messaging service to participate in an existing conversation;you can include up to five people in a conversation.218Sending andReceiving InstantMessagesSend and ReceiveInstant MessagesDouble-click the Windows LiveMessenger icon in the notificationarea of the taskbar, and then signin, if necessary.When a message arrives, an alertappears. Click the alert to openWindows Live Messenger.Double-click a contact or right-click a contact group and thenclick Send an instant message tothis group.Type your message in the box atthe bottom of the window.To start a new line while typing,press Shift+Enter.If you want to handwrite yourmessage, click the Handwrite tab,and then ink your message usingthe formatting buttons.Click Send or press Enter, and thenwait for a reply.If you want to add another personto the conversation, click theAction menu, click Invite a contactto join this conversation, and thendouble-click the person you wantto add.When you’re done, click the Closebutton to end the session.7654321375Click to changeparticipant options4Participant displaypicture
  • 239. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 219Format Message TextIn the Conversation window, clickthe Font button.Specify the font, font style, size,color, and effect you want, andpreview the result in the samplebox.Click OK.Type and send the formattedmessage.Apply a Background or ColorScheme to the ConversationWindow◆ Background. In the Conversationwindow, click the Backgroundbutton, and then select abackground. To set options orremove a background, clickShow all.◆ Color Scheme. In the Conversationwindow, click the Color Schemebutton, and then select a color orclick More Colors to select acustom color.4321Did You Know?You can search for contacts. Click inthe Find a contact or number box atthe top of the main Messenger win-dow, and then start typing to displayresults. Click the Click here to cleartext button to clear the search.32Color Scheme buttonBackgroundbutton
  • 240. 220As you type an instant message, you can format your messages byinserting graphical symbols called emoticons, such as a happy face,which help convey your emotions, or graphical animations, such as asa wink (New!). If your conversation needs a nudge to get people con-versing, you can use the Nudge button (New!). If you want to add a lit-tle audio to an instant message, you can record a voice clip (New!)and send it to others involved in the conversation. The voice clipappears in the conversation window and plays automatically. You needa microphone to record a voice clip and audio speakers to hear a clip.Adding Symbols andVoice to an InstantMessageInsert EmoticonsIn the Conversation window, clickthe Emoticons button.Click the icon you want to insertinto the conversation.◆ To create, modify, or remove anemoticon, click Show all.TIMESAVER You can also typea sequence of characters toquickly insert emoticons as youtype your message. To find out thecharacters, point to an icon on theEmoticons menu.21Did You Know?You can insert a nudge message tokeep a conversation going. In theConversation window, click the Nudgebutton.You can create your own blog. A blogis short for Web log, which is an onlinejournal. In the main Messenger win-dow, click the Get your own space but-ton. In the Create your Windows LiveSpace Web site, follow the onlineinstructions.You can save an instant message. Inthe Conversation window, click the Filemenu, click Save As, select a folderlocation, type a file name, and thenclick Save.12EmoticonNudge button
  • 241. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 221Insert a WinkIn the Conversation window, clickthe Wink button.Click the wink icon you want toinsert into the conversation.◆ To preview or remove a wink,click Show all.Record and Play a Voice ClipIn the Conversation window, pointto the Voice Clip button.Press and hold down the VoiceClip button or press F2, and thenrecord your voice message.Release the button or key to sendthe voice message.To play or stop a voice clip, clickPlay / Stop in the Conversationwindow.TIMESAVER Press Esc to stopthe voice clip.432121Did You Know?You can save a voice clip. In theConversation window, click Save As ordrag it from the conversation windowonto your desktop or into a folder.You reuse a voice clip in another con-versation. In the Conversation window,drag a voice clip to another anotherconversation window.1Inserted wink2Click to play1click tosave theclip4
  • 242. If you no longer want to receive instant messages from a specificcontact, you can block the contact from directly sending you instantmessages. When you block a contact, you appear to be offline to theperson, who doesn’t know blocking is turned on. If another contactinvites you and someone you blocked into a conversation, the blockedperson can send you messages indirectly. Blocking a contact movesthem from your Allow list to your Block list. Deleting a blocked contactfrom your Contacts list does not remove the block.222Blocking a ContactBlock or Unblock a ContactSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click Privacy.Select the contacts you want toblock, and then click Block.Select the contacts you don’t wantto block, and then click Allow.To find out which users haveadded you to their Contacts list,click View, and then click Close.Click OK.654321Did You Know?You can quickly block or unblock acontact. Right-click the contact, andthen click Block contact or Unblockcontact. You can also click the Blockbutton during a conversation.You can block a person not in yourContacts list. Click the Actions menu,and then click Send an instant mes-sage, type the person’s e-mail addressin the results list box, click OK, andthen click the Block button.You can allow others to add you totheir Contacts list without seekingyour approval. Select Tools, clickOptions, click Privacy in the left pane,clear the Alert me when other peopleadd me to their contact list check box,and then click OK.62534
  • 243. While you are conversing in Windows Live Messenger, you can send acontact a single file. You can send many different types of files, includ-ing documents, photos, and music. When you send a file, a request totransfer the file is sent to your contact. You are notified when your con-tact accepts or declines your request. Before you receive files over theInternet, make sure you have up-to-date virus protection software onyour computer. When you receive a file, the Windows Live Messengerprovides security information to help you understand more about thefile. If your computer is located on a network behind a firewall, youmight not be able to send files to those outside the firewall. If you wantto send files to those behind the firewall, you need to manually openthe connection; check with your network administrator for details.Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 223Sending a File Duringan Instant MessageSend a Single FileClick the Actions menu, point toSend other, and then click Send asingle file.Select the contact you want tosend the file to.Click OK.Select the file you want to send.Click Open.To open a file, click the link in theConversation window to start thetransfer.654321Did You Know?You can follow up on a conversationwith an e-mail. Right-click the contact,point to Send other, and then clickE-mail.You can show or hide your displaypicture from contacts. Select Tools,click Options, click General in the leftpane, select or hide the Show displaypictures from others check box, andthen click OK.You can sort or filter contacts. Clickthe Contacts menu, point to Sort con-tacts by or Filter contacts, and thenselect the options you want.546
  • 244. 224With Sharing Folders (New!), you can share the same files with morethan one contact and update the content automatically. To share ortransfer files, you and your contact must have Windows XP orWindows Vista and Windows Live Messenger 8 or later. You also needto set sharing options in Windows Liver Messenger. After you’re set up,you can simply drag files to share them. When you are online with acontact, the files you share are automatically synchronized. When youno longer want to share files with a contact using Sharing Folders, youcan remove the contact’s shared folder, which doesn’t delete them fromcontacts. To keep your computer safe, you can set options to rejectpotentially unsafe files and install the free Windows Live OnCare safetyscanner to check for viruses, and other disk management operations.Sharing Files UsingShared FoldersSet Sharing Folders OptionsSelect Tools, and then clickOptionsIn the left pane, click SharingFolders.Select the Use a sharing folderwhen I drag a file onto a contact’sname in my contact list check box.Select the When I drag a file ontoa contact’s name, automaticallycreate a sharing folder if thatcontact doesn’t already have onecheck box.In the left pane, click File Transfer.To reject potentially unsafe filetypes, select the Automaticallyreject file transfers for knownunsafe file types check box.When you try to share a potentiallyunsafe file an exclamation pointappears over the icon for the file,and a Tooltip describes thesecurity reason for blocking thefile.To scan received files, select theScan files for viruses using checkbox, and click Browse or clickInstall to use the free virusscanner for Messenger.Click OK.876543213428675
  • 245. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 225Share Files Using a SharedFolder◆ To share files, drag them from yourfile folder onto the contact in themain Messenger window or dragthem onto the message area in theConversation window.◆ To add files, pause sharing, orview the Activity log, click theSharing Folders button in the mainMessenger window.IMPORTANT If a contactdeletes a shared file, the local fileon your hard drive is permanentlydeleted. However, if you delete ashared file, you can recover it fromthe recycle bin.Stop Sharing FilesSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click SharingFolders.Select the contact you want toremove.Click Remove.Click OK.54321Sharing folderShareddocuments53Screen Tip42
  • 246. 226When used with Windows Vista and the right hardware, Windows LiveMessenger provides state-of-the-art computer communications fea-tures. With Windows Live Messenger, you can talk to others over theInternet as you do on a regular phone, and you can use video to seeothers and let others see you as you converse (New!). Once you setup your computer hardware—Webcams, microphones and speakers—and related software, you’re ready to communicate over the Internet.You have two communication choices: audio only, and audio and video.With audio only, you speak into a microphone and hear the other per-son’s response over your computer’s speakers. With audio and video,you send video to others so they receive live images as well as sound.If the contacts you call don’t have a video camera, they will see you,but you won’t see them.Making a Video Callwith the InternetHave a Video ConversationDouble-click the Windows LiveMessenger icon in the notificationarea of the taskbar, and then signin, if necessary.Double-click the contact you wantto send an instant message.Click the Video Call button, andthen wait for the other person toaccept the invitation.Use the controls to adjust thevolume of the speakers ormicrophone.Start talking.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.654321Did You Know?You can set Webcam video options.Click the Actions menu in theConversation window, point to Video,and then select commands to showyour Webcam or View a contact’sWebcam.3 6
  • 247. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 227Windows Live Messenger allows you to dial regular phones through avoice service provider using the Internet or a modem on your computer.Once the modem connects to the number you are dialing, called theremote party, you can pick up your phone and talk. This feature is use-ful for people who would otherwise be spending a fortune in longdistance calling. It’s also helpful for people who spent a lot of time ontheir computer. When you use Windows Live Messenger, having yourmodem’s speakers on is helpful so you can hear what is actually hap-pening with the connection. If your computer is located on a networkbehind a firewall, you might not be able to make phone calls; checkwith your network administrator for details.Making a Phone Callwith the InternetMake a Phone Call WithWindows Live MessengerClick the Actions menu, point toCall, and then select one of thefollowing commands:◆ Call a contact’s computer.◆ Call a contact’s phone.◆ Call a phone.TIMESAVER If you’re in aconversation, click Make a phonecall button, and then select aphone number.If you need a voice serviceprovider, follow the instructions tosign up.Select a contact or type a phonenumber, including the area code(even for local calls), and thentype a name after it for easyidentification on your list.Click OK or Call.When you call a contact for thefirst time, click the link for theWindows Live Call Web site toauthenticate your ID.Use the controls to adjust thevolume of the speakers ormicrophone.543212Click to make aphone callClick to access the menu to make aspecific type of phone callClick to start a call while in a conversationConnected call
  • 248. 228If you have a wireless device, such as a Web-enabled cellular phone, apager, a Smartphone, Pocket PC Phone, or Pocket PC, you can set it upto receive instant messages using Windows Live Messenger (New!).When you send a message to a contact’s mobile device, the messageincludes your e-mail address and phone number unless the mobiledevice doesn’t support the feature. If your contact’s mobile device isnot turned on, the message might be delayed or not arrive at all.Sending a Messageto a Mobile DeviceSet Up an Account fora Mobile DeviceSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click Phone.Click Mobile Settings.Follow the online instructions onthe Web site.When you’re done setting up amobile account, close yourbrowser, if necessary.Select the Allow people on mycontact list to send messages tomy mobile device check box.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can send messages to aSmartWatch using MSN Direct. SelectTools, click Options, click Phone in theleft pane, click Settings under MSNDirect, and then follow the onlineinstruction on the Web site to activateand setup an account.736254
  • 249. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 229Send a Message toa Mobile DeviceDouble-click the Windows LiveMessenger icon in the notificationarea of the taskbar, and then signin, if necessary.Right-click the contact you want tosend a message, point to Sendother, and then click Send amessage to a mobile device.◆ You can also, click the Actionsmenu, point to Send other, clickSend a message to a mobiledevice, select a contact, andthen click OK.Type your message.Click Send, and then wait for areply.4321For Your InformationMaking a Call Using Messenger and Your PhoneYou can use use Windows Live Messenger and Windows Live Call toplace a call with Windows Live Messenger from your phone. Beforeyou can use Window Live Call, you need to sign up for the service atthe Windows Live Call sign up Web page. You also need to place atleast one Windows Live Call from your computer before you can useyour phone. You can access a phone number in your contacts list or theenter the phone number you want to call. To call a contact, press the #key followed by the number, or enter the number you want to reachfrom any other PC mode screen. To call a number that isn’t in your con-tact list, switch to PC mode by pressing the Windows Live Messengeror PC connect button on your phone, or select the PC Call softkey, ifavailable.24Conversation3
  • 250. 230Sometimes the best way to fix a computer problem is to get help from afriend or colleague who knows how to solve it. If your friend or col-league lives too far away to help you in person, you can use RemoteAssistance within Windows Live Messenger and an Internet connec-tion to help you get the support and answers you need. You can ask atrusted contact in another location to connect to your computer overthe Internet and provide support in real time. After connecting to yourcomputer, you can invite a contact to view your desktop, chat onlineusing instant messages, talk online using a microphone and speakers,and send files. Instead of simply talking about a solution, sometimesyou need someone to show you how to perform the steps before youfully understand the procedure. With Remote Assistance, you can givea contact control of your computer whereby he or she can demonstratehow to perform the procedure using his or her mouse and keyboardwhile you watch in real time. If your computer is located on a networkbehind a firewall, you might not be able to use remote assistance;check with your network administrator for details.Getting RemoteAssistanceAsk for Remote AssistanceDouble-click the WindowsMessenger icon in the notificationarea of the taskbar, and then signin, if necessary.Double-click the contact you wantto send an instant message.Click the Actions menu, and thenclick Request remote assistance,and then wait for the other personto accept the invitation.Enter a password twice, and thenclick OK.Click Yes to let this personconnect to your computer.To have a conversation, type amessage to explain your problem,and then press Enter.If the person asks to take controlof your computer, click Yes or No.To take back control of yourcomputer, click Stop Sharing onthe toolbar.When you’re done, clickDisconnect, and then click Yes.987654321639 8
  • 251. Chapter 7 Holding Web Discussions and Video Conferences 231Provide Remote AssistanceSign-in to Windows Messenger,and then wait for an invitation toprovide remote assistance.◆ To offer remote assistance,select a contact, click theActions menu, and then clickRequest remote assistance.When you receive the invitation,click Accept, and then wait for theRemote Assistance window toopen.Wait, enter a password from theperson asking for assistance, andthen click OK.To have a conversation, type amessage to discuss the problem,and then press Enter.Watch the screen of the personyou want to help during theconversation.To take control of the person’scomputer, click the RequestControl button on the toolbar, andthen wait for the other person’sresponse.To give back control of the otherperson’s computer, click the StopSharing button on the toolbar.When you’re done, clickDisconnect, and then click Yes.If necessary, click Cancel to exitremote assistance and notconnection to another person.987654321For Your InformationSharing Games and ActivitiesIf you need to share information in a specific program or document withothers in a conference, you can use Windows Live Messenger to shareyour documents and programs. They cannot work with the documentuntil you give them access to it. The user who clicks the program win-dow “takes control” of the program and can then run any menu com-mands or make changes to the document. If you have a multi-playergame, such as Age of Empires II, installed on both computers, you canplay the game using Windows Live Messenger. To start an activity orgame, click the Actions menu, click Start an activity or Play a game,and then follow the on-screen instructions.428 Controlling other computer7
  • 252. 232Windows Live Messenger allows you to customize the program in manyways, including the display, the sign in process, message delivery,alerts and sounds, file sharing, file transfer, privacy, security, and con-nection status. To change program options, select a category in the leftpane of the Options dialog box, and then select or specify the individualoptions you want. On the left side of the main Messenger window, tabsprovide easy access to commonly used products and services. If thetab you use most often is at the bottom of the list, you can rearrangethe tabs to suit your own needs. If the tabs are in the way, you can hidethem all together.Customizing WindowsLive MessengerCustomize Windows LiveMessengerSelect Tools, and then clickOptions.In the left pane, click Messages.Select or clear the options todetermine how you wantmessages to appear or beresponded to.In the left pane, click Alerts andSounds.Select the alert check boxes youwant to use.Click the event you want to set thesound for, click Browse, select asound, and then click Open.In the left pane, click Tabs.To arrange tabs, select the tab youwant to move, and then click Up orDown.To hide tabs, select the Hide tabscheck box.Click OK.109876543212 43789 10
  • 253. Working with PicturesIntroductionWindows Vista makes it easy to store and work with your pic-tures using the Pictures folder.You can quickly access thefolder from the Start menu. From the Pictures folder you canview, organize, and share pictures with others on theInternet. When you download and save pictures from yourdigital camera or scanner to your computer, Windows storesthe digital images in the Pictures folder by default. (You canspecify an alternative location.)You can view your picturefiles as a slide show or in the Extra-Large view, which dis-plays a larger image above thumbnail images of the pictures.The Pictures folder also contains links to specialized picturetasks that help you share pictures with others, such as send-ing pictures in an e-mail, publishing pictures and documentson the Web, printing photographs, and ordering prints fromthe Internet.You can also create your own pictures or editexisting ones in Paint, a Windows accessory programdesigned for drawing and painting. Paint is useful for makingsimple changes to a picture, adding a text caption, or savinga picture in another file format.Windows Vista introduces Windows Photo Gallery (New!),which allows you to view, locate, organize, open, and editphotos and pictures. Windows Photo Gallery shows all thepictures and videos located in the Pictures folder. In WindowsPhoto Gallery, you can also print photos, order photosthrough an online service, e-mail photos and pictures usingyour e-mail program, create CDs or DVDs, and make a movieusing Windows Movie Maker.88What You’ll DoDraw a PictureEdit a PictureView PicturesManage Pictures in the Photo GalleryFix Pictures in the Photo GalleryE-mail a PictureFormat and Print PhotosOrder Photo Prints from the WebInstall a Scanner or Digital CameraTest a Scanner or Digital CameraScan a PictureDownload Digital Camera PicturesUse Pictures as a Screen SaverUse a Picture as a Desktop BackgroundSet Photo Gallery Options233
  • 254. Paint is a Windows accessory you can use to create and work withgraphics or pictures. Paint is designed to create and edit bitmap (.bmp)files, but you can also open and save pictures created in or for othergraphics programs and the Internet using several common file formats,such as .tiff, .gif, or .jpeg. A bitmap file is a map of a picture createdfrom small black, white, or colored dots, or bits. Paint comes with a setof tools in the Toolbox (located along the left edge of the window) thatyou can use for drawing and manipulating pictures. A tool remainsturned on until you select another tool in the Toolbox. In addition to thedrawing tools, you can also add text to a picture. When you create atext box and type the text, you can edit and format it, but once you des-elect the text box, the text becomes part of the picture, which you can’tedit.234Drawing a PictureDraw a PictureClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Paint.If you want, drag a resize handleon the canvas to resize it.Click a drawing tool.If available, click a fill option forthe selected tool.Click the color you want to usewith the left mouse button toselect the foreground color andthe right mouse button to selectthe background color.Drag the shapes you want byholding down one of the following:◆ The left mouse button to drawwith the foreground color.◆ The right mouse button to drawwith the background color.◆ The Shift key to constrain thedrawing to a proportional size,such as a circle, square, orhorizontal line.65432132Rectangle toolEllipse tool Rounded Rectangle toolPolygon toolLine toolCurve toolBrush toolPencil toolAirbrush tool5
  • 255. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 235Add Text to a PictureIn Paint, create or open the pictureyou want to modify.Click the Text tool.Drag a text box.Select the font, font size, and anyformatting you want to apply to thetext.Click in the text box, if necessary,and then type the text.Drag a text box resize handle toenlarge or reduce the text box.Edit and format the text.Click outside the text box todeselect it and change the text toa bitmap.IMPORTANT Once you clickoutside the text box to place thetext in the picture, the textbecomes part of the picture.Save a Picture in DifferentFormatsIn Paint, create or open the pictureyou want to save in a differentformat.Click the File menu, and then clickSave As.Select the drive and folder inwhich you want to save the file.Type a name for the file, or use thesuggested name.Click the Save as type list arrow,and then click a file format.Click Save.654321876543214865 326354
  • 256. After you create or open a picture, you can select all or part of thepicture and use commands on the Image menu, such as rotate, stretch,and invert colors, to further modify it in Paint. In addition to the drawingtools, you can also use painting tools, such as Fill With Color, Airbrush,Brush, Pencil, and Pick Color, to transform the picture. The Fill WithColor tool is useful if you want to color an entire item or recolor textletter by letter. If you need to remove part of a picture, you can use theEraser tool, which comes in four different sizes.236Editing a PictureModify a PictureIn Paint, create or open the pictureyou want to edit.Click the Free-Form Select tool toselect irregular shapes, or clickthe Select tool to select rectangleshapes.Drag the selection area you want.Click the Opaque Backgroundoption or the TransparentBackground option.Click the Image menu, and thenclick one of the following:◆ Flip/Rotate◆ Resize/Skew◆ Invert Colors◆ AttributesClick OK.Save the picture and exit Paint.7654321Did You Know?You can save part of a picture to a file.Select the part of the picture you wantto save, click the Edit menu, click CopyTo, select a folder, type a name, andthen click Save.You can quickly copy a selection.Hold down the Ctrl key, and then dragthe selection.42 3Change pictureresize and skew5
  • 257. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 237Fill Part of a PictureIn Paint, create or open the pictureyou want to edit.Click the color you want to fill, orclick the Pick Color tool and clicka color from the picture.Click the Fill With Color tool.Point the tip of the paint bucket tothe area you want to fill, and thenclick.Erase Part of a PictureIn Paint, create or open the pictureyou want to edit.To magnify an area of the screen,click the Magnifier tool, and thenclick the area you want to magnify.Click the Eraser tool.Click the Eraser size.Drag the Eraser over the area youwant to erase.If you make a mistake, click theEdit menu, and then click Undo torestore your last action.To restore the magnification, clickthe Magnifier tool, and then clickthe area again.76543214321Did You Know?You can replace any color with thebackground color. Set the foregroundcolor to the color to be replaced andthe background color to the replace-ment color, and then hold down theright mouse button and drag the Eraserover the area you want to replace.3 43 254
  • 258. Windows gives you several ways to view pictures. In a folder withpictures, you can use Extra Large Icons view to see a larger view of thepictures. In the Pictures folder, you can use the slide show feature todisplay pictures in a full screen slide show. If you want to preview pic-ture or open a picture to edit, you can double-click the file icon to usethe default program associated with the picture file type, or select thespecific program—such as Paint, Windows Photo Gallery, MicrosoftOffice Document Imaging, or Microsoft Office Picture Manager—youwant to use to make changes.238Viewing PicturesView a PictureClick the Start button, and thenclick Pictures.To view sample pictures, double-click the Sample Pictures folder.Click a picture to view informationabout the picture in the Detailspane.Click the Preview or Open buttonarrow, and then click the programyou want to open the picture.4321See AlsoSee “Understanding Faxes” on page411 for information on working withfaxes.4Details pane3Preview inPhoto Gallery
  • 259. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 239View Pictures as Extra LargeIconsClick the Start button, clickPictures, or open any other folderwith pictures you want to view.Click the Views button arrow, andthen click Extra Large Icons.View Pictures as a Slide ShowClick the Start button, clickPictures, or open any other folderwith pictures you want to view.Select the pictures you want in theshow, or click one picture to seeall the pictures.Click the Slide Show button, andthen watch the show.To manually advance to the nextslide, click anywhere in thepicture.To control the slide show, right-click the screen, and then click thecontrol you want, includingShuffle, Loop, or a Slide ShowSpeed (Slow, Medium, or Fast).To exit the slide show, press Esc orright-click the screen, and thenclick Exit.6543212123265
  • 260. 240Windows Photo Gallery (New!) is a program that allows you to view,locate, and edit pictures. Windows Photo Gallery shows all the picturesand videos located in the Pictures folder. However, you can add andview other folders on your computer. The left pane in Windows PhotoGallery displays a tree structure like the Folders list that allows you todisplay pictures by different criteria, including Pictures, RecentlyImported, Tags, Date Taken, Ratings, and Folders. To help you sort andsearch for pictures, you can add tags, ratings, and captions to pictures.The Search box used in all Explorer windows is also available. You canalso use the View button next to the Search box to change the iconthumbnail views, view a table of contents, or display groups and sorts.Managing Pictures inthe Photo GalleryView Pictures Using WindowsPhoto GalleryClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.To change the view, click the Viewbutton, and then select a view:Thumbnails, Thumbnails withText, Tiles, Group By, Sort By, orTable of Contents.Use the tree structure in the leftpane to view the pictures:◆ Pictures or videos. Under AllPictures and Videos, clickPictures or Videos.◆ Imported Pictures. UnderRecently Imported, clickRecent Imports.◆ Tags. Under Tags, click the tagyou want to sort by.◆ Date. Under Date Taken, clickthe date you want to sort by.◆ Ratings. Under Ratings, clickthe rating you want to sort by.◆ Folders. Under Folders, clickthe picture related folder youwant to display.Use the controls at the bottom ofthe window to change the displaysize, play slide show, deletepictures, and rotate pictures.43213 24
  • 261. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 241Add Tags, Ratings, or CaptionsClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.Select the photo you want to addtags, a rating, or a caption.Click the Info button on the toolbar.To add a tag, click Add Tags, typethe tag you want, and then pressEnter.To add a rating, click the ratingstar you want.To add a caption, click <AddCaption>, type the caption youwant, and then press Enter.When you’re done, click the Closebutton in the Info pane.Find Pictures in WindowsPhoto GalleryClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.Click in the Search box.Type the work or phrase you wantto find associated with the picture.As you type, the pictures thatmatch the criteria display in thegallery.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.4321765432132574643Searchresults2
  • 262. 242If you need to edit a picture, you can use Windows Photo Gallery(New!) to adjust brightness, contrast, and color, and to remove redeye. You can also crop a picture. If the colors in a picture don’t lookright, you can use Auto Adjust to enhance picture by changing thebrightness (light), contrast (dark), color temperature, tint, or saturation.Color temperature allows you to make the colors warmer (red) orcooler (blue); tint modifies the color cast (add or remove green); andsaturation changes color vividness. If you don’t like the changes madeby Auto Adjust, you can use Adjust Color to change the individual colorattributes.Fixing Pictures in thePhoto GalleryFix Pictures Using WindowsPhoto GalleryClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.Select the photo you want to fix.Click the Fix button on the toolbar.Click Auto Adjust.To adjust brightness and contrast,click Adjust Exposure, and thendrag the sliders.To adjust color temperature, tint,or saturation, click Adjust Color,and then drag the sliders.To crop a picture, click CropPicture, select a proportion ordrag a selection, and move theselection, and then click Apply.To fix red eye, click Fix Red Eye,and then drag a rectangle aroundthe eye you want to fix.If you don’t like the changes, clickthe Undo button arrow, and thenselect the options you want toundo or click Undo All.When you’re done, click the BackTo Gallery button.109876543219105683 47
  • 263. If you have one or more photos, pictures, or documents that you wantto share with others, you can send them in an e-mail as attachments.Before you send photos or pictures in an e-mail as an attachment, youtypically need to resize them in a separate graphics program so yourrecipient can view them with minimal scrolling, open your e-mailprogram, and then attach the files. With Windows you can send aphoto or picture in an e-mail message without having to resize it in aseparate graphics program, or even open your e-mail program. Usingthe E-mail button on the toolbar in Windows Photo Gallery or anyExplorer window, Windows simply asks how you want to size thephotos and pictures, and then opens an e-mail message window withthe attached files from your default e-mail program. All you need to dois address the message, add any message text, and then send it.Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 243E-mailing a PictureE-mail a Photo or PictureIn Windows Photo Gallery or anExplorer window, open the foldercontaining the picture or folderyou want to e-mail.Select the pictures or a folder withpictures you want to e-mail.Click the E-mail button on thetoolbar.Click the Picture size arrow, andthen select the resolution size youwant: Smaller: 640 x 480, Small:800 x 600, Medium: 1024 x 768,Large: 1280 x 1024, or OriginalSize.Click Attach to open your e-mailprogram, displaying an e-mailmessage with a file attachment.Type an e-mail address.Click Send.7654321See AlsoSee “Sending and Retrieving a File”on page 180 for information on sendinga file in an e-mail message.5342
  • 264. Windows makes it easy to format and print photographs from WindowsPhoto Gallery, which allows you to print photographs. During theprocess, you can select the photo(s) to print, the paper type, and apage layout, such as full-page prints, contact-sheet prints, 4 x 6-inchprints, 5 x 7-inch prints, 8 x 10-inch prints, 3.5 x 5-inch prints, and walletsize prints. To print a photo from your computer, you need a colorprinter and special photo paper. In order to get the best results whenyou print photographs, set your printer resolution to the highest settingfor the best quality output, and use high-quality glossy paper designedspecifically for printing photographs. Check your printer documentationfor the best resolution setting suited to print your photographs. Whenyou print photographs with a high resolution setting, the printingprocess might take longer. Many printer manufacturers also makepaper designed to work best with their printers; check your printermanufacturer’s Web site for more information.244Formatting andPrinting PhotosFormat and Print a PhotoIn Windows Photo Gallery or anExplorer window, open the foldercontaining the photo or folder youwant to print.Select the photos you want toprint.Click the Print button on thetoolbar, and then click Print (inWindows Photo Gallery).Specify the printer options youwant:◆ Click the Printer arrow, andthen select a printer.◆ Click the Paper size arrow, andthen select a paper size.◆ Click the Quality arrow, andthen click a resolution.Select photo size you want.Specify the number of copies youwant.Select or clear the Fit picture toframe check box.Click Print, and then follow anyprinter specify instructions.8765432184756
  • 265. If you have digital photographs taken from a digital camera or scannedinto your computer, you can send your digital photographs to an onlineprinting company where they create photo prints and send them toyour mailing address. Windows makes the process easy from WindowsPhoto Gallery, which walks you through the ordering process. You’llneed to provide print sizes, quantities, and billing and shipping informa-tion to complete the order.Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 245Ordering Photo Printsfrom the WebOrder Photo Prints from the WebIn Windows Photo Gallery, openthe folder containing the photo orfolder you want to print.Select the photos you want tosend to an online printingcompany.Click the Print button on thetoolbar, and then click OrderPrints.Select the printing company youwant to send your photos.Click Send Pictures.If necessary, click Send.Follow the remaining steps toplace an order with the specificprinting company.7654321546
  • 266. Windows makes it easy to install a scanner or digital camera on yourcomputer using plug-and-play. In most cases, all you need to do is turnoff your computer, plug in the hardware device, and restart yourcomputer. Windows recognizes the new hardware and installs it. If forsome reason Windows doesn’t recognize the hardware, you can start awizard, which walks you through the installation process.246Installing a Scanneror Digital CameraInstall a Scanner or DigitalCameraPlug your scanner or camera intoyour computer to start theScanner and Camera wizard.If the wizard doesn’t open, clickthe Start button, click ControlPanel, double-click the Scannersand Cameras icon, and then clickAdd Device.Click Next to continue.Click the manufacturer of thescanner or camera you want toinstall, click the device name, andthen click Next to continue.TROUBLE? If your scanner orcamera is not listed, try to install itusing the Device Manager.Connect your device to yourcomputer, select a port, and thenclick Next to continue.Type a name for the device, or usethe suggested one, and then clickNext to continue.Click Finish.65432114
  • 267. After you install a scanner or digital camera on your computer, it’s agood idea to test the hardware device to make sure it’s workingproperly. When you test a scanner or digital camera, Windows checksto see if the hardware device is communicating with the operatingsystem.Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 247Testing a Scanner orDigital CameraTest a Scanner or DigitalCameraClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theScanners and Cameras icon inClassic view.Right-click the scanner or camerayou want to test, and then clickProperties.Click the General tab.Click Test Scanner or Test Camera.A message appears with theresults of the test.Click OK.Click OK.654321Did You Know?You can remove a scanner. Click theStart button, click Control Panel, dou-ble-click the System icon in Classicview, click Device Manager in the leftpane, click the plus sign (+) next toImaging devices, select the scanneryou want to remove, click the Uninstallbutton on the toolbar, and then followthe on-screen instructions.534
  • 268. Windows Vista makes it easy to scan pictures with Windows PhotoGallery (New!) and Windows Fax and Scan (New!). A scanner is like aphotocopy machine on which you can lay photographs, books, andother documents that you want to save in digital form on your com-puter. In addition to scanning photographs, many high resolution scan-ners also allow you to scan a negative from a film strip and enlarge it.You use Windows Photo Gallery to start the scanning process and storethe scanned photo in the in Pictures folder. With Windows Fax andScan, you can choose scanning preferences, such as picture type, res-olution (the number of dots per inch (dpi), preview the scanned picture,adjust the scan area, and select a graphic format. In order to use thescanner features of Windows, you need to have a scanner attachedand installed on your computer.248Scanning a PictureScan a PicturePlace the picture on the scanner.Click the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.Click the File button, and thenclick Import from Camera orScanner.Select the scanner you want touse.Click Import.The New Scan dialog box fromWindows Fax and Scan opens.◆ You can also access this dialogbox from Windows Fax andScan. Click the Start button,point to All Programs, and thenclick Windows Fax and Scan.The default settings for scanning adocument are automaticallyselected.Specify the options you want forthe new scan. Some importantones include:◆ Click the Profile button arrow,and then click Photo.◆ Click the File type list, and thenclick the file type you want.65432154
  • 269. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 249For Your InformationSelecting the Appropriate File FormatEach file type has a different format and recommended use. JPG(Joint Photographic Experts Group; also known as JPEG) and PNG(Portable Network Graphics) are graphic file formats commonly usedon web pages, while BMP (Bit-mapped) and TIF (Tagged Image FileFormat, also known as Tiff) are file formats used in documents. Theformat specifies how the information in the file is organizedinternally. JPG and PNG formats are compressible, which means thatthe file size is smaller and transfers over the Internet faster. Each fileformat uses a different compression method, which produces differ-ent results when you display the graphic files. JPG is designed forphotographs and supports millions of colors, but loses some imagequality by discarding image data to reduce the file size. PNG isdesigned for web graphics and supports millions of color withoutlosing image quality, but not all web browsers fully support itscapabilities without using a plug-in, which is a software add-oninstalled on your computer. TIF is designed for all graphics and col-ors and one of the most widely used graphic formats, but the file sizeis large. BMP is the standard Windows graphic format and is similarto TIF.◆ Click the Resolution (DPI) list,and then click the resolutionyou want.◆ Adjust the brightness andcontrast to the settings youwant.Select or clear the Preview orscan images as separate filescheck box.To preview the scan, clickPreview, and then make anyadjustments you want before thefinal scan.Click Scan.Click the Tag these pictures(optional) list, type a tag name.Click Import.Windows Photo Gallery displaysthe scanned picture.1110987See AlsoSee “Installing a Scanner or DigitalCamera” on page 246 for informationon installing a scanner.Did You Know?You can change where WindowsPhoto Gallery stores scanned pictures.In Windows Photo Gallery, click theFile button, click Options, click theImport tab, click the Settings for list,and then click Scanners. Click Browsenext to the Import to list, and thenselect the location you want.768 9
  • 270. A digital still camera stores pictures digitally rather than on film. Themajor advantage of digital still cameras is that making photos is fastand inexpensive. In order to use the digital camera features ofWindows, you need to have a digital still or video camera attached andinstalled on your computer. When you connect a digital camera to yourcomputer, Windows Vista display the AutoPlay dialog, where you canchoose to import or view files in the Camera window. When you importpictures, the files are store and made available in Windows PhotoGallery. If you don’t use AutoPlay, you can also use an Import commandin Windows Photo Gallery or the Camera window. You can use theCamera window available from the Computer window to view picturesthat you have already taken with the camera and copy them in a folderon your computer, or delete pictures from your camera.250Downloading DigitalCamera PicturesDownload Pictures from aCameraConnect the digital camera to yourcomputer, and follow instructionsto install and recognize thecamera.If the AutoPlay dialog box opens,click Import Pictures to import thepictures and complete theprocess.If the AutoPlay dialog box doesn’topen, continue.Click the Start button, and thenclick Computer.Right-click the digital camera icon,and then click Import Pictures.◆ You can also click the Startbutton, point to All Programs,click Windows Photo Gallery,click the File button, and thenclick Import from Camera orScanner.To change import settings, clickthe Options link, select the optionsyou want, and then click OK.Click Import.Windows Photo Gallery opens bydefault to display the pictures.65432125 6
  • 271. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 251Manage Pictures on the CameraConnect the digital camera to yourcomputer.If the AutoPlay dialog box opens,click Open this device to viewfiles, and then skip to Step 4.If the AutoPlay dialog box doesn’topen, continue.Click the Start button, and thenclick Computer, and then double-click the Camera icon associatedwith the digital camera.Double-click the removablestorage icon, and any folders todisplay the pictures stored on thedigital camera.Click a picture, and then performany of the following commands:◆ Right-click a picture, and thenclick Preview to display thepicture in Windows PhotoGallery.◆ Right-click a picture, and thenclick Open to display thepicture the default program.◆ Click the Edit menu, click Copyto Folder, select a folder, andthen click Copy.◆ Right-click a picture, and thenclick Delete.5432145
  • 272. 252Instead of using standard screen savers provided by Windows, you canuse your own pictures to create a slide show screen saver. Windowsdisplays all the pictures, which you have designated in a folder, tocreate as a full screen slide show. You can add or remove pictures fromthe folder to modify the slide show.Using Pictures asa Screen SaverUse Pictures as a Screen SaverIf you want to create a customfolder for pictures, create a folder,and then place the pictures youwant to use in the slide show inthe folder.Right-click a blank area of thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Screen Saver.◆ You can also click the Filebutton in Windows PhotoGallery, and then click ScreenSaver Setting to open thisdialog box.Click the Screen Saver list, andthen click Photos.Click Settings.Select the option to use picturesfrom the Photo Gallery or your ownfolder. If necessary, click Browse,select the folder with yourpictures, and then click OK.Click the Slide Show speed list,and then select the speed youwant.Click Save.Click Preview, and then click themouse to stop it.Click OK.1098765432110459768
  • 273. Chapter 8 Working with Pictures 253Instead of using one of the pictures provided by Windows, you canselect a picture on your hard disk or from a web page as the desktopbackground. You can use Paint or any graphics program to create newbackground designs or change existing ones. Acceptable formats forbackground files are Bitmap (the format of a Paint file), JPEG (the for-mat of an Internet graphic file), or HTM (the format of a web page).After you set a picture as the desktop background, Windows adds thepicture to the Background list on the Desktop tab in the DisplayProperties dialog box. When you use a picture from a web page,Windows saves it in the Background list as Internet ExplorerBackground. Each new picture from a web page you set as a back-ground replaces the previous one.Using a Picture as aDesktop BackgroundSet a Picture as the BackgroundOpen the folder or the Web pagewith the picture you want to set asthe background.Right-click the picture.Click Set as Desktop Backgroundfor a picture file, or click Set asBackground for a Web picture.If the picture doesn’t appear onyour desktop, continue.Right-click a blank area of thedesktop, and then clickPersonalize.Click Desktop Background.Click the picture you set as thebackground.Click OK.76543212376
  • 274. 254Windows Photo Gallery allows you to set general and import options.The general options allow you to show pictures and video previews intooltips, specify how long to keep original photos that are fixed, andwhether to get program update alerts. The import options allow you tospecify import settings for cameras, CDs and DVDs, or Scanners. Theimport settings specify where Windows Photo Gallery import picturesbased on date and tag criteria. As you specify settings, you can viewan example of the criteria, so you can better determine if the importsettings are what you want. In addition, you can set other options thatallow you to rotate pictures, open Windows Photo Gallery, erase pic-ture from the camera, or receive a prompt to add tags.Setting Photo GalleryOptionsSet Windows Photo GalleryOptionsClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Photo Gallery.Click the File button, and thenclick Options.Click the General tab.◆ Tooltips. Select to show pictureand video previews in tooltips.◆ Save original pictures. Select adelete option for originalpictures.◆ Check for updates. Select toget update alerts.Click the Import tab.◆ Settings for. Select Cameras,CDs and DVDs, or Scanners◆ Import to. Select a location.◆ Folder name. Select a foldercriteria based on date and tag.◆ File name. Select an option topreserve tags and file names.◆ Other options. Select or clearthe check boxes you want.Click OK.54321345
  • 275. Working with WindowsMedia PlayerIntroductionYou can use Windows Media Player (WMP version 11) to playsounds, music, and digital movies on your computer and onthe Internet, or listen to radio stations from all over theworld. In addition, you can play and copy CDs, rip musicfrom CDs, create your own CDs, play DVDs or VCDs, andcopy music and videos to portable devices, such as portabledigital audio players and portable PCs. Using Windows MediaPlayer requires a sound card, speakers, and an Internet con-nection to view the Media Guide and other online stores,look for music licenses, and listen to radio stations on theInternet.Windows also comes with Sound Recorder, a soundrecording utility program you can use to create and modify asound.You can use the sound to indicate a Windows event,such as starting Windows or if an error has occurred. UsingSound Recorder requires a sound card, speakers, and amicrophone.In addition to Windows Media Player, you can also useWindows Media Center to play media files on your computeror on the Web. Windows Media Center (New!) is an entertain-ment system integrated into your computer that lets youwatch live or recordedTV, play video and watch pictures, lis-ten to music and radio using an FM tuner or the Internet, playand burn CDs or DVDs, browse online media, and playgames.You can also use Windows Media Center Extenders toadd entertainment devices—such as aTV, DVD player, digitalcamera, or Xbox 360—to your system and control each onefrom Windows Media Center within a networked environ-ment.99What You’ll DoStart, Update, and View WindowsMedia PlayerPlay a Music CD, DVD, or VCD MovieControl the VolumeBrowse the Media Guide andOnline StoresListen to Radio StationsPlay Media Files and the PlaylistsRip CD MusicCopy Media Files to a CD orPortable DeviceAdd Functionality to Media PlayerEnhance the Media Player DisplayChange the Media Player LookView and Play Music FilesCreate a Sound FileAssociate a Sound with an EventStart, Navigate, and CustomizeWindows Media CenterFind and View Windows MediaCenter Files255
  • 276. Before you can use Windows Media Player, you need to check to makesure you have the latest version (11 or later) installed on your computerusing the About Windows Media Player command on the Help menu forthe current player. If it’s not, you can download and install it from theWeb at You start Windows MediaPlayer like any other Windows program. You can use the Start menu ora button on the Quick Launch toolbar. After you start Windows MediaPlayer, you should check for software updates on the Internet.Microsoft is continually adding features and fixing problems. You canuse the Help menu in Windows Media Player to access the updates.256Starting and UpdatingWindows MediaPlayerStart and Update WindowsMedia PlayerClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Media Player.Click the Help menu, and thenclick Check for Updates.Follow the wizard instructions tocomplete the upgrade.To move around, click the tasktabs along the top of the windows.The arrows below the tabs provideaccess additional task options. Youcan use the Back and Forwardbutton to retrace previous steps.4321Did You Know?You can show and hide the menu bar.To show or hide the menu bar, click theLayout Options button, and then clickShow Classic Menus.You can automatically check for soft-ware updates. Click the Tools menu,click Options, click the Player tab, andthen click the Once a day, Once aweek, or Once a month option.You can display Media Player as abutton on the taskbar. Right-click ablank area of the taskbar, point toToolbars, and then click WindowsMedia Player.For Your InformationWhat’s New in Windows Media Player 11Windows Media Player 11 comes with a new streamline design thatmakes it easier to access top activities and common tasks, such as rip-ping from CDs, burning to CDs, and syncing to portable devices. WMPnow integrates tightly with with URGE, a digital music service fromMTV networks. WMP supports more portable devices and improvessyncing features to make it easy to take your music with you. Improvedfunctionality lets you create custom CDs. A new media sharing featurelets you stream the contents of your library to networked devices.12
  • 277. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 257Viewing the Media Player WindowTabsPlayback controls Switch tocompactmode buttonLibrarymediaSearch andlayout optionsRestore button;change tofull playerFull PlayerMini Player Show Video and Visual-ization window buttonPlaybackcontrolsCreate PlaylistCompact PlayerMusicfilesPlayback controls Return toFull Screen
  • 278. Windows allows you to play music on your computer in the backgroundwhile you work. After you insert a music CD into your CD-ROM driveand the music starts to play, you can minimize Windows Media Playerand continue to work with other programs on your computer. If you areconnected to the Internet when you play a music CD, Windows MediaPlayer tries to locate information about the CD from the Internet, suchas the name of the artist and the songs on the album. If the informationis not available, the track number of each song displays instead.258Playing Musicfrom CDsPlay a Music CDInsert a music CD into yourCD-ROM drive.If the Audio dialog box appears,click Play audio CD (usingWindows Media Player).The Windows Media Playerwindow appears, and the CDstarts to play on the NowPlaying tab.To pause the music, click thePause button.To stop the music, click the Stopbutton.To play a specific song, double-click the song in the list.To play the previous or next song,click the Previous or Next button.Click the Minimize button tocontinue to listen while you work,or click the Close button to exit.7654321Did You Know?You can play CD songs in randomorder. Click the Turn Shuffle On button.You can stop a song from playing.Right-click the song in the list, andthen click Remove from list.You can play a CD continuously. Clickthe Play menu, and then click Repeat.246RepeatVolume5Shuffle73 Mute
  • 279. If you have a DVD drive and decoder hardware or software on yourcomputer, you can play DVD movies with Windows Media Player. If youdon’t have a decoder, you can purchase one from a third party manu-facturer. If you only have a CD player, you can play VCD movies. A VCDis similar to a DVD, yet the video quality is not as high. When you play aDVD or VCD movie, a list of titles appear with a section of content fromthe movie. You can use the titles to browse through the contents of theDVD or VCD.Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 259Playing a DVD or VCDMoviePlay a DVD or VCD MovieInsert a DVD into your DVD driveor a VCD into your CD drive.If the Audio dialog box appears,click the option to play the DVD orVCD, and then click OK.The Windows Media Playerwindow appears, and the DVDor VCD starts to play.To expand the contents list of theDVD or VCD click the plus sign (+).To pause the movie, click thePause button.To stop the movie, click the Stopbutton.To play a specific title, double-click it in the list.To play the previous or nextsection of the movie, click thePrevious or Next button.Click the Close button to exit.87654321Did You Know?You can display captions and subtitlesfor a DVD. Click the Play menu, point toLyrics, Captions, and Subtitles, andthen click Off (toggles on and off) orDefault to select the language youwant to use.5864 3
  • 280. Windows comes with master volume controls that allow you to changethe volume of all devices and applications on the computer at once.You can increase or decrease the volume, or you can mute (turn off)the sound on your computer. The volume control is available by defaulton the notification area on the taskbar. The Volume icon makes it easyto increase or decrease the volume or mute the sound on your com-puter. In addition to changing the master volume on your computer, youcan also adjust the volume of specific devices, such as a CD or DVDplayer, without affecting the volume of other devices.260Controllingthe VolumeChange the Computer VolumeClick the Volume icon in thenotification area on the taskbar.Drag the slider to adjust thevolume to the level you want.TIMESAVER Press F9 toincrease the volume, press F8 todecrease the volume, or press F9to mute the volume.To mute the sound, click the Mutebutton.Press Esc or click off the menu toclose the volume controls.4321Did You Know?You can display the Volume icon onthe taskbar. Right-click the taskbar,click Properties, select the Volumecheck box, and then click OK.You can quickly display the Volume.Point to the Volume icon in the notifi-cation area.TroubleshootingTesting Your Sound HardwareIf your are having trouble hearing the sound from Windows MediaPlayer, the best place to start is to test your sound hardware. Click theStart button, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Sounds iconin Classic view. Next, click the Playback tab, click Configure, click Test,click Next, and then follow the instructions to test the hardware. Onceyou have tested the hardware, click Finish, and then click OK.1WindowsMediaPlayer23Mixer link
  • 281. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 261Set Volume Levelsfor Specific DevicesClick the Volume icon in thenotification area on the taskbar.Click the Mixer link.Drag the Speakers slider to adjustthe settings for the sound level youwant.The volume for the speakers is themain volume control.Drag the other sliders to adjust thesettings for the applications youwant.The volume for the speakers is themain volume control.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.54321Did You Know?You can set the recording volume.Right-click the Volume icon, clickRecording Devices, click a device,click Properties, click the Levels tab,adjust the volume level, and then clickOK twice.You can set the playback volume forleft and right speakers. Right-click theVolume icon, click Playback Devices,click a device, click Properties, clickthe Levels tab, adjust the volume level,click Balance, adjust L and R levels,click OK, and then click OK twice.354
  • 282. The Windows Media Player comes with a built-in Media Guide that isupdated daily with the latest music, movies, and entertainment newsfrom the Internet as well as access to your favorite online mediastores, such as URGE, Napster, Emusic, Mixplay, Getmusic, andSatellite Radio, where you can download music and more. WMP pro-vides special integration with URGE, an online music service providedby MTV networks. The Media Guide is a web page that provides links toa variety of media topics ranging from music to sports. Selecting a linkopens a web page with more information about the topic, or playsmusic or movies. Links to media files, such as music or movies, appearwith different speeds, which indicate the speed at which the file down-loads and plays on your Internet connection.262Browsing the MediaGuide and OnlineStoresUse the Media Guide and OnlineStoresStart Windows Media Player andconnect to the Internet, ifnecessary.Click the URGE button to displaythe URGE online store, or click thebutton arrow below it, and thenclick Media Guide or Browse allOnline Stores.If necessary, follow the on-screeninstructions to accept the licenseagreement and install any updates.Click the links you want on theweb page.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.4321Did You Know?You can Automatically hide menus. Toturn on/off Autohide menus, click theView menu, point to Menu Bar Options,and then click Autohide Menu Bar.Point to the menu bar location to showthe menu and point away to hide it.423
  • 283. You can use Windows Media Player to listen to radio stations aroundthe world that broadcast on the Internet. When you listen to a radiostation on the Internet, the audio continuously streams to your com-puter. The audio is partially downloaded and stored in a buffer, a tem-porary storage area, before it begins to play. As more audio streams,Windows Media Player continues to buffer it, which minimizes theinterruptions to the radio broadcast. When you play a radio station, aweb page for the radio station is displayed in your web browser behindWindows Media Player. While you listen to a radio station, you canbrowse the web or work in other programs.Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 263Listening to RadioStationsListen to the Radioon the InternetStart Windows Media Player andconnect to the Internet, ifnecessary.Click the arrow below the OnlineStores tab, and then click theMedia Guide.Click the link for Internet Radio.Click the name of the radio stationyou want to play.Click Play.TROUBLE? If Play is notavailable, click Visit Website, andthen play the radio station.To stop playing the radio station,click the Stop button.To add the station to your MyStations list, click Add to MyStations.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.87654321For Your InformationPlaying Media Over the Web or NetworkWhen you play music from the Internet, Windows Media Player usesstreaming, which is a method of delivering audio and video filesacross a network or the Internet without downloading an entire filebefore it plays. All streaming media files buffer before playing.Buffering is the process of sending a certain amount of informationto the computer before the content actually plays. Windows MediaPlayer monitors network conditions and makes adjustments toensure the best reception and playback. If the information in thebuffer runs out, you will notice a break in the playback. When a filefinishes playing, it is not stored on your computer.4 7 5 2 86
  • 284. With Windows Media Player, you can play sound and video files onyour computer. You can find and download sound and video files fromthe Internet or copy media files from a CD or DVD. The Library makes iteasy to organize your media. You can quickly search for media by nameor you can browse through the Library and select the media file thatyou want to play. When you start Windows Media Player for the firsttime or play a song, the Player automatically searches certain folderson your computer for media files and organize them by category, suchas Artist, Album, Genre, Rated Songs, or Year Released.264Playing Media FilesPerform a Quick SearchClick the Library tab.Click in the Search box.Type the text that you want tosearch by.TIMESAVER Click SearchResults in the Library list todisplay it at any time.Browse Media FilesClick the Library tab.Click the Select a Category buttonon the address bar, and thenselect a category, such as Music,Pictures, Video, Recorded TV, orOther Media.Select a view of that category inthe Navigation pane.To change the view:◆ View More. Click the list arrownext to a button on the addressbar, and then select a category.◆ View Less. Click a button onthe address bar to the left.43213211 32Results2 4 1
  • 285. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 265Change the Folders Monitoredby the PlayerClick the Library tab.To add a currently playing track orplaylist to the Library, play it now.Click the arrow below the Librarytab, and then click Add to Library.Select the My personal folders orMy folders and those of othersthat I can access option to selectthe folders to monitor.Click OK.Play Media Files from theLibraryClick the Library tab.Click an arrow next to thecategory you want to view.Click a category.Double-click the media file toplay it.432154321Did You Know?You can automatically add media filesto the Library when played. Click thearrow below the Now Playing tab,click More Options, select the Addmedia files to library when playedcheck box, and then click OK.You can delete a file from the library.Click the Library tab, right-click the fileyou want to remove, click Delete, clickthe Delete from library only or Deletefrom library and my computer option,and then click OK.1 3542 3 1 4
  • 286. Instead of playing digital media files, such as music tracks, video clips,or DVD segments, one at a time or in sequential order from a CD orDVD, you can use Windows Media Player to create a playlist. A playlistis a customized list or sequence of digital media that you want to listento or watch. A playlist allows you to group together media files andspecify the order in which you want to play back the media. You canmix and match the media files on your computer, a network, a CD, orthe Internet, creating a personal juke box. You can create an easyaccess general playlist called Now Playing List, create one with aspecify name, or specify criteria to create an Auto Playlist.266Playing Media Usinga PlaylistCreate a Now Playing ListClick the Library tab.Right-click the the media files,point to Add to, and then clickNow Playing.Click the Now Playing tab.To clear the Now Playing List, clickthe Clear List pane button.To save the list, click the NowPlaying button, click Save PlayingList As, type a name, specify alocation, and then click Save.Create a PlaylistClick the Library tab.Click the arrow below the Librarytab, and then click Create Playlist.Display the media files you want toadd to the playlist, and then dragthem to the playlist.Type a name for the playlist, andthe press Enter.Click Save Playlist to save theplaylist in the Playlists folder.◆ To save a playlist in a anotherformat, click the List button,and then click Save Playlist As.54321543211154322Now Playing5 43
  • 287. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 267Create an Auto PlaylistClick the Library tab.Click the arrow below the Librarytab, and then click Create AutoPlaylist.Type a name for the Auto Playlist.Select the criteria options youwant.Click OK.Add Media Files from Your HardDisk to a PlaylistOpen the folder window thatcontains the files or folders youwant to add to a playlist.Select the file(s) or folder(s) youwant to include in the playlist.Right-click the selection, and thenclick Add to ‘playlist name’.32154321Did You Know?You can quickly play a playlist. Clickth Library tab, and then double-clickthe playlist in the Navigation pane youwant to play.You can edit playlist. Click the Librarytab, right-click the playlist you want toedit, click Edit in Pane, make yourchanges, and then click Save Playlist.534213
  • 288. Windows Media Player (WPM) allows you to rip, or copy, one musictrack or an entire album from a music CD to your computer. When yourip music from a CD or download music from the Web to your computer,Windows copies music by the same artist into one folder in the Musicfolder and creates subfolders for each album. Windows gives you sev-eral ways to play the music on your computer.268Ripping CD MusicRip Tracks from a Music CDInsert your music CD into theCD-ROM drive.If the Autoplay dialog box appears,click Rip music from CD (usingWindows Media Player) to burnthe entire CD, or click Play audioCD (using Windows Media Player)to burn individual tracks.The WMP window opens, andplays on the Now Playing tab.Click the Rip tab.Clear the check boxes next to thetracks you don’t want to copy.Click Start Rip (toggles with StopRip).The music is copied to the Musicfolder unless you specify adifferent location.To stop the copy at any time, clickStop Rip.654321Did You Know?You can use error correction during acopy. Click the Tools menu, clickOptions, click the Devices tab, selectthe CD-ROM drive, click Properties,click Digital, select the Use errorcorrection check box, and thenclick OK.You can change the folder where youcopy media files. Click the Tools menu,click Options, click the Rip Music tab,click Change, select or create a newfolder, and then click OK.263TogglesbetweenStart4
  • 289. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 269Select Rip Music SettingsClick the arrow below the Rip tab,and then click More Options.To change the location whereWindows Media Player storesripped music, click Change, selecta new folder location, and thenclick OK.Select the format and copy settingyou want:◆ Windows Media Audio. Mostcommon WMA format withwidest range of quality and filesize.◆ Windows Media Audio(variable bit rate). High qualitywith variable file size.◆ Windows Media AudioLossless. Quality closest to theoriginal with high file size.◆ MP3. Common and flexibleformat.Drag the slider to adjust audioquality.Click OK.54321For Your InformationGetting a License to Copy MusicMost CD music is secured with a license to prevent illegal distribu-tion. A license is a legal agreement that specifies whether thelicense expires or how you can use the file. The terms of the licenseare entirely dependent upon the person or company that providedthe file. Windows Media Player cannot play licensed files without alicense. When you copy music from a CD with the Acquire LicensesAutomatically option selected, Windows Media Player searches theInternet for the license and copies it to your computer. If the licenseis not available, you can still acquire a license by copying the musicand selecting the Protect Content check box on the Rip Music tab inthe Options dialog box. As you copy the music, the licenses areissued. The license allows you to copy the music to your hard disk, aportable device, or a CD. If you want to view the license informationfor a file, right-click the file, click Properties, and then click theLicense Information tab. If you copy music without a license, youcould be violating the music’s copyright. You can avoid license prob-lems by backing them up. Click the Tools menu, click LicenseManagement, click Browse, select a folder, click OK, and then clickBackup Now.Did You Know?You can turn off music copy protec-tion. Click the Tools menu, clickOptions, click the Rip Music tab, andthen clear the Copy Protect Musiccheck box, and then click OK.2453
  • 290. Windows Media Player makes it easy to burn (copy) music to a CDusing a CD burner or copy the music and video you want to a portabledevice and keep it in sync. If you have a Portable Digital Media Player,such as an ipod or zune, you can download digital media from an onlinestore and play it on the go. Windows Media Player verifies that there isenough space for the selected files on the portable device and thenstarts the copying process. As the music copies, the amount of usedand free space on the portable device is displayed at the bottom of theMusic On Device pane. You can synchronize music, video, and picturefiles to the device so you can bring your whole library with you. You canchoose to automatically or manually sync your digital media betweenWMP and your device, known as a partnership. Set up Auto Synchonce, and everytime you connect your device to your computer, WMPupdates the digital media between them, so devices that allow you torate your music can automatically send them back to WMP.270Copying MediaFiles to a CD orPortable DeviceCopy Music to a CDClick the Burn tab, click the arrowbelow the Burn tab, and then clickthe type of disc you want to burn:audio CD or data CD or DVD.Insert a blank CD or DVD in yourCD recorder.If the Autoplay dialog box appears,click Burn an audio CD.If you need to erase your disc,right-click the drive in theNavigation pane, and then clickErase disc.If you need to clear the List pane,click the Clear List pane button.Drag the files you want to burnfrom the Details pane to the Listpane.To remove a file from the list, right-click the file, and then clickRemove from List.Drag the files in the list to arrangethem in the order you want.Click the Start Burn button.76543213436157
  • 291. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 271Copy Music to a Portable DeviceStart Windows Media Player, andthen connect the portable deviceto your computer.If sync setup is needed for thedevice, follow the wizardinstructions, and then click Finish.If you setup Auto Sync, synchron-ization begins, click Stop Sync.Click the Library tab.If you need to clear the List pane,click the Clear List pane button.Display and drag the media filesyou want to the sync list.Click the Sync tab.To change sync priority order, syncmethod, and other settings, clickthe arrow below the Sync tab,point to the device name, and thenclick Set Up Sync, specify options,and then click OK.To remove a file from the list, right-click the file, and then clickRemove from List.Click the Start Synch button.If you want to stop the sync, clickStop Sync.Upon completion, statusinformation appears next to filesindicating success or failure.1110987654321Did You Know?You can find a list of compatibleportable devices on the WindowsMedia web site. Open your browser,go to, andthen click the Music Players link.4 7610118Current status of the sync5
  • 292. Windows Media Player allows you to add functionality to the playerusing plug-ins. Plug-ins add or enhance the media experience withaudio and video effects, new rendering types, and visualizations.Before you can use a plug-in, you need to download it from the Weband add it to the Media Player. You can find lots of Media Player plug-ins at Before you download a plug-in, read theonline information about the plug-in for additional instructions.272Adding Functionalityto Media PlayerWork with Plug-InsClick the arrow below the NowPlaying tab, point to Plug-Ins, andthen click Options.To download a plug-in, click Lookfor plug-ins on the Web link, andthen follow the instructions on theWeb page.Select a plug-in category.Select a plug-in option, ifavailable.To modify a plug-in, clickProperties.To remove a plug-in, click Remove.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can download a creativity funpack for the Media Player. Open yourbrowser, go to,and then search for the Creativity FunPack for Windows Media Player down-load link.73645Plug-ins Web site
  • 293. Visualizations are plug-ins that display geometric shapes and color onthe Now Playing tab when you play music. Visualizations are groupedtogether into collections. You can add and remove visualizations ordownload additional collections from the Web. You can also displayspecial enhancement controls to change video settings, play speed, oraudio levels with a graphics equalizer, choose color effects, and send amedia link in an e-mail.Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 273Enhancing the MediaPlayer DisplaySelect VisualizationsClick the Now Playing tab.Click the arrow below the NowPlaying tab, and then point toVisualizations.Point to a category, and then clickthe visualization you want todisplay.TIMESAVER In Now Playing,right-click the display, point to acategory, and then click thevisualization you want.Select EnhancementsClick the Now Playing tab.Click the arrow below the NowPlaying tab, and then point toEnhancements.Click the enhancement you wantto display.Adjust the enhancement controls.When you’re done, click the Closebutton in the pane.543213211 2 315324
  • 294. Windows Media Player gives you the freedom of expression to changethe look, known as the skin, of the Media Player. Windows MediaPlayer includes several skins from which you can select the one youlike the best. When you select a skin, Windows Media Player changesfrom full mode to skin mode. You can use skins only when Media Playeris in skin mode. Skin mode displays a smaller player, which providesmore room on the screen for other programs.274Changing the MediaPlayer LookApply a SkinClick the View menu, and thenclick Skin Chooser.Click a design.Click Apply Skin.Use the controls to play a mediafile.To return to the full window, clickthe Return To Full Mode button.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+1 toreturn to full mode.To switch back to skin mode, clickthe View menu, and then clickSkin Mode.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+2 toreturn to skin mode.654321Did You Know?You can download more skins fromthe Internet. Click the View menu, clickSkin Chooser, click More Skins, clickthe link to the skin you want to down-load, follow the instructions, and thenclick View Now.You can delete a skin. Click the Viewmenu, click Skin Chooser, select theskin you want to delete, click theDelete Selected Skin button, and thenclick Yes.You can access a shortcut menu ofcommands in skin mode. PressShift+F10 to display a shortcut menu ofconvenient commands.2345
  • 295. You can view and play music files with relative ease in the Musicfolder. The Music folder is a folder specifically designated to play andmanage music files. When you copy music files from a CD or downloadthem from the Internet, the files are copied to the Music folder bydefault unless you specify a different location. The Music folder con-tains links to specialized music tasks that can help you play the musicyou store on your computer. In the Music folder, you can click Play Allor Play on the toolbar or double-click an individual music file to openand play the music in Windows Media Player. If you click Play All in theMusic folder, Windows Media Player opens and plays all the music inyour Music folder and subfolder in random order. If you click Play All ina subfolder within your Music folder, Windows Media Player opens andplays all the music in the folder in consecutive order.Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 275Viewing and PlayingMusic FilesView and Play Music FilesClick the Start button, and thenclick Music.Select the music files or folder youwant to play.Click Play or Play all.32123
  • 296. Using Sound Recorder and a microphone, you can record your ownsound files. Sound Recorder creates Windows Media Audio files withthe .wma file extension. If you are using Windows Vista Home Basic orBusiness, Sounder Recorder saves files in the .wav format instead of.wma. Sound Recorder doesn’t play sounds; you can play your record-ing in a digital media player, such as Windows Media Player. Beforeyou can use Sound Recorder, you need to have a sound card, speakers,and a microphone installed on your computer.276Creating a Sound FileRecord a SoundClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, click Accessories, andthen click Sound Recorder.Click the Start Recording button,and then record the sounds youwant.When you’re done, click the StopRecording button.Select a folder, type a name for thefile, and then click Save.Click the Close button.543212354
  • 297. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 277Besides customizing the desktop appearance of Windows, you canalso add sound effects to common Windows commands and functions,such as starting and exiting Windows, printing complete, opening andclosing folders, or emptying the Recycle Bin. You can select a soundscheme (a collection of sounds associated with events), or you can mixand match sound files to create your own sound scheme for yourcomputer. You need to use Wave files with the .wav file extension.Associating a Soundwith an EventCreate and Selecta Sound SchemeClick the Start button, click ControlPanel, and then double-click theSound icon in Classic view.Click the Sounds tab.Click an event to which you wantto associate a sound.Click the Sounds list arrow, andthen select a sound, or clickBrowse and locate the sound fileyou want to use.Click the Test button to previewthe sound.Click Save As, type a name for thesound scheme, and then click OK.To select a sound scheme, clickthe Sound Scheme list arrow, andthen select a scheme.Click OK.87654321Did You Know?You can add sounds to the list. If youput WAV files in the Media folder,located in the Windows folder, thesound files appear in the Sounds list.You can remove a sound associatedwith an event. On the Sounds tab, clickan event, click the Sounds list arrow,and then click (None).8736254WINV-6.3.3
  • 298. 278Windows Media Center (New!) is an entertainment system integratedinto your computer that lets you watch live or recorded TV, play videoand watch pictures, listen to music and radio using an FM tuner or theInternet, play and burn CDs or DVDs, browse online media, and playgames. Because Windows Media Center is designed to be used as anentertainment system, the display and navigation are unlike any otherWindows program. When you start Windows Media Center, the pro-gram uses the entire screen and doesn’t use menus or toolbars. Younavigate by using the up and down arrows to specify a main category,and then left and right arrows to specify a subcategory. Play, Record,and other VCR/DVD type commands are available in the bottom rightcorner when you point to them. You can use your mouse or a remotecontrol to navigate the system. Before you can play FM radio or watchTV, you need additional hardware installed on your computer, an FMtuner and a TV tuner card along with a remote control.Starting andNavigating WindowsMedia CenterStart, Navigate, and ExitWindows Media CenterClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then click WindowMedia Center.Point to the large icon in themiddle of the start screen, andthen move the pointer up ordown to display an arrow.Point to or click the up or downarrow to scroll the list ofcategories: Tasks, Online Media,Pictures + Videos, Music, TV +Movies.When the category you wantappears in the middle, point to it todisplay left and right arrows, ifavailable for the category.Point to or click the left or rightarrow to display the subcategoryyou want, and then click the icon.To get back to the main screen,point to the upper-left corner, andthen click the Back button.To exit, point to the upper-rightcorner, and then click the Closebutton.76543215632 7
  • 299. Chapter 9 Working with Windows Media Player 279You can set up and customize Windows Media Center (New!) byselecting Tasks on the start screen, and then selecting Settings. In theSettings area, you can set general options for Windows Media Centerand specific options for each of the media types, including TV, Pictures,Music, and DVD. You can also set options for extenders and libraries. AWindows Media Center Extender is a device you connect to your com-puter, such as a TV, DVD player, digital camera, or Xbox 360, that youwant to control from Windows Media Center within a networked envi-ronment. Before you get started with Windows Media Center, it’s agood idea to set general options, which include startup and windowbehavior, visual and sound effects, program library options, WindowsMedia Center set up, parental controls, automatic download options,optimization, and privacy.Changing WindowsMedia CenterSettingsChange Windows Media CenterSettingsOn the Windows Media Centerstart screen, scroll to Tasks.Display and click settings.Click the type of settings you wantto change: General, TV, Pictures,Music, DVD, Extender, or LibrarySetup.Click the setting type you want tochange.Specify the options you want. Usethe up and down arrow to displayoption screens.When you’re done, click Save orCancel.Click the Back button to navigateback to the start screen.76543214675
  • 300. 280Windows Media Center (New!) uses all the media files you alreadyhave on your computer and integrates it into an entertainment system.The same video and music files you use with Windows Media Playerare available for use with Windows Media Center. For example, whenyou rip music to your computer, you can play it using Windows MediaPlayer and Windows Media Center. You can choose either one, thepreference is yours. As you navigate to a media area, you can selectoptions to find the media you want, and then use the media specificcommands and controls to view, play, or change the media files.Finding and ViewingWindows MediaCenter FilesFind and View Windows MediaCenter FilesOn the Windows Media Centerstart screen, scroll to to a mediatype: Pictures + Videos, Music, orTV + Movies.Display and click the media typelibrary you want, such as videolibrary, music library, or picturelibrary.◆ If you know the library andwant to play all the media, clickplay all.Navigate to one of the sort criteriaand find the file you want to view.You can sort by folders or datetaken.Use the available commands forthe media you want to view, playor change.Use the controls on the lower-rightto pause, play, stop, and navigatethrough the media.Click the Back button to navigateback to the start screen.◆ You can select Now Playing orNow Playing + Queue on thestart screen to quickly accessand play items in the queue,which is a custom list of all themedia you want to play.65432121653
  • 301. Creating Movies UsingMovie MakerIntroductionWindows Vista comes with an accessory called WindowsMovie Maker (version 6) that lets you combine video, audio,and image files with special effects to create movies you canshow on your computer or CD, e-mail to others, record on adigital camera, or place on a web page.In Movie Maker, you create a project that contains thearrangement and timing information of audio and video clips,video transitions, video effects, and titles in a storyboard ortimeline.You drag video and audio clips from a collection tothe storyboard or timeline. After you arrange the video andaudio clips in the sequence you want, you can add videotransitions, video effects, titles, and credits. After you previewyour project using the monitor, you publish it as a movie fileto your computer or to a recordable CD, send it as an attach-ment in an e-mail message, save and send it to the web, orrecord your movie to a digital video tape.The movie youcreate can be watched in a media player, such as MicrosoftWindows Media Player, or in a web browser. If you wouldrather create a DVD, Movie Maker connects you withWindows DVD Maker (New!) and automatically imports yourmovie. In Windows DVD Maker, you can insert additionalvideo, pictures, and audio, add DVD titles and menus, andspecify publishing options before you burn the movie to aDVD. Windows DVD Maker is a stand-alone program and canbe used separately from Movie Maker.Before using Movie Maker, you need to connect andinstall the equipment needed to transfer video content toyour computer, such as a digital video or web camera. MovieMaker must detect the video device on your computer, andyou must properly connect the device to a USB port, a videocapture card, or an IEEE 1394 port. (Check your computerdocumentation for details.) 1010What You’ll DoPlan a Movie Maker ProjectStart Movie MakerView the Movie Maker WindowOpen an Existing ProjectCapture Video and AudioImport Video and AudioAdd Slides to a MovieOrganize Clips and CollectionsWork with ClipsCreate a Movie Maker Project FileTrim ClipsAdd Transitions Between ClipsAdd Video EffectsAdd Titles and CreditsAdd a Soundtrack and NarrationUse AutoMovieSave a Project and a MovieCreate a DVD Video281
  • 302. 282Movie Maker lets you combine video, audio,and image files to create movies you canshow on your computer, e-mail to others, orplace on a web page.You save the movie youcreate as a file, just as you would save a wordprocessing or spreadsheet file, and you canplay and view it at any time. However, moviesand their accompanying files are larger thanmost other documents you create—usuallyexceeding 5 MB. Before you begin, it’s a goodidea to plan your content.Decide the purpose of the movieYour movie might be a promotional piece orcatalog for business use, or a vacation movieto share with family and friends.Your purposedetermines the subject, type, and quality ofthe source material, which is the video andaudio material you will use.Determine how to share the moviewith othersYou might want to show your movie on acomputer projection screen at a meeting,send it as an attachment in an e-mail mes-sage, or place it on a web site. When youplace a movie on a web site, viewers mightdownload it, which means to transfer it totheir computers and store it for future view-ing. If your movie is very long or has manyhigh-quality images, the movie file will belarge and will take a long time to download.Choose source materialIf you have a digital video or digital web cam-era, you can record or capture digital imagesdirectly into Movie Maker on your computer.To use existing video or audio segments,called clips, you must import them, or bringthem into Movie Maker.You can also importclips from videotape, but your computer musthave a video capture card to convert clipsfrom analog to digital format.You can startthe System Information accessory on theSystemTools submenu to determine whetheryou have a video capture card installed onyour computer.Sketch the movieBefore putting your movie together in MovieMaker, it’s important to make a sketch of yourmovie that shows the order of the audio andvideo components. What audio clips do youwant to play with what video clips?Review the process used to createa movieFirst, you bring clips of source material into aMovie Maker project file. A project file, whichis the working copy of your movie, is a MovieMaker document with the file name extension.mswmm.You then use the project file to dothe following: set the order of your moviesegments; trim (delete) portions of clips youdon’t want to use; specify how clips displayfrom one to the next, called transitions; add avideo special effect to clips; add titles andcredits to the beginning and end of the movieor individual clips; and, lastly, preview yourwork. Finally, you save your project file as amovie with the file name extension .wmv anddisplay the completed movie using theWindows Media Player program.Planning a Movie Maker Project
  • 303. Before you start Movie Maker, use Display Properties in the ControlPanel to make sure the screen resolution is set correctly. Movie Makeris a Windows accessory program that you can start from the Startmenu. You achieve the best results in Movie Maker when the screenresolution is set to 1024 by 768 or higher. When you start Movie Maker,a new untitled movie project is displayed. You can either create a newmovie project or open an existing one.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 283Starting Movie MakerStart Movie MakerClick the Start button, and thenpoint to All Programs.Click Windows Movie Maker.21Did You Know?You can check online for the latestversion of Movie Maker. Click theStart button, point to All Programs,click Windows Update, connect to theInternet, scan for updates, check for anew version of Movie Maker, and thendownload it.See AlsoSee “Changing the Display” on page105 for information on changing thescreen resolution. For Your InformationHaving Fun with Movie MakerMicrosoft Windows provides additional Power Toys in Creativity FunPacks you can download from the Web. The Creativity Fun pack forMovie Maker includes sound effects, music tracks and transitions, andvideo titles and end credits that make it fun to create movies. Beforeyou can use the Movie Maker fun pack, you need to download it fromthe Web and install it. The fun pack movie files are stored in yourVideos folder. Click the Help menu, and then click Windows MovieMaker on the Web. The Movie Maker Web site opens in your webbrowser. Locate and click the link to the Movie Maker Creativity FunPack. Download the file, save it to your hard disk, and then double-clickto install it. Follow the wizard instructions to complete the installation.1 2
  • 304. 284Viewing the Movie Maker WindowCollections paneThe Collections pane displays yourcollections, which contains clips.Tasks buttonThe button displays the Movie Tasks pane. The Movie Tasks pane lists thecommon tasks that you may need to perform when making a movie.Contents paneThe Contents pane displays all of thevideo, audio, pictures, video transitions,and video effects that can be added tothe storyboard/timeline to include inyour movie project.MonitorThe monitor displays individualclips or an entire project.StoryboardThe Storyboard displays asequence of clips, video effects,and video transitions in yourmovie project.
  • 305. After you save a project in Movie Maker, you can open it and continueto work on the project. A Movie Maker project file is saved with a.mswmm file name extension, which you can open using the OpenProject button on the toolbar. The project file’s extension will change,once the project is finalized.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 285Opening an ExistingProjectOpen an Existing ProjectClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows Movie Maker.Click the File menu, and then clickOpen Project.Select the drive and folder thatcontains the project you want toopen.Select the project file.Click Open.54321Did You Know?You can automatically open a project.Click the Tools menu, click Options,click the General tab, select the OpenLast Project On Startup check box, andthen click OK.2534
  • 306. You can capture video and audio to your computer from a digital video(DV) or analog camera, web camera, videotape (VCR), or televisiontuner card directly in Movie Maker. Similarly, you can record audiosource material from a microphone, radio, audio or video tape, or a CD.Before you can capture video and audio, a video capture device mustbe connected properly and detected on your computer by WindowsMovie Maker. If you record clips from any commercial source, how-ever, be aware of copyright restrictions that regulate how you may ormay not use the content. In the capturing process, Movie Maker con-verts the material to Windows Media format.286Capturing Videoand AudioCapture Video froma Video CameraMake sure the digital videocamera is connected properly, andthen set the camera to playrecorded video.Click From digital video camera inthe Tasks pane.Click the digital video camera, andthen click Next to continue.Type a file name for your capturedvideo file.Select the location where youwant to save the video, and thenclick Next to continue.Specify the video settings youwant for capturing video andaudio, and then click Next tocontinue.Click Capture parts of the tapemanually.To separate the video into smallerclips, select the Create clips whenwizard finishes check box.Click Start Capture.To stop capturing video, click StopCapture.Click Finish.11109876543212
  • 307. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 287Capture Live VideoMake sure the digital videocamera is connected properly, andthen set the camera to playrecorded video.Click From digital video camera inthe Tasks pane.Click the digital video camera, andthen click Next to continue.Type a file name for your capturedvideo file.Select the location where youwant to save the video, and thenclick Next to continue.Specify the video settings youwant, and then click Next tocontinue.To separate the video into smallerclips, select the Create clips whenwizard finishes check box.To automatically stop the capture,select the Capture time limitcheck box, and then type or selecta time limit.Click Start Capture.To stop capturing video, click StopCapture.Click Finish.1110987654321Did You Know?Twenty hours of video take a gigabyteof hard disk space. You can storemore than 20 hours of video for eachgigabyte of hard disk space on yourcomputer.7
  • 308. If you want to use existing video and audio clips in your movie insteadof recording them yourself, you can obtain them from various compa-nies that specialize in video processing, or you can download themfrom the Web. Commercial CDs are excellent sources for audio clips.You can import the video and audio clips into Movie Maker from files onyour computer, from your CD drive, or from the Web. If you alreadyimported a video clip and need a still picture of a frame from a video,you can take a picture of the video frame and save it as a file, whichyou can then import back into Movie Maker.288Importing Videoand AudioImport Video or AudioClick the Import Media button onthe toolbar.Select the folder that contains thevideo or audio files you want toimport.To select a specific media type,click the Files of type list arrow,and then select a file type.Select the files you want to import.TIMESAVER To import severalfiles at one time, press and holddown the Ctrl key, and then clickeach file that you want to import.Click Import.Movie Maker creates a newcollection for the imported videoor audio clips.54321Movie Maker Import File TypesFile Type File ExtensionsVideo .asf, .avi, .m1v, .mp2, .mp2v, .mpe, .mpeg,.mpg, .mpv2, .wm, and .wmvAudio .aif, .aifc, .aiff, .asf, .au, .mp2, .mp3, .mpa,.snd, .wav, and .wmaPictures .bmp, .dib, .emf, .gif, .jfif, .jpe, .jpeg, .jpg,.png, .tif, .tiff, and .wmf5243
  • 309. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 289Display Clip PropertiesRight-click the clip you want, andthen click Properties.Scroll the list of properties.Click OK.321Did You Know?You can rename a media clip. Click theCollection folder that contains the clipyou want to rename, right-click the clipin the Collection area, click Rename,type a name, and then press Enter.132
  • 310. Instead of using video clips, you can create slide shows in MovieMaker with still images that you create using a digital camera, webcamera, or scanner. You can import the clips into Movie Maker andcreate transitions between them, just as you would in a movie. You canchange the duration of individual pictures in Timeline view. You canalso add sound clips to create a sound track that plays as your picturesappear on the screen. Portrait-oriented pictures in Movie Maker arethe same height as landscape-oriented pictures, and Movie Makerinserts a black background on either side of each one.290Adding Slides toa MovieSet Picture DurationClick the Tools menu, and thenclick Options.Click the Advanced tab.Specify the picture duration inseconds.Click OK.4321423
  • 311. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 291Import PicturesClick the Collections button, andthen click the collection whereyou want to place the importedpictures.Click Pictures in the Tasks pane.Select the folder that contains thepicture files you want to import.Select the files you want to import.TIMESAVER To import severalfiles at one time, press and holddown the Ctrl key, and then clickeach file that you want to import.Click Import.Movie Maker adds the importedpictures into the selectedcollection.Take a Picture from VideoClick the video clip from which youwant to take a picture.Drag the Playback indicator on theSeek bar to the frame that youwant to capture as a picture.Click the Tools menu, and thenclick Take Picture from Preview.Select a folder, and then type aname.Click Save.543215432153432
  • 312. When you bring video clips, audio clips, or pictures into Movie Maker,the program stores them in a collection folder in the Collections pane.The contents of the selected collection folder appear in the Collectionsarea. As you continue to collect media clips for use in different movieprojects, the number of clips in a collection and in Movie Maker cangrow rapidly and become hard to manage. You can use the same man-agement techniques you use in Windows Explorer to help you organizeand remove clips and collections. Once you have clips in your collec-tions, you can move them around and rename the clips and collectionsas you would a file or folder and use them to create a movie. When youno longer need individual video and audio clips or entire collections,you can remove them from Movie Maker. When you remove video andsound clips and collections, they are deleted only from Movie Maker;the original video and sound files, which you imported into MovieMaker, are not deleted and remain unchanged on your hard drive.292Organizing Clipsand CollectionsView and Create a CollectionClick the Collections button.Click the Collection folder youwant to view.Click the Views button on thetoolbar, and then click Thumbnailsor Details.Click the Views button on thetoolbar, point to Arrange Icons By,and then click an arrangementtype.To create a new collection, clickthe File menu, click NewCollection Folder, type a name,and then press Enter.To close the Collection pane, clickthe Collections button.To open the Tasks pane, click theTasks button.76543212 1 3 475
  • 313. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 293Move a Clip to a CollectionClick the Collections button.Click the Collection folder thatcontains the clip you want tomove.Drag the clip to another Collectionfolder.Rename a CollectionClick the Collections button.Right-click the Collection folderyou want to rename, and thenclick Rename.Type a name, and then press Enter.321321Did You Know?You can create a collection folder.Click the Collections button on thetoolbar, click the folder where youwant the new folder, click the NewCollection Folder button on the toolbar,type a name, and then press Enter.3 112Did You Know?You can delete a media clip. Click theCollection folder that contains the clipyou want to delete, click the clip in theCollections area, and then pressDelete.
  • 314. After you capture or import a video clip or audio clip, you can previewthe individual clips within a collection in the monitor. The monitor workssimilarly to a VCR/DVD. If you have a long clip that you want to divideinto smaller clips, you can split the clip on your own or let Movie Makertry to do it. Movie Maker creates clips automatically based on timestamps insert by the digital video camera or significant frame change inthe video.294Working with ClipsPreview a Clip in a CollectionClick the Collections button.Click the Collection folder youwant to preview.Click the clip you want to preview.Click the Play button.TIMESAVER Press Spacebarto play or pause a clip quickly.To pause the clip, click the Pausebutton. Click the Play button againto continue.To stop the clip, click the Stopbutton.654321Did You Know?You can drag a clip to play it. You candrag any clip from the Collections areato the monitor to begin playing thatclip.42 31
  • 315. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 295Split a ClipClick the clip from which you wantto split.Drag the Playback indicator on theSeek bar to the frame where youwant to split the clip.Click the Split the Clip button.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+L tosplit a clip.Create Clips AutomaticallyClick the video clip for which youwant to detect and create clips.Click the Tools menu, and thenclick Create Clips.21321Did You Know?You can combine clips. Hold downCtrl, click the consecutive clips youwant to combine, click the Clip menu,and then click Combine.1322 1Creates individual clips from one clip
  • 316. When you start Movie Maker, a new, untitled project opens. A projectcontains the arrangement and timing information of audio and videoclips, video transitions, video effects, and titles you have added to thestoryboard/timeline. You can view a project in one of two views:Storyboard view, which shows the order of your clips, and Timelineview, which shows the duration of each clip and the types of transi-tions between them, as well as, the sound track. To create a movie,drag video and audio clips from your Collections area to the projectfile’s storyboard or timeline, and then rearrange the clips in any orderyou want. After you preview your project using the monitor and you aresatisfied with the results, you can save it as a movie file.296Creating a MovieMaker Project FileCreate a ProjectClick the Collections button.Click the Collection folder thatcontains the clips you want to usein your project.To switch between the Timelineand the Storyboard, click theTimeline/Storyboard button, andthen click Timeline or Storyboard.TIMESAVER Press Ctrl+T toswitch between Timeline andStoryboard.Drag clips from the Collectionsarea to the place in the storyboardor timeline where you want them.To rearrange the order of clips,drag clips on the storyboard ortimeline.54321Did You Know?You can delete a clip from the story-board. If you drag the wrong clip to thestoryboard, select it, and then pressDelete. The clip remains in theCollections area and on your harddrive.4123
  • 317. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 297Preview a ProjectClick the Rewind Storyboardbutton or click Rewind Timelinebutton.The buttons change depending onthe view.Click the Play Storyboard button orclick the Play Timeline button.Change the PreviewMonitor SizeClick the video you want topreview.Click the View menu, and thenpoint to Preview Monitor Size.Click Small (320x240) or Large(640x480).TROUBLE? This option isavailable when there is enoughroom to resize the monitor withoutresizing the storyboard/timeline.32121Did You Know?You can play the video using theentire screen. Click the View menu,and then click Full Screen.1 212 3
  • 318. Frequently, the clips you record or import into Movie Maker run longerthan you want them to in your final movie. You can easily trim clips inTimeline view by playing the clip and setting the trim beginning pointand trim end point. The portion between the trim points remains in yourmovie. The frames before and after the trim points are deleted fromyour movie, but the original clip in your collection is not affected andretains its original length. You can trim a clip as it plays, or you canpause and set the trim points. You can use the Start Trim Point and EndTrim Point commands on the Clip menu or drag the timeline trimhandles (small triangles at the beginning and end of a selected clip).298Trimming ClipsCrop a ClipClick the Timeline/Storyboardbutton, and then click Timeline.Select the clip you want to crop.Drag the Seek bar to the pointwhere you want to start the clip.Click the Clip menu, and then clickTrim Beginning.TIMESAVER Position thepointer on the left edge or rightedge of the clip, and then drag thetrim handles to crop the clip.Drag the Seek bar to the pointwhere you want to end the clip.Click the Clip menu, and then clickTrim End.654321Did You Know?You can restore a clip to its originallength. Click Clip on the menu bar, andthen click Clear Trim Points.2634
  • 319. A transition is an effect that provides a smoother, more gradual changebetween clips in a movie. A transition plays before one clip ends whileanother starts to play. You can add a transition between two videoclips, pictures, or titles on the storyboard or timeline. Movie Maker pro-vides a variety of video transitions that you can quickly add to a movieproject, such as Bow Tie, Eye, Diamond, Fan Up, and Shatter In.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 299Adding TransitionsBetween ClipsAdding a TransitionClick the Locations list arrow, andthen click Video Transitions.Click the Timeline/Storyboardbutton, and then click Timeline orStoryboard.To view the Transition track in thetimeline, click the plus sign (+)next to the Video track in thetimeline.Drag a transition to the videotransition cell in the storyboard orbetween the two clips in thetimeline.To increase the transition durationin the timeline, drag the beginningof the transition towards thebeginning of the timeline.To decrease the transition durationin the timeline, drag the beginningof the transition towards the endof the timeline.65432121Video transition cellVideo transitions453
  • 320. Movie Maker offers a variety of video effects that you can add to amovie project, such as Ease In, Blur, Film Age Old, Mirror Vertical,Speed Up Double, and Watercolor. A video effect is applied for theentire duration of a clip, picture, or title in a movie project. You can addmultiple video effects to the same clip, as well as customize the order.If you no longer want to use a video effect, you can remove it.300Adding Video EffectsAdd a Video EffectsClick the Locations list arrow, andthen click Effects.Click the Timeline/Storyboardbutton, and then click Timeline orStoryboard.Drag the effect to the video effectcell of the clip in the storyboard oron the clip on the Video track inthe timeline.Change Order or RemoveVideo EffectsRight-click the clip with the effectsyou want to change, and then clickEffects.Click the displayed effect you wantto move or remove.To remove the effect, clickRemove.To move the effect, click Move Upor Move Down.When you’re done, click OK.5432132121Video effect cellVideo effects35243
  • 321. You can add titles and credits to your movies just like the professionals.You can add any text you want, such as the title of your movie, yourname, captions, and credits at the end. You can add a title at the begin-ning of a movie, before or after a clip, or overlapping a clip or credits atthe end of a movie. You can also change the appearance of the title orcredits, and you can add special animation effects, which play for thetime you specify in the Title Overlay track in the timeline.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 301Adding Titles andCreditsAdd Titles and CreditsSelect the clip you to which youwant to add a title.Click the Tasks button, ifnecessary, and then click Titles orcredits in the Task pane.Click the link to where you want toadd a title or credit.Type the text you want to appearas the title.Click Change the text font andcolor.Specify the font, font color, fontsize, formatting, background color,transparency, and position youwant.Click Change the title animation,and then select a title animation.Click Add Title.87654321Did You Know?You can change the title or creditduration. In the timeline, select the titleor credit in the Title Overlay track, andthen drag the edge to change theduration.You can remove a title. Select the titlein the storyboard or timeline, and thenpress Delete.354876
  • 322. With Movie Maker, you can play a video clip sound and soundtracksimultaneously and have one play louder than the other. You can puttwo types of sounds in your movies: sounds that are part of a video clip,and separate sounds, such as music or narration, that appear on theAudio bar of the timeline. You can import and edit sound clips in thesoundtrack the same way you edit video clips using the Audio bar.Remember that if you use a clip from a CD, you must obtain permissionfrom the publisher.302Adding a SoundtrackAdd a SoundtrackClick the Tasks button, ifnecessary, and then click Audio orMusic.Select the folder that contains thefiles you want to Import.Select the files you want to import,and then click Import.Click the Timeline/Story Boardbutton, and then click Timeline, ifnecessary.Drag the sound clip onto theAudio/Music bar at the locationwhere you want the clip to play.Click the Tools menu, and thenclick Set Audio Levels.Click the Rewind Timeline button,and then click the Play Timelinebutton.Drag the Audio Levels slider toadjust the balance between thevideo click and the soundtrack.When you’re done adjusting thevolume, click the Close button.9876543214176589
  • 323. If you have a microphone attached to your computer, you can record anarration to accompany your movie. Your narration is saved as a .wavsound file directly in your Collections area so that you can place it inthe Audio bar like any other audio clip.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 303Adding a NarrationAdd a NarrationClick the Timeline/Story Boardbutton, and then click Timeline, ifnecessary, and then drag theplayback indicator to the placewhere you want to start thenarration.Click the Tools menu, and thenclick Narrate Timeline.To select an audio device, inputsource, and other settings, clickShow Options.Drag the slide to adjust the inputlevels.Click Start Narration.When you’re done speaking, clickStop Narration.Save the audio file.Click Close.87654321See AlsoSee “Adding a Soundtrack” on page270 for information on changing theaudio levels.35 426 8
  • 324. You can use AutoMovie to help you automatically create a movie basedon the selected clips or collection. AutoMovie analyzes the selectedvideo clips, pictures, and music and combines them into a movie basedon your AutoMovie editing style. To use AutoMovie, the total length ofthe clips you use need to last for at least 30 seconds; each pictureneeds to play at least 6 seconds, and an audio clip needs to play atleast 30 seconds.304Using AutoMovieUse AutoMovieSelect the clips, pictures, andaudio you want in the Collectionsarea.Click the AutoMovie button on thetoolbar.Click an AutoMovie editing style.Click Enter a title for the movie.Type the text you want to appearas the title.Click Select audio or backgroundmusic.To select an audio or music file,click Browse, locate and selectthe audio or music file you want touse, and then click Open.Drag the slider to adjust the audiobalance level.Click Create AutoMovie.9876543212634978
  • 325. If you’re still working on a project, you can save the project file andopen it later to continue working with your movie. A saved project filein Movie Maker has an .mswmm file name extension. Before you saveyour project, you can include general information about the movie,such as the title, author, copyright, a rating, and a description, that isoften displayed during playback by many media players.Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 305Saving a ProjectSave a Movie ProjectClick the File menu, and then clickSave Project.Select the folder where you wantto save the project file.Type a project name.Click Save.Add Project PropertiesClick the File menu, and then clickProperties.Type the movie title.Type the author name.Type any copyright information.Type a rating for the movie.Type a description.Click OK.76543214321422346537
  • 326. After you preview the final project using the monitor, you can publishthe project file as a movie file. Using the Publish Wizard, you can pub-lish the movie file to your computer or a recordable CD, send it as anattachment in an e-mail message, or save and send it to the web. If youhave a digital video camera connected to your computer, you can alsorecord your movie to a tape. After you save the movie in the .wmv for-mat, you can play it in a media player, such as Windows Media Player,or in a web browser. If you want to create a DVD, Movie Maker con-nects you with Windows DVD Maker (New!) and imports your moviewhere you can customize it, and burn the movie to a DVD.306Publishing a MoviePublish a Movie to YourComputer or Recordable CDClick the Tasks button, ifnecessary.In the Task pane, click Thiscomputer or Recordable CD.Type a file name for the movie.Select a save location or insert arecordable CD.Click Next to continue.Click the movie quality option youwant: Best quality, Compress, orMore settings.Click Publish.Wait while Movie Maker saves themovie file.Click Finish.87654321Did You Know?You can save a movie to a digitalvideo camera. Turn on your digitalcamera, and connect it to your com-puter. In Movie Maker, click the Tasksbutton, click Digital video camera inthe Tasks pane, select your digitalcamera, click Next, use your videocamera controls to cue the tape, clickNext, click Yes, and then click Finish.53476
  • 327. Chapter 10 Creating Movies Using Movie Maker 307Publish a Movie to a DVD withWindows DVD MakerInsert a blank DVD into yourDVD-R or DVD-RW drive.In Movie Maker, click the Tasksbutton if necessary, click DVD, andthen click OK to burn your movie toa DVD.Click the Add items button, locateand select the media you want toinsert, and then click Import.Select a media item, and then clickthe Move up or Move down buttonto arrange the media on the DVD.Click DVD Burner list arrow, andthen select a DVD burner.To set options, click the Optionsbutton, specify the options youwant, and then click OK.Type a disc title, and then clickNext to continue.Click the Menu text button, specifythe text you want, and then clickChange Text.Click a menu style in the rightpane.Click Burn.Click the File menu, click Save,specify a location and name, andthen click Save.1110987654321Did You Know?You can send a movie in e-mail. Clickthe Tasks button, if necessary, clickE-mail in the Tasks pane, click AttachMovie to open a new e-mail messagewith the attached movie file, type anaddress and message, and then clickSend.23764 51089
  • 328. With Windows DVD Maker (New!), you can insert video, pictures andaudio, and combine it with titles and predefined menus to create a DVDvideo disc that you can play on a TV using a DVD player. To create aDVD, you add and arrange your media, add menu text, select a menustyle, choose DVD playback options, and then burn it. If you have stillphotos, you can also create a slide show set to music.308Creating a DVD VideoCreate a DVD Video UsingWindows DVD MakerClick the Start button, point to AllPrograms, and then clickWindows DVD Maker.Click the Add items button, locateand select the media you want toinsert, and then click Import.Select a media item, and then clickthe Move up or Move down buttonto arrange the media on the DVD.Click DVD Burner list arrow, andthen select a DVD burner.To set options, click the Optionsbutton, specify the options youwant, and then click OK.Type a disc title, and then clickNext to continue.Click the Menu text button, specifythe text you want, and then clickChange Text.Click a menu style in the rightpane.To customize the menu, click theCustomize menu button, specifythe options you want, and thenChange Style.Click the Slide show button,specify picture length and music,and then Change Slide Show.Click Burn.Click the File menu, click Save,specify a location and name, andthen click Save.121110987654321511789 10
  • 329. Setting Up Accounts andMaintaining SecurityIntroductionWith user accounts, you can customize and personalizeWindows for each user on your computer. Each user canhave their own Documents folder and list of Web favorites,customize computer preferences, and protect private files.When you set up a new user account, the account appearson the Welcome screen, where the new user can log on.Youcan use User Accounts in the Control Panel to add or deleteuser accounts, create a guest account, change a user’s groupor account type, change the way Windows starts, change theaccount picture, and set, change, and reset an accountpassword.Keeping your computer safe and secure is a continuingbattle. With the Windows Security Center, you can managecomputer security from one place.The Security Center makesit easy to find information about the latest virus or securitythreat, check the status of essential security settings, andquickly get support from Microsoft for a security-relatedissue.While you’re browsing the Internet or working in youre-mail program, you need to be aware of viruses and otherharmful attacks so you can protect your computer from beinginfected by one. Internet Explorer and Windows Mail includesecurity enhancements to help you make your computermore secure. In Internet Explorer, you can create securityzones to designate trusted web sites, set web site ratings torestrict user access, clean up Internet files and information,and manage cookies to protect your personal identity fromunauthorized access. If you’re tired to closing unwanted pop-up ads, you can use Pop-up Blocker in Internet Explorer toprevent most pop-up windows from appearing. In WindowsMail, you can select a security zone, set options to preventviruses in attachments and spam, and send secure e-mailusing digital IDs and encryption.1111What You’ll DoSecure a ComputerAdd and Delete User AccountsChange a User’s Group or Account TypeChange the Start Up ScreenSet, Change, and Reset a PasswordLock the ComputerManage Security in One PlaceDefending Against Malicious SoftwareSet Parental ControlsSecure Information Using WindowsCardSpaceEncrypt Files for SafetyAvoid Viruses and Other HarmfulAttacksUnderstand Security on the InternetCreate Security Zones and Set RatingsProtect Internet Privacy and IdentityBlock Pop-Up Ads with the InformationBarManage Add-OnsProtect Against E-mail AttacksSend Secure E-mail309
  • 330. 310Windows Vista provides several ways tosecure your computer.Create User AccountsFor a shared or workgroup computer, thereare two main types of user accounts: adminis-trator and standard. For a domain networkcomputer, different account types (administra-tor, standard user, restricted user) providesimilar permissions as the ones on a sharedor workgroup computer.The administrator account is for the per-son who needs to make changes to anythingon the computer as well as manage useraccounts. An administrator account can installprograms and hardware, make system-widechanges, access and read all non private files,create and delete user accounts, change otherpeople’s accounts, change your own accountname and type, change your own picture, andcreate, change, or remove your own pass-word.The standard account is for the personwho needs to manage personal files and runprograms.The standard account cannot installsoftware or hardware or change most com-puter settings.The guest account doesn’t have a pass-word for easy access and contains morerestrictions than the standard account.Theguest account is disabled by default andneeds to be turned on.You can also create a user group, which isa collection of user accounts that all have thesame security rights.The most common usergroups are the standard user and administra-tor. A single account can be a member ofmore than one group.Use Security CenterUse the Security Center to check your securitysettings— Window Firewall, Automatic Up-dates, and antivirus software—and learn howto improve the security of your computer.If a security option displays the SecurityCenter icon (New!) next to it, you need toenter the administrator password or provideconfirmation when prompted.This adds anadditional level of security on your computer.Securing a ComputerAdministratoraccountIcon indicates youneed Administratoraccount privileges toaccess
  • 331. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 311Enable Windows FirewallWindows Firewall is a security system thatcreates a protective barrier between yourcomputer or network and others on theInternet. Windows Firewall monitors all com-munication between your computer and theInternet and prevents unsolicited inboundtraffic from the Internet from entering yourcomputer. For more information on WindowsFirewall, see “Connecting to the Internet” onpage 135 and “Setting Up Windows Firewall”on page 137.Enable Automatic UpdatesWindows Automatic Updates allows you tokeep your computer up-to-date with the latestsystem software and security updates overthe Internet. For more information, see“Updating Windows” on page 440.Enable Internet Security OptionsInternet Explorer provides security zones tobrowse secure web sites and a rating systemto screen content, protects personal informa-tion and your privacy on the Internet, blockspop-up ads, and displays information to helpyou make security decisions. For more infor-mation, see “Understanding Security on theInternet” on page 332.Enable E-mail Security OptionsWindows Mail provides security zones to helpyou determine whether or not to run poten-tially harmful content from inside ane-mail, prevents your e-mail program fromsending mail with your e-mail address to con-tacts in your address book (which is a com-mon way propagate a virus), and stopspictures and other content from automaticallydownloading inside and e-mail to your com-puter (which is a common way spammersconfirm your e-mail address to send morespam). For more information, see “Sendingand Retrieving a File” on page 180 “Readingand Replying to E-mail” on page 178, and“Protecting Against E-mail Attacks” on page345.Protect Files and FoldersAnother way to protect the files on your com-puter is to use the built-in security providedby the NTFS file system.The NTFS file systemis available for Windows NT-based computers,which doesn’t include Windows 95, Windows98, or Windows Me.You can select your harddisk in My Computer and display Details onthe task pane to determine whether yourcomputer uses the NTFS file system.The NTFS file system provides additionalsecurity for your files and folders.You canmake a folder private, use the advancedEncrypting File System (EFS) to protect sensi-tive data files on your computer. If someonetries to gain access to encrypted files or afolder on your computer, a unique file encryp-tion key prevents that person from viewing it.While these security options are moreadvanced, they could be helpful for securingvery sensitive information. For more informa-tion, see “Encrypting Files for Safety” onpage 328.Understand the EnemyKnowing your enemy (harmful intruders) canhelp you make safe computing decisions thatlead to a secure computer rather than unsafeones that lead to potential disaster. For infor-mation, see “Avoiding Viruses and OtherHarmful Attacks” on page 330.
  • 332. If you have an administrator account or are a member of theAdministrators group, you can create a new user account or delete anexisting one. When you add a new user to your computer, Windowscreates a separate identity, allowing the user to keep files completelyprivate and customize the operating system with personal preferences.The name you assign to the user appears on the Welcome screen andthe Start menu. The steps to add and delete user accounts differ,depending on whether your computer is part of a domain network orshared/workgroup computer.312Adding and DeletingUser AccountsAdd an AccountClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.Click Manage another account.Click Create a new account.Type an account name.Click the Administrator option, orclick the Standard option.Click Create Account.Click the Close button.87654321Did You Know?You can delete an account. In UserAccounts, click the account you wantto remove, click Delete the account,click Keep Files to save account file tothe desktop or click Delete Files, clickDelete Account, and then click theClose button.You may need administrator access tomake security changes. If a securityoption displays the Security Centericon (New!) next to it, you need toenter the administrator password orprovide confirmation when prompted tomake a change.7465WINV-1.6
  • 333. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 313Add an Account ona Domain NetworkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view, and then clickManage User Accounts.Click Add.Type a user name and domain, andthen click Next to continue.Click a user access level option:Standard user, Administrator, orOther.Click Finish.Click OK.7654321Did You Know?You can delete an account on adomain network. In the User Accountsdialog box, click the Users tab, selectthe user you want to delete, clickRemove, click Yes to confirm, and thenclick OK.You can turn User Account Control onor off. In the User Accounts dialog box,click Turn User Account Control on oroff, select or clear the User AccountControl (UAC) to help protect yourcomputer check box, click OK, andthen click the Close button.73645
  • 334. If you have an administrator account or are a member of theAdministrators group, you can create a guest account. A guest accountprovides access to a computer for anyone who doesn’t have a useraccount. The steps to create a guest account differ, depending onwhether your computer is part of a domain network or shared/work-group computer.314Creating a GuestAccountCreate a Guest AccountClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.Click Manage another account.Click the Guest icon.Click Turn On.Click the Close button.Create a Guest Account ona Domain NetworkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view, and then clickManage User Accounts.Click the Advanced tab, and thenclick Advanced.Click Users.Double-click the Guest icon.Clear the Account is disabledcheck box.Click OK, and then click the Closebutton.Click OK.876543216543216567
  • 335. If you have an administrator account or are a member of theAdministrators group, you can change a user’s account type or usergroup on a domain network. A user account or group grants permis-sions to a user to perform certain types of tasks based on the accounttype or user group (domain network). The steps to create a guestaccount differ, depending on whether your computer is part of anetwork domain or shared/workgroup computer.Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 315Changing a User’sGroup or Account TypeChange a User’s Account TypeClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.If you want to change anotheraccount, click Manage anotheraccount, and then click the user’saccount name.Click Change your account type orChange the account type.Click an account type option.Click Change Account Type.Click the Close button.Change a User’s Group on aDomain NetworkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view, and then clickManage User Accounts.Click the Users tab.Select the user account name youwant to change.Click Properties, and then click theGroup Membership tab.Click the group you want.Click OK, and then click OK again.7654321765432165657WINV-1.6
  • 336. For added security, you can require users to use Ctrl+Alt+Delete (orCtrl+Alt+Del) before they can select a user account and enter a pass-word. This prevents other programs, such as spyware or a virus, fromgetting your user name and password as you enter it without your con-sent. When you lock your computer or switch users, the securityoption also requires users to press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.316Changing the StartUp ScreenIncrease Logon Security on aDomain NetworkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view, and then clickManage User Accounts.Click the Advanced tab.Select the Require Users To PressCtrl+Alt+Delete check box.Click OK.54321534Did You Know?You can also change the logon secu-rity on a workgroup network. OpenAdvanced User Accounts, click theAdvanced tab, select the Requireusers to press Ctrl+Alt+Delete checkbox, and then click OK.
  • 337. When you log on to Windows, the Welcome screen appears, displayinga list of user accounts with a picture next to each one. When you com-plete the logon process, the picture associated with your accountappears at the top of the Start menu along with your user name. Thisidentifies you as the current user of the computer. You can change thepicture to suit your own personality. Changing your account picture isnot available for computers on a domain network.Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 317Changing an AccountPictureChange an Account PictureClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.If you want to change anotheraccount, click Manage anotheraccount, and then click the user’saccount name.Click Change your picture orChange the picture.Click the picture you want.Click Change Picture, or clickBrowse for more pictures anddouble-click the picture you want.Click the Close button.7654321See AlsoSee Chapter 8,“Working with Pictures”on page 233 for information on creat-ing, scanning, and using pictures.7465
  • 338. If you don’t have a password associated with your user account, any-one can access your files. A password controls who has access toyour files. When you create a password, enter one that is easy for youto remember, yet difficult for others to guess. Good passwords are typi-cally at least seven characters and include letters (uppercase and low-ercase), numbers, and symbols. Once you create a password, you canalways change it.318Changing and Settinga PasswordChange or Create a PasswordClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.If you want to change anotheraccount, click Manage anotheraccount, and then click the user’saccount name.Click Change your password,Change the password, or Create apassword.Type a password, and then type itagain.Type a hint that reminds you of thepassword.Click Change password or Createpassword.Click the Close button.87654321Did You Know?You can change a password. In UserAccounts, click the account you wantto change, click Change My Password,type your current password, if neces-sary, type a new password, type itagain, type a hint, and then clickChange password.8475WINV-1.66
  • 339. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 319Change an AdministratorPassword on a Domain NetworkClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view, and then clickManage User Accounts.Click the Users tab.Click the administrator account.Click Reset Password.Type the new password, and thentype it again.Click OK.Click OK.87654321Security AlertWorking Smarter as the AdministratorIf you are an administrator, it’s recommended that you log out and useanother account for general work to avoid harmful damage to yourcomputer by a virus or malicious user. For example, if a hackerreceived access to your computer with administrator privileges, theattacker could reformat your hard drive, delete files, or create a newadministrator account.834756
  • 340. If you have ever forgotten your password, you understand how impor-tant it is to write it down. However, writing down a password is not verysecure. You can create a Password Reset disk, either a floppy disk orUSB flash drive, to help you log on and reset your password. If youhave any security credentials and certificates on your computer, thePassword Reset disk restores them. If you have forgotten your pass-word and don’t have a Password Reset disk, you can ask your adminis-trator to reset it for you. Resetting your password also erases anysecurity credentials and certificates on your computer.320Resetting a PasswordCreate a Password Reset DiskClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the User Accountsicon in Classic view.Insert a blank disk in the Floppydrive or USB Flash drive.In the Tasks pane, click Create apassword reset disk.Follow the instructions in theForgotten Password Wizard tocreate a password reset disk.54321Did You Know?You can reset your password at thewelcome screen. At the Welcomescreen, click the Help button to seeyour password hint, and then type thepassword if you remember it. If youdon’t, click the arrow. Click Resetpassword, and then follow the instruc-tions in the Password Reset Wizard tocreate a new password. Type yournew password, and then press Enter.45Type useraccount password
  • 341. If you are working on sensitive material and need to leave yourcomputer unattended for a while, you can lock it so that no one canuse it without your permission. While your computer is locked, all yourprograms continue to run. When you return to your computer, you canaccess your computer in the same way you started Windows. If theCtrl+Alt+Del security option is enabled, you are required to pressCtrl+Alt+Del before you can enter a password.Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 321Locking the ComputerLock and Unlock the ComputerClick the Start button, and thenclick the Lock button.TIMESAVER Press A+L tolock the computer. The Windowskey A is located in the lower-leftcorner of the keyboard.If the Ctrl+Alt+Del screen appears,press Ctrl+Alt+Del.At the Welcome screen, click yourname (if prompted), type yourpassword, and then press Enter.321See AlsoSee “Starting Windows Vista” onpage 4 and “Switching Users” onpage 22 for information on logging onto Windows Vista.1WINV-1.4.2
  • 342. The Windows Security Center provides a single place to manage yourfour security essentials, Windows Firewall, Automatic Updating,Malware protection (virus and spyware) and Other security settings(Internet security and User Account Controls). The Security Centerrecommends security settings that you can use to help protect yourcomputer. It also provides links to important information about thelatest virus or other security threat, or to get customer support fromMicrosoft for a security related issue. As you work, Windows Vistauses security alerts and icons in the notification area on the taskbar tohelp you recognize potential security risks, such as a new virus, out ofdate antivirus software or an important security option is turned off,and choose appropriate settings.322Managing Security inOne PlaceView Essential Security SettingsUsing the Security CenterClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Security Centericon in Classic view.IMPORTANT If you’re part of anetwork, options might be grayedout; your security settings aremanaged by your networkadministrator.To find out information on asecurity area, click the downarrow next to it.To set security settings, click thelink (Windows Update, WindowsFirewall, Windows Defender, andInternet Options) for the area youwant to change.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.54321435
  • 343. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 323Act Upon Security AlertsIf the Security Center detects thatyour computer needs enhancedsecurity, it displays an alert in thenotification area.Read the security alert, and thenclick it.To find out information on asecurity option, click the downarrow next to it.To find out how to address theproblem, click a link or a button,and then follow the instructions.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.54321Security IconsIcon DescriptionSecurity Settings: Indicates important securityinformation and settings that are available, such asthe Windows Security Center.Potential Risk: Indicates your computerencountered a potential security risk; act uponthe security alert.No Risk: Indicates your computer is more secureand using recommended security settings; noaction needed.Security Warning: Indicates your computerencountered a warning alert, which is potentiallyharmful; consider adjusting security settings.Security Problem: Indicates your computer is notusing recommended security settings; consideradjusting them.Did You Know?You can change the way AutomaticUpdates alerts changes. Click the Startbutton, click Control Panel, double-click the Windows Update icon inClassic view, click Change settings,select the alert option you want, clickOK, and then click the Close button.534
  • 344. 324Windows Defender (New!) helps you protect your computer from spy-ware and other potentially harmful software that attempts to installitself or run on your computer. Spyware is software that tries to collectinformation about you or change computer settings without your con-sent. Windows Defender alerts you in real-time when unwanted soft-ware tries to run on your computer. You can also use WindowsDefender to scan your computer and set up a schedule to automaticallyscan on a regular basis. When you receive an alert of a potential prob-lem, you can use the Microsoft SpyNet community to help you deter-mine if the software is already to run. Windows Defender usesdefinitions to determine potential problems. Since software dangerscontinually change, it’s important to have up-to-date definitions, whichyou can get online.Defending AgainstMalicious SoftwareUse Windows DefenderIf a real-time alert appears with anattempt to:◆ Install software. Click Ignore,Quarantine, Remove, or AlwaysAllow.◆ Change Windows settings.Click Permit or Deny.Click the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the WindowsDefender icon in Classic view.To perform a scan, click the Scanbutton arrow, and then click QuickScan or Full Scan.To view or clear history, click theHistory button, and then click anitem to view history or click ClearHistory to remove all activities.To go backward and forward to thepreviously viewed screens, clickthe Back or Forward button.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.7654321 7Statusinformation6 54WINV-1.2
  • 345. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 325Change Windows DefenderOptionsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the WindowsDefender icon in Classic view.Click the Tools button.Click the links to the tools andsettings you want to change:◆ Options. Set up a scanschedule and choose defaultactions when alerts appear.◆ Microsoft SpyNet. Allows youto join the SpyNet community.◆ Quarantined items. Allows youto remove and restore items.◆ Allowed items. Allows you toremove items from the list.◆ Software Explorer. Allows youto scan your computer forprograms and provide securityinformation about them. Youcan stop, remove, disable orenable programs.◆ Windows Defender website.Access the Windows DefenderWeb site at Microsoft to getupdates and definitions.To go backward and forward to thepreviously viewed screens, clickthe Back or Forward button.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.654321654Set WindowsDefenderoptionsSoftwareExplorer
  • 346. 326Parental Controls (New!) help you manage how your children use thecomputer. Parental Controls allows you to set limits on your children’sWeb access, the amount of time spent logged on the computer, andwhich games and programs they can use. You can set different settingsfor each user account on your computer, so you can adjust the levelyou want for each child. You can also review activity reports on aperiodic basis to see what your children are doing on the computer.Setting ParentalControlsSet Parental ControlsClick the Start button, and thenclick Control Panel.Double-click the Parental Controlsicon in Classic view.To select a games rating system,or an activity report reminderoption, click an option in the Taskspane.Click the standard user accountfor which you want to set controls.Click the On, enforce currentsettings option and then click theOn, collection information aboutcomputer usage option.Click the links to the WindowsSettings you want to change:◆ Web restrictions. Select a Webrestriction level (High, Medium,None or Custom) and options toblock or allow websites or filedownloads.◆ Time limits. Click and drag thehours you want to block orallow.◆ Games. Select options to blockor allow games based onratings or specific games.◆ Allow or block specificprograms. Select an option touse all programs or only theprograms I use.Click OK, and then click OK again.7654321756Web restrictions
  • 347. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 327With Windows CardSpace (New!), you can securely send informationin the form of online cards to Web sites or online services. WindowsCardSpace is a system for creating relationships with Web sites andonline services that provides a consistent way for you to review theidentity of a site, manage your information, review information beforesending it to a site and for sites to request information from you.Windows CardSpace can replace the user names and passwords thatyou use to register and log on to Web sites and online services. Youcan create a personal card or have a business or organization issueyou a managed card.Sending SecureInformation UsingWindows CardSpaceUse Windows CardSpaceClick the Start button, then clickControl Panel.Double-click the WindowsCardSpace icon in Classic view.If necessary, click OK to dismissthe introduction screen.To add a card, click the Add a cardbutton, click Add, click a cardtype, enter information, and thenclick Save.In the main screen, use taskcommands to duplicate, delete,back up, and restore cards.To modify a card, double-click thecard, and then click any of thefollowing task commands:◆ Edit card. Make changes, andthen click Save.◆ View card history. View theinformation, and then click OK.◆ Lock card. Type a PIN code,type it again, and then clickLock.To go back to the main screen,click the Back button.When you’re done, click the Closebutton.87654321754 8
  • 348. 328If your computer uses NTFS, you can use the advanced Encrypting FileSystem (EFS) to protect sensitive data files on your computer. If some-one tries to gain access to encrypted files or a folder on your computer,a unique file encryption key prevents that person from viewing it. Whenyou encrypt a file, you also need to decide whether you want to encryptthe folder, too. When you encrypt a folder, you need to decide whetheryou want to encrypt all files and subfolders within it.Encrypting Filesfor SafetyEncrypt or Decrypt a Fileor FolderRight-click the file or folder youwant to encrypt, and then clickProperties.Click the General tab.Click Advanced.Select the Encrypt contents tosecure data check box to encryptthe file or folder or clear the checkbox to decrypt it.Click OK.Click OK.If necessary, click an option toapply changes to this folder onlyor to this folder, subfolders, andfiles.Click OK.87654321Did You Know?You can compress files and folderswith NTFS. Right-click the file orfolder, click Properties, click theGeneral tab, click Advanced, select theCompress contents to save disk spacecheck box, and then click OK twice.For Your InformationManaging and Backing Up Encryption CertificateWhen you encrypt a file or folder, Windows uses information from yourEncrypting File system certificate. A certificate is a digital documentthat verifies the identify of a person, which is issued by a trustedCertification Authority. If you lost the certificate or it becomes cor-rupted, you will not be able to recover an encrypted file or folder. Toavoid this problem, you should back up your Encrypting File System(EFS) certificate. To manage and back up your EFS certificate, click theStart button, click Control Panel, double-click the User Accounts icon,click the Manage your file encryption certificates, and then follow theEncrypting File System wizard.54WINV-4.2.5
  • 349. Chapter 11 Setting Up Accounts and Managing Security 329If you have a two partition (also known as volumes) hard drive, you canuse BitLocker (New!) to encrypt the entire system drive, including theWindows system files needed to startup and logon to Windows Vista.BitLocker helps protect your system and blocks hackers from access-ing sensitive information behind the scenes. When you add files to yourcomputer, BitLocker automatically encrypts them. When you copy filesto another location, the files are decrypted. After you turn on BitLocker,it’s critical that you create a recovery password, because BitLockerlocks up the entire drive if it detects a problem during startup.Encrypting FilesUsing BitLockerTurn On BitLocker to Encrypt theEntire System DiskClick the Start button, then clickControl Panel.Double-click the BitLocker DriveEncryption icon in Classic view.Click Turn On BitLocker.Follow the BitLocker setup wizard.Click the Close button.54321Did You Know?You can turn off or temporarily disableBitLocker. Click the Start button, thenclick Control Panel, double-click theBitLocker Drive Encryption icon inClassic view. To temporarily disableBitLocker, click Disable BitLockerDrive Encryption.53
  • 350. 330Understanding Harmful AttacksUsing the Internet can expose your computerto a wide variety of harmful attacks, such asviruses, worms, andTrojan Horses.Theseattacks can come through e-mail, file transfer-ring, and even possibly through Java andActiveX, which are both programming lan-guages used to enhance web pages.A virus is an executable program whosefunctions range from just being annoying tocausing havoc to your computer. A vir